Home

User Manual for Macintosh Version 5.0

1. Fonts amp Display Eudora User Manual Address Handling for Reply to All This setting specifies other particulars of addressing a reply to all message Include Yourself lf this setting is on you receive a copy of your own reply when you Reply to all Your address is left in the address list of the new message If this setting is off your address is removed from the reply message and you do not receive a copy of the reply Put original To recipients in Cc field not To field lf this setting is on the addresses of the original message recipients are moved from the To field to the Cc field of the reply to all message Only the address of the original sender is placed in the To field If this setting is off all of the addresses are placed in the To field of the reply message To determine who you are for the Include yourself setting Eudora uses the me nick name You create the me nickname in your Address Book If you do not have a me nick name Eudora uses the contents of the Username Mail Host and Return address fields from the Getting Started settings Treat lists specially lf this setting is on and if you Reply to all mailing lists will be included in your reply However this function does not work with all mailing lists Priority Handling Copy original s priority to reply onJ When this setting is on your replies use the same priority as the original message Fonts amp Display
2. Stops any operation currently in progress Turns Balloon Help on or off Undo Redo or main toolbar function Note Function keys can be linked to main toolbar buttons by turning on the Map function keys to buttons option in the Toolbar settings 243 Shortcuts Eudora User Manual Press these keys This happens mooo e e pe ineno mooo ee 244 Setting Eudora Preferences Introduction To display settings dialogs where you can specify how you want to use Eudora are found in the Settings option under the Special menu By selecting or turning off options in these dialogs you can customize how you want Eudora to manage your mail When you first install Eudora the Settings dialogs contain preset or default settings You can turn on new settings or change any of the default settings brackets indicate the default setting Once finished just click OK and your settings are changed Note For your convenience some settings appear in more than one category For example your return address appears in both the Getting Started settings dialog and the Sending Mail settings dialog Changing an setting in one category changes the setting in all categories in which it appears Getting Started In the Getting Started settings dialog you can determine the minimum information neces sary for you to send and receive email The information you enter here is for your dominant personality which is your primary email accoun
3. Toolbar The Toolbar settings determine how the main toolbar appears To display the Toolbar settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Toolbar icon The Toolbar settings dialog appears 267 Getting Attention 268 Eudora User Manual Toolbar settings Settings Show Toolbar Tool bar aa Getting Attention ef Show tool bar Orientation is Horizontal tool bar d Vertical toolbar Button style d Big icons with names Big icons only C Small icons amp names o Small icons only Names only E Extra Warnings i Hood Watch Function keys _ Map function keys to buttons _ Show function key labels Internet Dialup Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Show toolbar on When this setting is on the main toolbar appears on your desktop Orientation Horizontal toolbar This specifies the orientation of the main toolbar hori zontal at the top of your screen or vertical along the left side Button type Big icons only This specifies how the button names and icons appear Map function keys to buttons off lIf you turn this setting on the function e g F5 keys mimic the main toolbar buttons Function keys off lIf you turn this setting on the function key labels appear on the main toolbar under each button Getting Attention The Getting Attention settings determine wha
4. or drag selected message summaries from an open mailbox window To set the options for displaying the main toolbar do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Inthe Settings category list scroll and choose Toolbar Settings The Toolbar Settings dialog displays There are options to show or hide the toolbar to show it horizontally or vertically to show large or small icons names or combinations of icons and names to map the buttons to function keys and to display the corresponding function key with the buttons For details see Toolbar on page 267 If you choose a display option that makes the toolbar long arrow buttons are added to the ends of the toolbar so that you can easily scroll through it and find the button you need Using Eudora Plug ins Plug ins are special add on pieces of software that can be plugged in to Eudora installed in Eudora to add specialized features to Eudora You can purchase Eudora plug ins developed by other companies For information on plug in software that s avail able for use with Eudora visit the Eudora web site lt http www eudora com gt or send email to lt eudora rep qualcomm com gt Here are some examples of what these software helpers can do m A language conversion plug in will let you translate a message into another language m A security plug in will let you secure or scramble a message automatically so it can t be read by others m A text manip
5. 346 Index Width option 260 Windows Bitmap file format 42 94 Windows NT server POP or IMAP how to obtain 316 Word Service adding 309 Word Wrap icon 32 41 Word wrap option 41 253 WorldMail Server 316 Wrap Selection command 41 Wrapped text 32 41 Write to Internet Config option 277 X X Attachments field 43 in outgoing mail 36 44 X Eudora Settings web site address 28 Z Zoom windows when opening option 260
6. Opens the Filters window or bring it to the front to create and edit filters that organize your messages See Filtering Messages on page 135 for complete details Opens the Mailboxes window or bring it to the front to create rename move and remove your mailboxes and mail folders See the chapter Working with Mailboxes on page 111 for full details and IMAP users should also see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for supplementary details Eudora User Manual Eudora User Manual Choose this command Personalities Stationery Link History Task Progress Your Open Mailbox and Message Windows Window Menu This happens Sponsored and Paid modes only Opens the Personalities window or bring it to the front to create rename edit and remove personalities multiple email accounts or variations of accounts See Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 69 for full details IMAP users see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for additional information on setting up IMAP personalities Opens the Signatures window or bring it to the front to create rename edit and remove your custom signatures See Using a Signature on page 61 for full details Sponsored and Paid modes only Opens the Stationery window or bring it to the front to create rename edit and remove stationery message files These are canned or template messages that can be used to send the
7. Reply With submenu If None is selected in the 67 Sending or Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery Eudora User Manual Stationery popup no default stationery is used for the selected personality To link a particular stationery to an alternate personality see Linking a Signature and Statio nery to a Personality on page 76 You can also set up a filter to reply with a stationery message For more details see the Reply With filter action under Filtering Messages on page 135 68 Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Using Alternate Email Accounts In Eudora you can set up a different personality for each alternate email account you have For example if you have work home and school email accounts you can set up Eudora to send and receive email for each of these accounts all without having to quit and restart Eudora That is you can check mail for all your personalities at once or for selected personalities and you can do the same for sending mail You can even stagger your automatic mail checks To set up a personality you enter information in the Personalities and Personality Extras dialogs which are found in Settings under the Special menu or in the Personalities window under the Window menu For each new personality you create you need the following information m personality name m real name m username m mail host name incoming server m S
8. Retrieve messages marked for retrieval Retrieve the messages on the server that are marked Fetch from Server or Fetch amp Delete in Eudora via the icons on the incoming message window or the server action popup in the message summary This is for messages that were retrieved only in part either with 85 86 Managing Your Mail on the POP Server Eudora User Manual m the Leave on server for days option or the Skip messages over K option in the Checking Mail or the Personality Extras settings m or with the Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option in the Mail Transfer Options dialog Note To mark a message Fetch from Server Delete from Server or Fetch amp Delete either click the icons in the incoming message window or select an option from the server action popup of the message summary Delete all messages that have been retrieved Delete all the messages on the server that have already been transferred to the computer you are currently using Delete all messages on server be sure Delete all of your messages on the server even if Eudora has not fetched them Caution Be absolutely sure this is what you want to do because there is no way to undo it Fetch all message headers to In mailbox Retrieve the header and the first few lines of every new message If you select this option the messages are filtered but any Copy To or Transfer To filter action is not perform
9. Working with Mailboxes Mailboxes are where your messages reside Folders are where mailboxes and messages reside if you so choose This section describes mailboxes and folders that have been set up locally on your computer for a POP account If you have an IMAP account please refer to Working with IMAP Mailboxes on page 124 Opening a Mailbox m To open a mailbox choose it from the Mailbox menu m To open a mailbox that is within a folder referred to as a nested mailbox choose the folder from the Mailbox menu then choose the mailbox from the submenu or continue selecting subfolders until the mailbox can be selected m To open a mailbox from the Mailboxes window choose Mailboxes from the Window menu The Mailboxes window displays all the mailboxes and folders in your Eudora Folder m To open a mailbox in the Finder double click the desired mailbox Mailbox menu and Mailboxes window Mailboxes Mailbox ie Eudora Folder In DUTA Out il Trash Ate to Ea Computer Ofer EA EIMS Books ba Fun Cady Gwen Huntley CDs EA MAC Eudora Ga i 5 EE personal kiowie 5 p Ci Eudora E Sl Internet Fami ly p wl Qualeornn Friends School work Guna S Opening Other Mailboxes You can open a mailbox that is located outside the Eudora Folder on a different network volume for example by doing the following m From the Mailbox menu choose Other A standard file dialog appears asking you to s
10. filter action your signature is not added to the message when it is sent unless you originally created the message Eudora considers the message to be originally from you if the address in the From field exactly matches either your return address or one of the addresses belonging to your nickname called me if you have one set up in your Address Book Sending Rejected Messages Again If for some reason an email message cannot be delivered to a recipient mail transport agents return the message to the original sender you A message is typically rejected because of an error in the recipients address although many other reasons are possible The return message usually includes cryptic information that may let you determine the reason the message was rejected It also includes the text of the original message You can easily recover the original message make any corrections and resend it To do this for the current message do the following m From the Message menu choose Send Again This eliminates the inserted extra text and reformats the message as it originally appeared You can then make changes or additions and send the message again The Send Again command is also useful for resending saved messages such as those in your Out box or those you ve Cc ed to yourself You can send the same message to another recipient to avoid having to retype the whole message or you can send a different message to the same recipients to
11. 3 Armand Rouleau 3 Gwen Huntley Stewe Dorner Delete Syne Folder Open Folder ESP Settings 2 Inthe ESP Groups window click New located at the bottom of the window The Share Group dialog appears 289 Creating an ESP Group Eudora User Manuall Share Group dialog New ESP Share Group Wizard pE Share Group Would vou like to W Create a brand new share group C Skip directly to advanced share group setup aa Cen 3 Choose Create a brand new share group then click Next The Share Group Name dialog appears Share Group Name dialog New ESP Share Group Wizard pE Share Group Name What would you like to call this share group It will help people you invite if this name is descriptive and unique so that it s unlikely that they already have a share group with the same name share Group Name f Marketing plana e g gt Smith Family Photos Ce Ce 4 Inthe Share Group Name text box type the name of your group then click Next The Share Group Description dialog appears 290 Eudora User Manual Creating an ESP Group Share Group Description dialog SS Now ESP Share Group Wizard FF Share Group Description In the edit box below you may optionally type a description that briefly describes the purpose and or contents or this share group Share Group Description Marketing items and documents Ce Ce 5 Inthe Share Group Description text box type a brief description of
12. 4 Click OK At the next mail check from that computer Eudora ignores the copies of those previously read messages and looks for new ones However if you check mail from another computer those messages are treated as new and are transferred to that computer For more information see Checking Mail on page 246 The Leave on server for days option can also be set for each of your alternate person alities To do this display the Personality Extras settings dialog See Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 Important The Leave on server for days option should be used with care since it can result in a buildup of messages on the POP server 83 84 Managing Your Mail on the POP Server Eudora User Manual Deleting a Message from the POP Server To delete a message that has been left on the server without retrieving it again do the following m Turn on the Trash icon iy in the message s icon bar m Set the message summary s server action to Delete then check mail again m Inthe Mail Transfer Options dialog turn on the Delete all messages that have been retrieved option See Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions on page 85 For more information on deleting messages see Deleting Messages on page 131 Skipping Messages Over a Certain Size To stop Eudora from transferring incoming messages that are too large do the following m For your dominant per
13. Connection POP and IMAP Mail Management POP only Download Options IMAP only Sending Mail Server Connection Message Composing Mail Account Information xii 208 211 211 212 214 216 218 219 220 224 225 226 22 230 231 234 235 237 23 23 239 242 245 245 245 246 246 246 247 248 248 249 250 250 251 251 252 252 Contents Contents Nickname Expansion Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only Check Spelling Ignore words with Suggest words that Attachments Sending Attachments Receiving Attachments Replying Reply to all Address Handling for Reply to All Priority Handling Fonts amp Display Mailbox Display Columns Drawing Message Preview Date Display Date formats Display timezone Eudora Labels Styled Text Sending mail with styles When receiving styles pay attention to Formatting Toolbar Moving Around After finishing a messages More keystroke options Toolbar Getting Attention When something exciting happens More attention getting behavior Sounds Hosts Checking Mail Sending Mail Directory Services All connections Extra Warnings Deleting Queueing and Sending Other MoodWatch 252 293 254 254 200 259 256 256 25 25 258 258 208 261 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 269 269 266 266 266 26 7 26 7 26 7 268 269 269 2 0 2 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 21 4 xiii Contents Internet Dialup 275 Miscellaneous 2 6 Personalities
14. Enter the information in the fields of this dialog as required Following are the descrip tions of the IMAP options Location Prefix Enter a folder location representing the pathway to your mail boxes This tells Eudora where to look for your mail on the incoming IMAP mail server An example mailbox location prefix is usr mail lf you are not sure what to enter in this field ask your email administrator or your ISP Download Options When you check mail for your IMAP account these options you can only choose one tell Eudora how much of each incoming message to retrieve from the IMAP server to your Macintosh You can retrieve just the essential headers or alternately the entire message and any attachments under a specified size Eudora User Manual Creating an IMAP Personality Minimal headers only Turn this option is on and only a limited set of message headers and nothing else is retrieved for each incoming IMAP message The remaining headers the message body and any attachments are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later The headers tell you who sent the message the date and time it was sent and the subject Once you have this information you can decide whether you want to retrieve the full message and any attachments or just delete the message Full message except attachments over K If this option is on and a number is entered in the box the full message full se
15. Eudora email User Manual for Macintosh Version 5 0 This document is designed for use online The Contents and Index sections plus all cross references are hot linked Just click the topic and the topic information appears In the Index click the page number Also if you click any cross reference you will display the topic referenced This manual was written for use with version 5 0 of the Eudora software for Macintosh This manual and the Eudora software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved This manual and the Eudora software may not be copied except as otherwise provided in your software license or as expressly permitted in writing by QUALCOMM Incorporated Copyright 1992 2000 by QUALCOMM Incorporated All rights reserved Copyright 1988 1992 by the University of Illinois Board of Trustees Portions of the Eudora software were written by John Norstad Copyright 1988 1990 Northwestern University and David Johnson Copyright 1984 Brown University All rights reserved The LDAP Library is Copyright 1992 1996 by the Regents of the University of Michigan All rights reserved Eudora Eudora Pro and Eudora Light are registered trademarks and the emailman graphic is a trademark of QUAL COMM Incorporated PureVoice SmartRate and MoodWatch are trademarks of QUALCOMM Incorporated WorldMail and Eudora Internet Mail Server EIMS are trademarks of QUALCOMM Incorporated QUALCOMM is
16. If a string of text is selected anywhere in Eudora open a new Search window and search through all of your mailboxes for that text string This lets you perform a Turbo Search on selected text If a message window is open and text is selected in that window open a new Search window and search for the selected text in the mailbox that contains the open message This lets you perform a Turbo Search on a selected text string and restrict it to the current mailbox only If a message window is open and text is selected in that window open a new Search window and search for the selected text in all mailboxes under the mail folder that contains the open message This lets you perform a Turbo Search ona selected text string and restrict it to the containing mail folder only This menu lets you work with windows in Eudora You can bring them to the front of the window stack send them to the back of the stack open special windows called tool windows or make them active and apply and remove tabs to these tool windows and tabbed window groups For more information on tabbed windows see Managing Windows in Eudora on page 171 Note oo windows are the windows named in the middle section of the Window menu beginning with the Address Book and ending with the Task Progress window 231 Window Menu 232 Window menu Window Send to Back Tabs ae Address Book L Directory Services Y Filters
17. Makes an Address Book entry nickname from the Book Entry Entry From current selection Note that something must be Selection selected for the modified name to appear on the menu Option Sort Sort Descending Sorts in reverse order descending rather than ascending Option Tabs Revert To Default Reverts to the default configuration for tabbed Tabs window groups 241 Shortcuts 242 Shortcuts Press these keys Command Command 0 Command 1 Command 6 Option Command 6 Shift Option Command 6 Command Command Command Command Command Option Command F Option Command F Command F Command H Eudora User Manual The keyboard shortcuts for Eudora commands and functions are shown in the table below The Command key on most Macintosh keyboards is marked with Apple Computer s apple logo and or a cloverleaf If a shortcut corresponds to a menu command that can be modified with the Shift key or Option key or both you can similarly modify the shortcut See the previous modifier tables Note that menu command shortcuts execute the command without opening the menu This happens Adds to dictionary add unknown word to spelling dictionary Sends queued messages Enters selection into Find window Sends to back moves current window to the back of all Eudora windows Adds levels of excerpt bars Removes levels of excerpt bars Fi
18. Send on check on Turn this setting on if any messages queued in your Out mailbox and marked with a Q in the Status column of the message summary are sent when mail is checked whether the mail check is automatic or manual Timed queue messages those marked with a clock icon in the Status column of the Out box are sent only if their time constraints are satisfied Mail Management POP only Leave on server for days off blank Turn this setting on and enter the number of days you want Eudora to leave messages on the POP server When this setting is on Eudora copies incoming messages to your computer whenever you check for mail If you leave the text box blank your mail is left on the server indefinitely See Leaving Mail on the Server on page 83 for more information Delete from server when emptied from trash off Turn this setting on to delete messages from your Trash mailbox and POP server Skip messages over K off 40 Turn this setting on and enter a file size in Kilobytes in the text field and Eudora will not retrieve the message in its entirety if its over the file size you specified here These messages are retrieved only in part which include the first few lines of the message along with a statement that says the message is not complete This setting can be useful if you have a slow connection Eudora User Manual Checking Mail Checking Mail settings IMAP server SSS Sf attings Account Server I
19. X Attachments A list of documents being attached to and sent along with this message You ll see an icon and name for each attachment For instructions on how to add attachments to a message see Attaching a File to a Message on page 43 To delete an attachment from an outgoing message select it and press the Delete key The attachment is deleted in Eudora but not in your computer Message Body After filling in the header fields move the insertion point to the space below the message header Type the body of the message here For information about formatting your message text see the sections Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 39 and Formatting Toolbar Text Styles on page 33 You can insert pictures and horizontal lines into the message text You can also create clickable links to URLs for your recipients For more details see Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 42 Saving a Message for Later Changes Sometimes it is convenient to save an outgoing message either as a safeguard when typing long messages or so you can return to it later to make changes To save the current message do the following 36 Eudora User Manual Setting the Message Priority m From the File menu choose Save To save all of the outgoing messages that you currently have open do the following m While holding down the Option key choose Save All from the File men
20. asparks 2 Barbara_Leos carolyn ross pnicg com 2 eme J gdana 2 ghuntley G Hew Nickname yi New Address Book a All of the names are kept in address books so you can group your names by putting them in different address books Eudora Nicknames is the default address book and the example above shows an additional address book called Family m To show or hide the names in an address book click the blue triangle to the left of the file name You can use the View By popup menu to display the names by different criteria for example by Last Name If you want to view the entries by Last Name choose Last Name from the View By popup If you view by a field that does not contain any data the entry appears as the nickname enclosed in brackets preceded by three periods Dad 181 Printing Your Address Book Eudora User Manual You can do the following in the address book window m You can find and select an entry by typing the first few letters of the entry The list of entries must be active to make the list active click somewhere in the list m You can page up and down in the list of entries use the arrow keys to move up and down through the entries or hold down the Command key and use the arrow keys to move up and down through the files of entries Printing Your Address Book To print your Address Book entries do the following m With the Address Book open from the File menu choose Print Creating an Addre
21. s original text is quoted in the message body This text can be edited as needed Additional text can be added to the reply just as to any outgoing message and the reply can then be sent or saved for further changes The sender s text is quoted with a left sidebar also called an excerpt bar Quoted text with excerpt bar This text includes styled text such as bold aatetthatis Very BIG Messages that have been replied to are identified with a left arrow in the Status column of their message summary Eudora implements a new Internet standard for sending text format flowed This new standard lets you send text with returns only at the ends of paragraphs which is more convenient for reading on small or unconventional displays However unlike styled text format flowed is not unpleasant for recipients with simple mailing programs For more information on format flowed see www eudora com techsupport mac Using the Reply Options There are several options that you can use when replying to messages To quote only some of the sender s text select the text you want then press the Shift key and choose Reply Quoting Selection from the Message menu m To include everyone who received the original message press the Option key and choose Reply To All from the Message menu Or turn on the Reply to all By default option in the Replying settings dialog see Replying on page 257 and the Message menu option changes to
22. IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix if you are using IMAP If you have been instructed to enter that information do sO now 4 To save your settings click OK If you d like more information on the additional fields of the Checking Mail settings dialog see Checking Mail on page 246 If you use POP and you want to learn how to manage your mail on the POP server see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 81 If you use IMAP and you want to learn all about IMAP and how Eudora lets you check receive read respond to and otherwise manage your mail on the IMAP server see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 23 Importing from Outlook Express Eudora User Manual Once you have configured Eudora you are ready to begin sending and receiving messages However you may want to change the Eudora operating mode and register your copy of Eudora Importing from Outlook Express To set up a newly migrated account from Microsoft Outlook Express 5 0 as a new account in Eudora do the following 1 From the File menu choose Import Mail The Email Importer dialog appears Email Importer dialog Email Importer EF John at home Outlook Express 5 EF John at school Outlook Express 5 EF John at work Outlook Express 5 ey John at play Outlook Express 5 Ca Import Account OY Select Other 2 Choose the email account from the list and click Import Account To choose a mail folder to import via a
23. If you prefer to use Command F Find from the Special menu choose Settings then Moving Around Turn on the Exchange Find and Search menu command key setting Basic Search Procedure To search through your mailboxes and mail folders for one or more messages that contain the information youre seeking do the following 153 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual 154 From the Special menu choose Find then Search or press Option Command F The Search window appears Default Search window sample mailboxes Search E est gt Gam gt S Etim gt Gon z AmA Admin Set the match conditions for your search Click More if you want to specify additional conditions Click Fewer to remove these additional conditions if you change your mind See Setting Up the Search Conditions on page 157 Set the additional conditions if you have them and then specify whether all of the conditions must be matched or only one condition must be matched by selecting Match all or Match any from the popup This popup appears only if you have multiple search conditions In the Mailboxes tab choose the mailboxes and folders in which you want to search Depending on how you invoke the search some or all of your mailboxes may already be selected If you use the Search All command all of your mailboxes are automati cally selected See Using the Mailboxes Pane on page 162 for more details After you
24. You can do this for each IMAP account you have Keeping a Trash mailbox on your IMAP server lets you manage your discarded IMAP messages exactly the way you would manage messages in a local POP Trash mailbox To do this you must turn on the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option in the Personality Extras settings dialog Without a Trash mailbox on the IMAP server you must mark messages for deletion and then remove them on a mailbox by mailbox basis See the next section Deleting Messages from the IMAP Server Usually the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option is already turned on by default However to turn on this feature and use a Trash mailbox on the IMAP server for one of your IMAP accounts do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category list and choose Personality Extras The Person ality Extras settings dialog appears 3 From the Personality popup choose your desired IMAP personality 4 Check the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server box to turn it on 5 To save your changes and close the Settings dialog click OK The first time you delete or transfer a message from a mailbox in that IMAP account Eudora will try to create a trash mailbox on that server If it fails Eudora will prompt you to choose a trash mailbox manually Just choose the New command under the IMAP submenu of the mailbox selection menu to create a new mailbox to be used as the Trash mai
25. but does not delete the original message If Turbo redirect by default is turned on in the Miscellaneous settings hold down just the Shift key without the Option key Sponsored and Paid modes only Submenu Creates a new message that is formatted using the selected stationery file This submenu provides a handy way to use stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Submenu Replies to the sender of the currently open or selected message and formats the reply using the selected stationery If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings you must hold down the Option key to display this submenu title This submenu and its variants provide a handy way to create replies that use stationery Submenu Replies to the sender and all of the original recipients of the currently open or selected message and formats the reply using the selected stationery If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings you do not need to hold down the Option key Submenu Replies to the sender of the currently open or selected message quote only the text you ve selected from the original message and formats the reply using the selected stationery If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings you must hold down both the Shift and Option keys to display this submenu title Submenu Replies to the sender and all of the original recipients of the currently open or selected message quotes only the text yo
26. contains the Eudora LDAP Library for LDAP lookups via the Directory Services window and the Eudora Internal Speller for built in spell checking Spelling Dictionaries contains your User Dictionary your User Anti Dictionary and the two dictionaries American Common and American Complete all of which are used with the built in spelling checker The Eudora Stuff folder also contains Eudora plug ins that were installed by default along with other items Eudora Help the file containing all of Eudora s Balloon Help Rot13 Text plug in and README UPPERlower Text plug in and README Space amp Tab Converter plug in and README QUALCOMM PureVoice application Plug in Help and README Adobe Acrobat Reader Plug in and README optional Eudora User Manual Eudora Application Folder Extra Plugins Use the Extra Plugins folder to store uninstalled plug ins that you may want to use ata later time To use one of the Eudora plug in files contained in this folder do the following 1 Quit Eudora 2 Drag the plug in file into your Eudora Stuff folder 3 Restart Eudora For further instructions see Using Eudora Plug ins on page 306 The installed Extra Plugins folder contains the following files all plug in files are resource plug ins README the text file that contains information on the plug ins in this folder ESP a plug in file that allows you to use the Eudora Sharing Protocol where you can create a
27. must turn on the feature in the Fonts and Display settings dialog See Fonts amp Display on page 258 Specifying an Attachment Folder If you do not want to use the default Attachments folder to receive your attachments you need to specify a folder where your attachments go when you receive a message To specify an attachment folder do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Attachments 3 Under the Attachment Folder option click the long button A standard file dialog appears 4 Double click the name of the folder you want to use its name should be displayed in the menu above the list then click the Use Folder button The dialog closes leaving the Settings dialog displayed The name of the folder you just selected is now displayed in the Attachment Folder button See below 5 Ifthe name of the folder appears on the button click OK An attachments folder is selected Settings EZ Encoding method Attachments i AppleDouble C Applesingle Al d BinHex 5 d Uuencode data fork Fonts amp Displa pr ef Always include Macintosh information ef Receive MIME digests as attachments Attachment Folder Eudora Attachments C Trash attachments with messages TEST files belong to Cx Note If at any time Eudora cannot find your selected folder an alert appears at startup informing you that the Attachment Folder is unavailable Eudora uses
28. 67 109 Reply To field in Filters 141 Index Require control key for text message dragging option 42 Requirements 18 Resize cursor 117 Re sort mailboxes less often option 277 Resource plug ins 307 Retrieve messages marked for retrieval option 85 Retrieve new mail option 85 Retrieve only message headers 86 Return address if not username mailhost option 36 250 252 Return address option 280 Return Receipt 38 Return Receipt icon 33 Return switches among header fields option 267 Right Now option in Change Queueing dialog 54 Rot13 Text plug in 307 S Save As dialog 65 Save As command 65 Save mail as text as a single file 147 Guess Paragraphs option 147 Stationery option 147 TEXT files belong to option 147 Save password option 89 247 Saving messages 36 Say OK to alerts after 2 minutes option 269 Screen Font option 259 Scripts menu 235 add or delete AppleScripts 235 Send Anyway button spelling alert 49 254 Send mail whenever sends are done option 280 Send message Next Time Queued Messages are Sent option 54 Send message On or after option 54 Send message Right Now option 54 Send message Don t Send option 55 Send Messages Specially command 81 Send on check option 55 79 89 248 251 Send plain amp styled both option 265 Send plain text mail only option 265 Send Queued Messages command 53 Send queued messages option 85 Send styled mail only option 265 Sendable status 37 55 Sender Recipient col
29. 760 345 6789 Fax 760 876 5432 Mobile 760 649 3928 Wels www ABC Technical corm Swap with Home wf Primary Information 2 In this dialog you can type the person s work information including title company name postal address phone numbers and a web site address for this person s company All fields are optional 3 If you d like to swap the Work and Home dialog information click Swap with Home 4 Ifthe information listed here is this person s main work information check the Primary Information box 188 Eudora User Manual Adding Entry Information To enter other information do the following 1 Click the Other tab The Other dialog appears Address Book Other dialog Nickname Uncle Joe Sd a Recipient List Personal Other Email Addresses Joe ee work corn Other Phone Mumbers 858 435 6456 night job Other Web Pages www To fa ml byt ree corm 2 Inthis dialog you can type other email addresses phone numbers and web site addresses for this person All fields are optional 189 Changing Moving Saving and Updating Entries Eudora User Manual To enter more information on this person do the following 1 Click the Notes tab The Notes dialog appears Address Book Notes dialog Nickname Be Fecipient List Personal Birthday March 14 Anniversary July 2 2 Inthis dialog you can type anything you want This is good place to enter information such as the person s birthday and othe
30. Acknowledgments The Eudora software was designed and written by Steve Dorner Pete Resnick John Boyd Alan Bird Martin Naiman John Purlia Clarence Wong Christine Park Forest Hill and Scott Gruby Quality assurance performed by Matt Dudziak and Gwen Huntley This manual was written by Gigi Miller and Armand Rouleau Icons were designed by Arlo Rose Thanks to Tim Maroney for the folder choosing code John Norstad for the window placement code John Bruner for the Mishawaka font Ray Davison for the Include Self code David Johnson for the BinHex code and Cal Simone of Mainstay for help in redesigning Eudora s AppleScript Dictionary Finally thanks to all the users and testers of Eudora whose suggestions have made it a much better program than it otherwise would have been About the Name Why the name Eudora When looking for a name for this new Post Office Protocol mail program we thought immediately of the title of the short story Why I Live at the P O and named the program after the author of the story Eudora Welty Why I Live at the P O can be found in a collection entitled A Curtain of Green and other stories Harcourt Brace amp Co Ms Welty s stories are funny sad and fascinating she s surely one of the great American writers August 2000 PM80 48129 4 Contents Introducing Eudora Email Introducing Eudora Email What s New in Eudora Email v5 0 system Requirements Opening and Configuring Eu
31. Also you can set MoodWatch to monitor incoming and stored messages for offensive content If you don t want to use MoodWatch at all you can turn it off in this dialog Also you can choose if you want to use MoodWatch for incoming messages only outgoing messages only or both To display the Extra Warnings settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the MoodWatch icon The MoodWatch settings dialog appears MoodWatch settings Settings Mood Watch ef Enable Mood Watch EW Getting Attention Warn when queueing sending CG lf the message seems like it might be offensive Ab lf the message is probably offensive dhi lf the message is on fire C Never Extra Warnings Scanning incoming mail ef Scan new mail as it arrives f Sean stored mail in the background Scam Mood Watch o a wo Internet Dialup Miscellaneous Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Enable MoodWatch lf checked MoodWatch is on To turn MoodWatch off just uncheck the box Warn when queueing sending If the message seems like it might be offensive Turn this setting on to set Mood Watch to its most sensitive level If your message has some content that looks like it might be offensive one chili pepper appearing you will be warned when you queue it If the message is probably offensive Turn this setting on to set MoodWatch to
32. Animate animated GIF images off Turn this feature on to display animated GIF images embedded in HTML messages Mailbox Display The Mailbox Display settings control the display of the contents of mailbox windows These settings determine which columns appear whether separator lines appear whether the message preview pane appears by default in all mailbox windows and the conditions under which previewed messages that are marked unread blue bullet in Status column are automatically marked read blank Status column Note Search window Results panes appear according to the settings in this dialog For more details see Finding and Searching on page 149 To display the Mailbox Display settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Mailbox Display icon The Mailbox Display settings dialog appears Mailbox Display settings Settings Columns ef Status e Label ef Size wf Priority Fef Wy ho ef Server Attachments Date yw Mood Subject is always shown Spell Checking es Attachments Drawing vf Draw horizontal separator lines ef Draw vertical separator lines Replying ef Use Finder list color scheme Ej Show count of selected messages Message preview Fonts amp Display ef Show message previews by default Lf Mark read if clicked in or tabbed to or scrolled ef Mark read if next message used to move away ef Mark r
33. Bar The icon bar is a row of icon buttons displayed just under the title bar These icons let you control the priority of your message override some of your default settings for the current message apply text styles to the message and send or queue the message When you click the leftmost icons popup menus appear allowing you to make a selection When you click the middle buttons you can turn functions on or off for the current message You may also see buttons to enable Eudora plug ins when you click on them for example PureVoice Finally the Send Queue button at the far right lets you send or queue the current message Following are the icon descriptions You can set some of the defaults for the icon bar in the Sending Mail settings the Attach ments settings the Styled Text settings and the Personality Extras settings See Setting Eudora Preferences on page 245 Priority This lets you indicate that your message is of higher or lower priority than E a normal message For most messages this is just an empty box normal priority For details see Setting the Message Priority on page 37 Signature This lets you automatically add one of your signatures to the end of the message For details see Using a Signature on page 61 Attachment Type This lets you select the encoding format for attachments For details see the section Attaching a File to a Message on page 43 Text Styles Toolbar Click this i
34. Before you can link a signature or stationery to a personality you need to create them first Eudora User Manual Replying from a Personality To link a signature and stationery to a personality do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Personality Extras The Personality Extras settings dialog appears Personality Extras settings dialog SSS Jettings Personality to Configure Personality Business ae i ait Internet Dialup More Checking Mail Mail Protocol POF IMAP Authentication Passwords Kerberos APOP _ Skip messages over e _ Leave on serwer for i days More Sending Mail Miscellaneous Personalities Stationery ar Signature PA Standard ryt r m com Domain to Add Auto Configure ri Statistics i 3 Inthe Personality popup choose the personality whose signature or stationery you want to change 4 Inthe Stationery popup choose the stationery you want to use with this personality 5 Inthe or Signature popup choose the signature you want to use with this personality Note The Stationery selected here overrides the selected signature It is advisable to use either the signature or the stationery for this personality 6 Inthe Domain to Add field enter the domain name you want Eudora to automatically add to an unqualified name addressed in messages sent from this personali
35. Book or press Command L Or if the Address Book is in an inactive window in an open tabbed window group Click its tab 2 Inthe Address Book choose which address book if more than one is set up in which you want this group s information listed Click Mew Nickname J Entering a new address book entry group SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSFSSSSSSso_ScSSsStoodoHoHoHHHHHHHHd Address Book amp Address Book i Filters kp Directory Services Link History View By Nickname lt SD Eudora Nicknames untitled nickname EB Dad First Name Last Name EE Mom Bis Unele Joe This nickname will expand to the following address es 7 P History List abird 2 arouleau asparks Bar bara_Leos Q eme gdana 2 ghuntley B Gigi_Miller G New Nickname Gy New Address Book 3 Inthe highlighted text field type the name for example My buddies of the new group next to the nickname icon OR type the nickname in the Nickname text field on the right side of the window The nickname entry appears in the list and you can now add information for this entry 4 When finished click anywhere and the nickname appears in the list 5 Click the Personal tab The Personal dialog appears 185 Adding Entry Information Eudora User Manual Address Books Personal dialog group EE Address Book E Address Book View By Nickname eS Eudora Nicknames B My buddies w Family Full Name My buddies a EE Dad First Name Last
36. Cd Fixed Display timezone a Local timezone Sender s timezone Mailbox Display Date Display Eudora Labels Styled Text ae Moving Around Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Date formats Age sensitive This specifies how to display the date If Age sensitive is selected messages dated today appear with the time messages dated within the last six calendar days appear with the day of the week and messages dated seven calendar days or more ago appear with the date Fixed lf Fixed is selected all messages appear with the time and date 263 Eudora Labels 264 Eudora User Manual Display timezone This specifies what time zone to use Local timezone If this timezone is selected messages appear with your time and date Sender s timezone TIf this timezone is selected messages appear with the sender s time and date Eudora Labels The Eudora Labels settings let you determine the title and color of the 15 labels that can be used to categorize messages The first seven labels are Macintosh labels You can change the names and colors for these labels in the Preferences dialog under the Edit menu displayed from the Finder To display the Eudora Labels settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Eudora Labels icon The Eudora Labels settings dialog appears Eudora Labels settings Settings E m 5 Z a
37. Eudora uses the Disposition Notification To header in return receipt requests to request that you be sent a notification when your message appears by the recipient If you turn this setting on Eudora also sends the Return Receipt To header in return receipt requests This header is understood by some older mail delivery systems and may return you a receipt when your message is delivered to your recipient s mailbox The Return Receipt To header cannot give you any information about whether or not your recipient displayed your mail and is not supported by many newer mail delivery systems Write to Internet Config off If you turn this setting on preferences are written to Internet Config If you do not intend to write to Internet Config leave this setting off Read from Internet Config not recommended off lf you turn this setting on prefer ences are read from Internet Config If you do not intend to read to Internet Config leave this setting off Correct but slow international sorting off If you turn this setting on slower but internationally correct string comparisons are used Generate filter reports off If you turn this setting on a filter report is generated when messages are filtered from the In mailbox Prompt for receipts requested by self on When this setting is on and if you request a return receipt in an outgoing message including yourself as a recipient you are asked to respond to th
38. Find then Enter Selection or press the Command shortcut The selected text is automatically inserted into the text field of the first search condition in the Search window Anywhere contains lt selected text gt Now when you open the Search window using any of the Search functions Search Search All Search Mailbox or Search Mailfolder the text will be available for performing your search Text you enter in the Search window using the Enter Selection command remains in the Search window even after you close it However you can type over the text to change it Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders The next time you perform a search by choosing Search All Search Mailbox or Search Mailfolder while text is selected in an open window the text you entered with the Enter Selection command is replaced with the text selected for the Turbo Search Note When you choose Enter Selection the selected text is automatically inserted into both the Find dialog Find field and the Search window text field of first search condition In this way you can use the same text for both a Find and a Search Setting Up the Search Conditions The following figure below shows a sample Search window set up to perform a search Search window with sample search setup target popup comparison popup value field From contains word committee isless then E TE Hail boxes E Eudora Folder Ef Out ib Trash a
39. Ignore file updates Note The system default options from the pop up menus for all incoming and outgoing menus correspond to the last chosen options you selected in the Notifications dialog The Role buttons combined with the Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder and Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM my shared folder are then equal to the choices in the pop up menus The Advanced tab dialog allows you to add update and delete settings independently of each other Whereas in the Notifications dialog while simpler keeps the settings locked For example you could use the Advanced tab dialog to specify that you want to be asked when a delete occurs but not when additions and updates occur To set a group password click Set Shared Secret The Shared Secret dialog appears Shared Secret dialog The shared secret helps to make ESP more secure If you change the secret you must tell all other members in your group the new value or ESP will not accept changes from other members Com Cae In the text box enter a secret word or phrase that will be known only to you and the other members in your group You will need to share the secret word or phrase with the other group members The secret word or phrase is used to make the transmission of file changes more secure so that ESP can verify any incoming file changes were actu ally sent by a group member If your shared secret does not match the shared se
40. Issues Mapping Between MIME Types and Macintosh Types When you send attached files to other Eudora users Eudora automatically knows what kind of data is in the files because Eudora sends along special information with the file However if you re sending the file to a non Macintosh user or receiving files from a non Macintosh user it s important to get the right MIME type information on the file or for Eudora to understand what the MIME type information means Eudora knows about some MIME types However since new MIME types are being defined all the time it may be necessary to add to Eudora s knowledge from time to time If youre familiar with ResEdit this isn t too hard to do The way Eudora maps between MIME and Macintosh types is with EulM and EUOM resources EUOM resources are used for sending attachments EulM for receiving They have the same basic structure EuOM and EulM resources are lists of individual elements called maps Each map describes a Macintosh document type or MIME data type and then lists what MIME data type or Macintosh document type it corresponds to For any given type Eudora looks through all the maps in all the EUOM or EulM resources and uses the best match Note EUOM and EulM resources are also used when uuencoding and uudecoding files so that filename suffixes can be mapped to and from Macintosh types A good set of EulM and EuOM resources can substantially improve document exchange with syst
41. Legal from the Personality submenu just described That message is now associated with your Legal personality and all of your replies to that message from now on are sent from your Legal personality Note You can also set up a filter to automatically assign a desired personality to incoming messages that satisfy the filter criteria See the Make Personality action under Filter Actions on page 142 Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality In Eudora you can link a signature and a stationery to an existing personality via the Personalities Extra settings dialog For example if you have Business personality you can link your Business signature and stationery to this personality If you are using a default stationery file or if you send or reply to a message with statio nery then the signature stored in the stationery file overrides the default signature for the current personality Also stationery from the first personality is replaced with the stationery from the new personality No matter what signature gets assigned to the new message or reply when you open or initiate it you can always override that signature by selecting a signature from the Signa ture popup in the composition window For more details see Using a Signature on page 61 For more information on how to use stationery with multiple personalities see the section Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 64 Important
42. Mailbox or Mail Folder on page 123 m Moving an IMAP mailbox or folder into another folder is the same as POP See Moving a Mailbox or Mail Folder into Another Folder on page 123 m Removing IMAP mailboxes and folders is the same as the POP See Deleting a Mailbox or Mail Folder on page 124 If you choose to remove a mailbox in which messages are still stored or a folder in which other mailboxes folders or messages are stored then all the messages mail boxes and folders contained within the selected mailbox or folder are also removed Here s what happens when you remove an IMAP mailbox or folder m The item is deleted from the IMAP server The item is removed both from the Mailboxes window and from the Mailbox and Transfer menus Note Unlike with POP items deleted IMAP items cannot be recovered In particular they are not moved to the Finder s Trash m The mailbox list is refreshed for that IMAP account and is updated in the Mailboxes window and on the Mailbox and Transfer menus See Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders on page 128 Important You cannot delete a root IMAP folder for removing IMAP mailboxes and folders because you will be deleting a personality Resynchronizing an IMAP Mailbox or Folder If you have a computer at work another at home a third at school and a laptop when you travel and if you use IMAP for your incoming mail your IMAP mailboxes and folders need to be
43. Name ER Mom E Sis ae Uncle Joe This nickname will expand to the following address es Joe Saol com q History List Mike mean corm O abird Tina eudoramail com E arouleau Denise eudoramail com ry Tony hotmail com sapere Terry yahoo cor C Barbara_Leos O emt 2 gdana 2 ghuntley Q Gigi_Miller G New Nickname Cy New Address Book Cote JC ee 6 Inthe Full Name field type the a descriptive or an informal name for the group This name is included in the Jo field for your recipient to see 7 Inthe This nickname will expand to the following address es text field type the complete email address for each person included in the group Separate multiple addresses with commas or carriage returns this is the only place you can use a Carriage return to separate addresses You can also use nicknames in this field but be sure that any nicknames you use are defined by their own entry You can use a mixture of nicknames and complete email addresses Note Make sure this field contains no other information except addresses and nick names or your messages will be addressed incorrectly 8 If you want to put this group on your recipient list check the Recipient List box Adding Entry Information In the Eudora Address Book there are several dialogs in which you can add information for a person or a group These text fields may be used liberally when entering information Following is a description of each dialog The Per
44. Once the desired document is located choose it and click to attach the document to the message You can add as many attachments as you want You can also drag one or more files from the desktop onto the message window to attach them To attach a graphic file you must drag it above the header divider line or else it will be inserted in the message body Note Use the Attach submenu from the Message menu to attach files created with Eudora plug ins See Using Eudora Plug ins on page 306 for details 43 Attaching a File to a Message Eudora User Manuall 44 An outgoing message with an attached document OS ralphprizio myfirm com 10 22 AM 0700 reference fH H Ls e ee Font size coter BL 7 LU Pe ell eres 1a To ralphprizioiimy firm cam From Daron Clifford sOClLiffordimyfirm com gt Business Subject reference CC Bec H Attachments 01 Introduction Ralph here s the document you requested Daron To detach an attachment before you send a message do the following 1 Inthe X Attachments field choose the attachment 2 Press the Delete key or from the Edit menu choose Clear The attachment is deleted When the message is sent if the attachment is not a plain text file it is encoded in the selected attachment type This allows you to send any kind of attachment even Macintosh applications The attachment types include the following AppleDouble ar This is best for recipients with
45. Personalities window DS Personaliti F H G x Domi nant s Gr Busi ness Ga Family Gl IMAP person Ga Personal The Personalities window displays the personality icon and name for each personality you have set up lt lt Dominant gt gt indicates your principal email account which is the account Eudora uses whenever you don t specify a particular personality and it s the account associated with all the mail stored before you began using personalities You can select multiple icons and names in the Personalties window to perform some of the operations listed below Press the Shift key to select a consecutive range of items and press the Command key to make non consecutive selections At the bottom of the Personalities window are icon buttons that you can use to manage personalities m New Add a new personality When you click this button a new personality icon appears in the personalities column See the following section Creating a New Person ality Remove Delete the selected personality Note however that you cannot delete the lt lt Dominant gt gt personality You are prompted to confirm the deletion for each person ality you have selected to delete Note that these deletions are permanent and cannot be undone When you delete a personality any messages associated with that person ality are reassigned to your Dominant personality You can use the Delete key as a shortcut for this command See Dele
46. Press the Esc key Escape to cancel the rename Note You cannot rename the Eudora Folder or the In Out or Trash mailboxes Moving a Mailbox or Mail Folder into Another Folder To move a mailbox or mail folder into another folder do the following m Choose the item you want to move and drag it to where you want it If you drag it over a closed folder the folder opens so you can see its contents It closes when you drop the item or you drag it above the folder or out of the window To move a mailbox or mail folder into the root folder do the following m Drag it to the Eudora Folder at the top of the list Note You cannot move the Eudora Folder or the In Out or Trash mailboxes 123 Working with IMAP Mailboxes Eudora User Manual 124 Moving Messages from One Mailbox to Another To transfer an open message into a mailbox in the Mailboxes window do the following m Grab the open message by the Tow Truck icon ae in the upper right corner of the message window and drag it to the mailbox dropping it when the mailbox is high lighted You can also drag one or more selected message summaries from an open mailbox window to a mailbox in the Mailboxes window dropping them when the mailbox is high lighted If you drag messages over a closed folder the folder opens so you can see its contents It closes when you drop the messages or you drag them above the folder or out of the window Deleting a Mailbox or Mail Folder To del
47. Raise or Lower to set the priority one level higher or lower instead of setting a particular priority level New messages are created with the Normal priority To change the priority of the current message use the Priority popup on the icon bar of the composition window Changing the priority of a message using the Priority popup No Recipient 10 19 AM 0 00 No Subject AMSG Cu B 7 UE PE Highest High p Normal fiifford SDC lifford myfirm com gt Business Low Lowest Raise 5 Lower 37 Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manuall 38 To set up Eudora to always use the sender s priority on your replies do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Replying 3 Inthe Replying settings dialog turn on the Copy original s priority to reply option You can always change the priority in the message window Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only You can request that your recipients notify you when they have seen your message To do this click in the message window Your recipients receive a message with a request to notify you that they have seen the message If your recipient clicks the Notify Sender button you receive a message that tells you when that recipient opened your message Request for notification Sameer Jindal 10 28 AM 12 important Meet
48. Sponsored and Paid modes only 278 Personality to Configure 278 Checking Mail 279 Sending Mail 280 Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only 280 Personality to Configure POP and IMAP 281 More Checking Mail POP 281 More Checking Mail IMAP 282 More Sending Mail POP and IMAP 283 Auto Configure ACAP 284 ACAP Server Configuration 284 Fetch Configuration 285 Statistics 285 Eudora Sharing Protocol Sponsored and Paid modes only 287 Tips on Using ESP 288 Creating an ESP Group 289 Creating an ESP Group Advanced Setup 292 Inviting Members to Join Your Group 294 Configuring Shared Folder Settings 295 Configuring Group Change Notifications 296 Maintaining Group Members 299 Joining a Group 301 Leaving a Group 301 Working with the Shared Folder 302 Changing Group Information 302 Configuring Global ESP Settings 303 Using the ESP Mailbox and Folder 303 General Reference 305 Customizing the Main Toolbar Sponsored and Paid modes only 305 Using Eudora Plug ins 306 Plug in Software That Comes with Eudora 307 Installing and Using Eudora Plug ins 308 Word Services 309 Printing 310 Putting Multiple Users on One Macintosh 310 Eudora Folders 311 Attachments Folder 311 Cache Folder 311 Contents Delivery Folder Eudora Filters Eudora ltems Eudora Log and Old Log Eudora Nicknames and Nicknames Folder Eudora Settings and Eudora Seitings bkup IMAP Folder Mail Folder In Out and Trash in the Mail Folder Mailbox Aliases in
49. Start Guide is an elec tronic file located in the Documentation folder Open Eudora After you have installed Eudora to open Eudora do the following m Double click on the application icon Eudora application icon A EUY If you have installed Eudora Email 5 0 over an existing version of Eudora your settings are automatically used from your previous version of Eudora If you have installed Eudora for the first time the Settings option appears displaying the Getting Started settings dialog Eudora User Manual Getting Started settings dialog Opening and Configuring Eudora Settings Getting Started Sending Mail SMTP Server smtpserver mytirm cam You only need to fill this in if it s different from your Mail Server above Return Address John Davis myfirm can You only need to fill this in if it s different from Username MailServer Attachments Getting Started Settings If you are configuring Eudora for the first time the Getting Started settings dialog appears when you open Eudora after installation Note Completing the settings requires information from your ISP or company email administrator If you don t have the information required you can click Cancel and complete the settings later but you won t be able to send or receive email until you do To begin entering mail and address information do the following 1 Enter the following information into the text fields Username En
50. The new folder and its mailbox appear in the Mailbox and Transfer menus and in the Mailboxes window Creating a Mailbox Within a Folder To create a new mailbox within a particular folder do the following 1 2 3 From the Mailbox menu choose the desired folder From the submenu that appears choose New The New Mailbox dialog appears Type in the new mailbox name and click OK The mailbox is created and added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus You can also create a subfolder by doing the following 1 2 3 In the New Mailbox dialog check the Make it a folder option Click OK When the dialog reappears enter the name of a new mailbox to create in the subfolder and click OK Using the Mailboxes Window The Mailboxes window lets you manage your mailboxes and mail folders Using this window you can create rename and remove mailboxes and mail folders move mailboxes and folders in and out of other folders and move messages in and out of mailboxes Using the Mailboxes Window Eudora User Manual Note Mailboxes and folders that are underlined in the window have unread messages in them To display the Mailboxes window do the following m From the Window menu choose Mailboxes The Mailboxes window appears Mailboxes window ie Eudora Folder In re Dut fib Trash E Computer Coty EIMS EE Fun GA Gwen Huntley xi MAC Eudora E personal gt wi Eudora gt Cl Internet p i Qualconm New Mail box
51. This is your default Ph or LDAP lookup server in the Directory Services field of your Hosts settings See Hosts on page 270 m Servers used recently This is a list of the Ph and LDAP lookup servers you have used most recently to perform directory service lookups m Ph servers untitled This is a list of Ph servers on the Internet that you can use to perform Ph queries m LDAP servers This is a list of public LDAP servers available to you on the Internet to perform LDAP queries For more information on LDAP servers both public and private and how to use them see the separate document Using LDAP in Eudora installed as a PDF file in your Documentation Folder The Ph server list can be long 200 items or so To return everything in the server list except the Ph servers do the following m Hold down the Shift key and click the Globe The resulting list will contain the Configured server the Servers used recently and the LDAP servers but not the Ph servers When you Command click or double click any of the server URLs in the server list that server becomes the current server Shown in parentheses after the Enter query label and remains current until you close the Directory Services window or go to a different server Note When you click the Globe the current server is queried for the server list If you change servers and click the Globe the new server is queried for the list For example if your current server
52. Wi ou T m Label amp Label 3 Label 10 Label 11 Label 12 Label 13 Date Display Label 14 Label 15 Eudora Labels Finder labels The other labels should be edited from either the Finder s Preferences menu item or from the Labels A Styled Text control panel depending on Your version of MacOS Moving Around Labels 8 through 15 are the Eudora labels and you can change the color and title text for each one 3 Eudora labels only Type the new title in the text field for that label 4 To change a Eudora label color click the color field next to the text field to display the Macintosh color picker in the Apple Color dialog If multiple color pickers appear choose one Within a color picker you can either choose from one of the pre defined colors or create your own custom color The default color for all Eudora labels 8 through 15 is black The default title is Label n where n 8 through 15 Eudora User Manual Styled Text You can change the label associated with a message to any of the 15 labels or no label at all by doing the following m From the Message menu choose Change then Label The Label submenu appears Or choose the label from the Label column popup menu in mailbox windows and Search windows or from the Make Label filter action in the Filters window See Working with Mailboxes on page 111 and Organizing Your Messages on page 131 for more details Styled
53. a medium sensitivity level If your message has some content that looks like it is offen sive two chili peppers appearing you will be warned when you queue it If the message is on fire Turn this setting on to set MoodWatch to a low sensitivity level If your message has some content that is offensive three chili peppers appearing you will be warned when you queue it 274 Eudora User Manual Internet Dialup Never Turn this setting on to never display a warning in your outgoing messages despite offensive text in its content Scanning incoming mail Scan new mail as it arrives Turn this setting on to allow MoodWatch to scan all of your incoming mail MoodWatch determines the level of offensive text contained in the message MoodWatch then displays one two or three chili peppers in the MoodWatch column of the mailbox where the message resides Scan stored mail in the background Turn this setting on to allow MoodWatch to scan all of your stored messages MoodWatch determines the level of offensive text contained in each message MoodWatch then displays one two or three chili peppers in the MoodWatch column of the mailbox where the message resides Internet Dialup The Internet Dialup settings determine what Eudora does when you are connecting to your ISP using MacSLIP from Hyde Park Software or Apple s Open Transport PPP or Apple s Remote Access Normally when Eudora or any other application tries to make a con
54. a new tabbed window do the following m Drag one of the tabs from an existing tabbed window and drop it onto an exposed portion of the desktop You now have a new tabbed window consisting of one tool window with a tab You can drag other tabbed windows into the window to add to the new group Alternately to create a new tabbed window from a single normal tool window open on your desktop do the following m Bring that window to the front of all Eudora windows and from the Window choose Tabs The tool window is given a tab and you can now add other tabbed windows to this new window to expand the new group To convert a single tabbed window back to a normal tool window do the following m Make the window active and from the Window menu deselect Tabs check mark next to Tabs disappears Eudora User Manual Closing Tabbed Windows Closing Tabbed Windows To close a tabbed window do the following m From the File menu choose Close or click the close button at the left end of the title bar When you close a tabbed window Eudora remembers the contents of all member windows and the state and position of the tabbed window When you redisplay the tabbed window the active window shows its prior contents and the tabbed window appears in its prior state and position However if you attempt to close or hide a tabbed window in which the active window contains unsaved changes or you attempt to deactivate that active window by making
55. a registered trademark and registered service mark of QUALCOMM Incorporated Apple AppleTalk Macintosh and the Apple logo are registered trademarks and QuickTime AppleTalk LocalTalk Keychain and MacTCP are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Exchange are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows Outlook Express and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Incorporated in the United States and or other countries MacSLIP is a trademark of Hyde Park Software Inc All other trademarks and service marks are the property of their respective owners Use of the Eudora software and other software and fonts accompanying your license the Software and its docu mentation is at your sole risk The Software and its documentation including this manual and QUALCOMM s soft ware maintenance and extended maintenance if applicable are provided AS IS and without warranty of any kind and QUALCOMM and QUALCOMWM s Licensor s including but not limited to the University of Illinois and Apple Computer Inc collectively herein referred to as QUALCOMM EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND AGAINST INFRINGEMENT QUALCOMM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIRE MENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF TH
56. a text file one word per line You can create such a dictionary file yourself using a text editor Eudora considers all of the dictionaries in your current Spelling Dictionaries folder including your User Dictionary and all of your custom dictionary files as one big dictionary Using MoodWatch MoodWatch monitors incoming and outgoing messages for offensive text A new settings dialog has been added for MoodWatch so you can determine how you wish to use Mood Watch MoodWatch works similarly to a spell checker MoodWatch scans and determines what words or phrases in a message or a header may be offensive One two or three red chili peppers appear to indicate the severity of the offensive text If you are sending or queueing a message a warning appears letting you know that text in your message may be offensive to your recipient 49 50 Using MoodWatch for Outgoing Messages Eudora User Manuall Using MoodWatch for Outgoing Messages When you open a new composition window to begin writing a new message MoodWatch scans each word and phrase you type and determines if it might be offensive to your recip ient The level of offensiveness is indicated by the appearance of one two or three red chili peppers with three red chilies being the most offensive and one the least As you write chili peppers appear next to the Send or Queue button ai There is no offensive language in the message a sena There may be a slight bit of o
57. an option from the popup menu The Attachment column also has a popup menu If the message summary indicates that the message contains attachments click and hold down the mouse button on the Attach ment column of the message summary The popup menu displays all attachments associ ated with that message by file name Select one of the files to open that attachment You can copy the text in one or more message summaries by doing the following 1 Choose the summaries 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy The information in each selected summary is copied This information can be pasted into a new message or a text file for record keeping or later use Status Column The status column displays the message status You can use the popup to change the status to another available status depending on whether the message is incoming or outgoing a Message has not been read all mailboxes except Out or message is queued or sendable but has not been queued or sent Out mailbox lt blank gt Message has been read all mailboxes except Out or message is not yet able to be queued or sent because it has no recipients in the To or Bcc field Out mailbox only Message has been replied to Message has been forwarded A Message has been redirected 3 Message needs to be rebuilt it cannot be sent a Message is queued to be sent outgoing messages only Message is queued to be sent at a specified time outgoing messages on
58. and Paid modes only To set the remaining settings in this dialog for a personality just make sure that personality is selected in the popup Most of the settings for the Dominant personality are also reflected in other Settings categories such as Getting Started Hosts Checking Mail and Sending Mail If you change those settings here they are changed in all other Settings categories in which they appear Personality Name Dominant This is the personality name by which you choose to refer to this personality For your Dominant personality this field is display only and cannot be changed For an alternate non Dominant personality this field is a text entry field Enter the name you wish to assign to the alternate personality for example Jim at Home This name appears in all places in Eudora where personality names are listed such as on the Personality submenu in the Personalities window on the From field Personality popup in a new message window the Make Personality filter action and the Search window Personality search target Note Eudora uses the Personality Name to mark your mail for that personality If you change the name of the personality you break the link between the mail and that person ality AS a result mail that had been associated with the old personality name is now assigned to the Dominant personality If you reestablish the name for the personality or create a new personality with that name the messages ar
59. another window active in the group Eudora asks you if you want to save your changes Link History Sponsored or Paid mode only Link History displays Internet web site addresses other links and ads you clicked in Eudora To display your link history window do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Link History The Link History window appears Link History menu option and window E SSS Link History B Download the world s best email electroni 10 22 M Eudora is the paperless office 10 19 M ww Qualcomm com 3 07 AM www B Udo ra com Wednesday pdQsuite has email anda web browser Not yet Net2Phone Phone calls anywhere inthe w Not yet QUALCOMM thin phones come inall sorts of Mot yet Don t be a turkey use Eudora Not yet fe View Fe Remove 2 To activate a link in the list double click to highlight and launch it or click the item and then View To remove the link from the list click Remove Note Links expire and are removed from the list after 30 days 175 Statistics Window Sponsored and Paid Modes only Eudora User Manual Statistics Window Sponsored and Paid Modes only You can now display and print your Eudora usage statistics These statistics keep track of how many messages you receive and send in a particular day week month or year You can also see how many attachments were received and sent as well as how many messages were read In the Sent Email section you can see how many messages
60. are descriptions of age values Minutes lf the search is conducted during the 60 seconds between minute 3 and minute 4 of this hour begun at 11 03 20 a m for example then a message with a seconds value anywhere between minute 2 and minute 3 just a moment ago 11 02 00 and 11 02 59 a m is considered one minute old Hours If the search is conducted at any time between 11 00 00 a m and 12 00 00 noon for example than any message with a time between 10 00 00 and 11 00 00 o clock of that same half day is considered one hour old Days No matter what time of day the search is conducted Tuesday for example any message dated the previous day Monday no matter what time is considered one day old Thus if the search is conducted at 12 01 00 a m Tuesday a message dated 11 59 00 p m Monday is still considered one day old Weeks No matter what day of the week this is Tuesday for example a message dated the previous week Monday through Sunday is considered one week old Months No matter what day of the month this is February for example a message from any day of the previous month January is considered one month old That holds true if you conduct the search on February 29 and the message is from January 1 or if you conduct the search on February 1 and the message is from January 31 Years No matter when in this year e g 1999 you conduct the search a message from any day in the prior
61. are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later If you want Eudora to retrieve all of your IMAP attachments for this account enter a large number in this field If you don t want attachments retrieved when you check your mail enter 0 in this field Full message with attachments If this option is on the full message and all attach ments regardless of size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message for your dominant personality Note Use of a Trash mailbox for a Dominant IMAP account is governed by the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option in the Personality Extras settings when Server Configuration is set to IMAP To save the information and close the Settings dialog click OK Your IMAP account is now created 89 Creating an IMAP Account Eudora User Manual 90 Checking Mail from Your IMAP Account First Mail Check Now that you have set up an IMAP account you can begin by checking your mail for the account To check your mail in the account do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities window appears 2 Inthe Personalities window choose your IMAP personality by clicking the icon next to it The Mailboxes window appears 3 At the bottom of the Mailboxes window click the Check Mail button BF check mail 4 Enter your password if prompted Eudora checks for mail Subsequent Mail Checks After you do your first mail chec
62. area if necessary Note This discussion also applies to the Mailboxes pane in the Search window Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Personalities window All text in all personality names in the window Signatures window All text in all signature file names in the window Stationery window All text in all stationery file names in the window Note In some tool windows or tool window fields a successful Find results in the target text being highlighted exactly In other tool windows or fields the entire name or line is highlighted Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders You can search through any combination of your mailboxes and folders for all messages that contain a certain piece of information either text or other items such as a particular priority label message status attachment count and much more You can search for a specific piece of information in all your mail or just search for a partic ular item that matches the criteria you set For example you can find that one bibliographic reference buried somewhere in tens of thousands of messages in hundreds of mailboxes just by knowing a word in the title or you can look to gather together all messages sent to you since last Tuesday To search for a message just set up the criteria by selecting options from the pop up lists and by entering text Note The default shortcut setting for finding messages is Option Command F
63. attach them to your email messages You can forward messages redirect them or reply to all recipients of a message You can set up mailboxes and folders for your mail and build filters to sort messages alert you and even send an automatic reply All your favorite addresses can be stored in your personal address book or you can let Eudora search for addresses for you And if you use more than one ISP Eudora allows you to build multiple personalities to send and receive mail to multiple accounts There are many more features and functions described later in this manual What s New in Eudora Email v5 0 The following new features and functions have been added to Eudora Email 5 0 for Macin tosh Import from Outlook Express You may now import mail information and settings from Microsoft Outlook Express 5 0 See Importing from Outlook Express on page 24 m Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP ESP is a new Eudora plug in that allows you to share documents and discussion among of a group of Eudora users without the use of a shared server See Eudora Sharing Protocol Sponsored and Paid Modes only on page 287 m MoodWatch MoodWatch is a new Eudora feature that can monitor offensive text in both incoming and outgoing messages You can display the new Mood Watch options dialog to set Mood Watch settings Using MoodWatch on page 49 m Statistics You can now display and print statistics on your Eudora
64. avoid having to retype their addresses in the header fields In this sense the Send Again command lets you treat any stored message whether incoming or outgoing as a stationery file Replying with a Stationery File Sponsored and Paid modes only To reply to a message with stationery do the following 1 Open or highlight the message you are replying to 2 From the Message menu choose Reply With The Reply With submenu appears 3 Choose the desired stationery The stationery file is opened as a reply message and is addressed as appropriate your Replying settings are used For details about statio nery see Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 64 Eudora User Manual Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only To reply to a message with a stationery file and only quote some of the sender s original text do the following 1 2 Highlight the text you want to quote Press the Shift key and from the Message menu choose Reply Quoting Selection With The Reply Quoting Selection With submenu appears While still pressing the Shift key choose the desired stationery If no text is selected Eudora does not quote any text You may also reply to message with stationery in the following ways m With the Stationery window open drag an open message by its Tow Truck or drag selected message summaries in a mailbox window onto a stationery item in the Statio nery w
65. by closing the Filters window and clicking the Save button in the alert Filters are automatically named based on the first term of the criteria for the filter You can reorder them by dragging a filter up or down in the list You can reorder your filters to indi cate in what order you want your messages filtered and grouping your filters will make them easier to find Important When reordering filters remember that filters function from top to bottom The message will obey the first filter it encounters that fulfills its criteria If a filter is created for other criteria in this message and is placed below the initial filter the second filter will be ignored For example lets say you set up the first filter to transfer messages from your boss to a certain mailbox You set up another filter to transfer any messages concerning an important project in the Subject field to another mailbox If you receive a message from your boss with the project s name in the Subject field the message will go to the mailbox that your boss messages reside instead of the project s mailbox When the filters are invoked automatically or manually each message is matched against each filter in order from top to bottom If the message meets a filter s criteria the actions are done as specified until there are no more actions then the message is matched against the next filter If at any point a Transfer or Skip Rest action is done nothing else i
66. characters of new message windows and received message windows when you open them If you leave this field blank Eudora uses the default value of 80 This setting has no effect on what your mail looks like when it is sent When mail is sent Eudora wraps at or before 76 columns if the Word wrap setting is turned on in the Composing Mail settings or on the icon bar of the outgoing message If Word wrap is turned off the message text flows to fit the width of the recipient s window If you use a proportional font for your Screen Font Eudora sets the window width based on the width of the 0 character Height blank This specifies the height in number of lines of new message windows and received message windows when you open them If you leave this field blank Eudora uses a default value of 20 If the Zoom windows when opening setting is turned on and you open a received message the window height is automatically adjusted to the height of the message text Zoom windows when opening on When this setting is on mailbox windows and message windows automatically open to their zoomed size The zoomed size is computed on a window by window basis For mailbox windows zoomed size is just wide enough to display the widest summary and just long enough to display all the summaries or all the summaries and the message preview pane The default preview pane is 12 lines high For message windows zoomed size Is just long enough to dis
67. column of their message summary Another way to forward a message 106 Set up a filter that uses the Forward To filter action See Filtering Messages on page 135 and Filter Actions on page 142 Eudora User Manual Redirecting a Message Redirecting a Message Incoming messages can be sent to a new recipient by way of you maintaining the orig inal sender s address in the From field You redirect a message that should have been sent to someone else To redirect the current message do the following ae m From the Message menu choose Redirect or click P A new message window appears with the original sender s email address in the From field with the statement by way of ___ followed by your real name and or return address The original sender s text is in the message body and any original attachments are in the Attached field Make any changes you want and enter the recipient s address in the To field The message can then be sent or saved for further changes Note You may want to enclose any changes in brackets so that you don t confuse the recipient about who wrote what Redirected message Robert Montgomery 10 37 AM new products Le a new products A Sender arouleau_wrgeworldmail mytirm corm Mime Yersion 1 0 Date Wed 10 Dec 1997 10 37 25 0700 To Carole lt carolecyourtirm cam gt From Robert Montgomery montgomery yourirm com gt by way of Alan ROU AL subject
68. command 309 ACAP Port option 284 ACAP Server option 284 ACAP settings 284 285 ACAP Username option 284 Activating tabbed windows 174 Add to Dictionary command 47 48 Address Book 181 adding a group 185 adding a person 183 adding an address book 182 adding email addresses 186 adding information 186 adding nicknames to the Quick Recipient List 199 Address es field in 184 changing entries in 190 creating a group from the address book 194 creating a message from 191 deleting entries 191 displaying entries in 181 dragging entries to another file in 190 Home tab 186 make address book entry from 192 maximum entries in 184 moving an entry 190 Name field in 188 Notes tab 190 Other tab 189 paging up and down in 182 Personal tab 183 printing 182 Recipient List option 199 removing entries from 190 saving changes to 190 191 saving entries to a file 198 type to select entries in 182 using non Eudora nicknames 198 View by popup menu 181 Work tab 188 Address es field 184 After transferring or deleting or paging past end of Current message open option 267 Age sensitive option 263 Aliases mailboxes 313 Settings files 311 Align Center button 34 Align Center text option 40 Align Left button 34 Align Left text option 40 Align Right button 35 Align Right text option 40 All capitals option 255 Alternate personalities 57 69 Always include Macintosh information option 45 256 Any Header field in Filters 141 Any Recipient field in Fi
69. converts multiple spaces into tabs m Include Headers Retains each message s header information in the saved docu ment If this is not checked only the body of each message is saved m Stationery Saves the outgoing message s as a stationery file Clicking Statio nery deactivates the other two checkboxes regardless of their settings and acti vates the Go To Stationery Folder button Click Go To Stationery Folder to save the stationery file in your Stationery Folder normally kept in your Eudora Folder under your System or Documents Folder See Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 64 for more details 4 Once you have made all of your choices click the Save button Note If an Unread incoming message is saved to a file its status changes to Read blank regardless of whether the message was opened If you select multiple messages from a mailbox window and choose Save As from the File menu all of the messages are saved to a single file If you save multiple Out box messages to a Stationery file you may need to edit the file by removing extraneous headers and other text from the stationery template Choosing an Application for Saved Messages When you save a message to a file using the Save As command from the File menu the new text file is formatted as basic ASCII text in a Macintosh document The document type is determined by the program you select using the TEXT files
70. directly in one dialog box To use the Advanced Share Group Setup function do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Click New located at the bottom of the window The Share Group dialog appears 292 Eudora User Manual Creating an ESP Group Advanced Setup Share Group dialog New ESP Share Group Wizard pE Share Group Would vou like to _ Create a brand new share group Skip directly to advanced share group setup aa Cen 3 Choose Skip directly to advanced share group setup The Share Group dialog appears Share Group dialog same dialog as the Eudora tab New ESP Share Group Name lt share group name gt Shared Folder Mail box Personality Dominant Description 4 Type the new group s name in the Name text box 5 Click the Shared Folder long gray button and choose a folder for this group Click OK 6 Click the Mailbox long gray button and choose a mailbox for this group s messages Click OK 7 Click the Personality long gray button and choose the Eudora personality you want linked with this group Click OK 8 Inthe Description text box type a brief description of the group s function or contents optional 9 Click OK 293 Inviting Members to Join Your Group Eudora User Manuall ESP adds the new group to your list of groups The groups you create are listed in the Groups window in the left column Inviting Members to Joi
71. ences dialog from the Edit menu on Mac OS 8 x systems or in the Macintosh Labels control panel on System 7 x machines Label colors and names for the Eudora labels 8 through 15 are set in the Eudora Labels settings in Settings from the Special menu See Eudora Labels on page 264 Make Personality Sponsored and Paid modes only Assigns the selected personality to messages This action is intended mainly for incoming messages When you receive an incoming message that is filtered with this action then any response you initiate to this message from then on will be from the assigned personality until you either change the personality associated with the incoming message or change the personality associated with the individual response For more information see Using Alternate Email Accounts on page 69 Note You can use the Make Personality filter action on outgoing messages But since filters are run after the mail is sent only the copies of your message are assigned the new personality the original message is sent under the unchanged personality Eudora User Manual Filtering Messages Make Subject Assigns the new subject to messages If you choose this option the entire subject of the message is replaced with the new subject Use the amp symbol to stand for the old subject if you want to add the new subject to the old subject For example entering New Subject was amp results in New Subject was Old Subje
72. expand to the following addresses Dad Mom abird Bar bara _Leos In the Address Book Eudora Nicknames J Quick Recipient Add Details Create Nickname 4 Inthe Nickname text box type a nickname for the new entry 5 Inthe Group Name field type a descriptive name for this group 194 Eudora User Manual Finish Address Book Entry Command Sponsored and Paid modes only 6 Inthe This nickname will expand to the following address field Eudora displays the nicknames you selected from the Address Book You may add more nicknames and email addresses if you like 7 If you have more than one address book in the In address book popup choose the address book in which you want to place this group 8 If you want to put the group on your Recipient List check the Quick Recipient box 9 To open the Address Book to add more information click Add Details 10 When finished click Create Nickname The new group is now in your address book Note If your new group has the same name as an existing group name a prompt appears asking if you want to add the address es to the existing name or replace the existing name with the new address es Finish Address Book Entry Command Sponsored and Paid modes only By using the Finish Address Book Entry command Eudora will complete the nickname entry you begin to enter in the To Cc or Bcc field To use the Finish Address Book Entry command to complete a nickname in your message do
73. finish setting up the criteria and choosing the mailboxes click Search or press Return The Search button changes to Stop once the search is underway Allow the search to continue to completion or stop it at any time by clicking Stop or by pressing Escape Esc or Command period if the Search window is on top Examine the results in the Results pane and work with the messages if desired For more details see Working with the Search Results in the Results Pane on page 165 If you want to perform an additional search on the messages found so far click Search results change your search conditions to fit the new search and click the Search button Eudora will search only those messages that appear in the Results pane Continue as before working with the new results if desired performing additional searches on the results or conducting new searches with new search conditions and or mailboxes When you are finished close the Search window Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Note You can perform multiple searches at once To do this open a new Search window for each search operation from the Find submenu or press Command Option F Each search runs separately Also the Search command opens the Search window and selects all of your mailboxes in the Mailboxes pane To perform this search select some text in an open Eudora window and choose Search All Search Mailbox or Search Mailfolder You c
74. in if it s different from Username MailServer 3 Enter the information in the following fields Real Name Enter your real name as you wish to see it in the From field of outgoing messages Username lf you are going to receive mail via UUCP you should put the full path name of your mail drop the file where UUCP leaves mail for you in the Username field Precede the name with an exclamation point for example IDoc JUPC maildrops montgomery 319 Using UUCP 320 Eudora User Manual Operation Almost all Eudora features work normally with UUCP The one exception is the Leave on server for days option in the Checking Mail Settings When Eudora is used with POP and this option is on only unread mail is retrieved With UUCP however Eudora does not distinguish between read and unread mail it retrieves all the mail at each check This results in duplicate messages unless you use some other means to clean out your mail drop between Eudora mail checks It is suggested that this option remain off when using UUCP Internals Mail Drop Format Eudora expects the mail drop to be in standard UNIX mailbox format with UUCP enve lopes From lines at the beginning of each message The mail drop should use carriage returns not line feeds for new lines Working Files When sending mail Eudora creates two files in the UUCP work directory These files are as follows D macO The message itself is pu
75. in modified command names appearing on Eudora s menus If you hold down the Shift key the Option key or both while you pull down a Eudora menu the menu shows the names of any modified commands that may be available For full descriptions of the names and functions of all of Eudora s menu commands and their modifications see Using Menu Commands on page 211 Modifiers Not Reflected in Eudora s Menus The following table lists all those modifiers that do not appear anywhere in Eudora s menus as renamed commands Press this key and do this task This happens Shift Open Eudora Opens Eudora offline does not check for mail even if a mail checking interval is set You must first double click the Eudora application icon and then quickly press the Shift key until Eudora is fully started You may also open Eudora by selecting Eudora from the Apple menu Shift Delete Transfer Does not open the next message after deleting or transferring the current message Shift Sort Adds or removes the column as an extra sort criterion This lets you unsort or sort while preserving the previous sort s You can thus sort by sender then within sender by date then within date by subject then unsorts by subject and preserve the sort by sender and the subsort by date Shift To Cc Bcc From the Address Book does not bring the composition window to the front after inserting the nickname Shift Directory Services Opens the
76. is Cornell s Ph server and you click the Globe icon you will get one server list If you then make UC Berkeley s Ph server your current server and click the Globe icon you may get a different server list To look up servers on ph qualcomm com which contains a list of directory servers do the following m Press the Option key and click the globe 209 Finding and Using Lookup Servers from Around the World Eudora User Manual 210 Using Menu Commands This section describes Eudora s menu commands Each menu and submenu is illustrated and each command is described Additional commands are available by pressing Option and or the Shift while opening a menu These are called modifiers See Modifiers on page 237 for more information The modifier keys are displayed in brackets There are eight menu titles on the Eudora menu bar File Edit Mailbox Message Transfer Special Window and Help The Apple menu also has two Eudora related commands when Eudora is the active application Depending on what you are doing at a particular time a given command may or may not be available This can also depend on the current state of Eudora s settings If a command is unavailable for the current operation it is greyed out dimmed on the menu For example if the insertion point is currently in the header of a new open message the Edit menu s Text submenu is dimmed you cannot apply text styles to header text Similarly i
77. is from the date and time it was sent and the subject Once you have this information you can then decide whether you want to retrieve the full message and any attachments or just delete the message Full message except attachments over K off 40 If this setting is on anda number is entered in the box the full message full set of message headers and the message body and any attachments smaller than the specified size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message for this personality Any attachments larger than the specified size are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later If you want Eudora to retrieve all of your IMAP attachments for this account enter a large number in this field If you don t want attachments retrieved when you check your mail enter 0 in this field Full message with attachments TIf this setting is on the full message and all attach ments regardless of size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message for this personality Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server on If this setting is on and the first time you transfer or delete a message from any mailbox stored in this IMAP account Eudora will try to create a Trash mailbox on the IMAP server for this personality If it cannot create the Trash mailbox it will ask you to select an existing IMAP mailbox to use as the Trash mailbox To create a new IMAP mailbox to be used as the Trash mailbox on the 72IMAP server c
78. is in the message One two or three red chili peppers appear in this column iij to determine how offensive the text is in this message One pepper indicates mild offense and three peppers the most offensive See Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages on page 51 for more information Server Status Column The Server Status column displays the action that is to be done to the corresponding message on the server The next time you check mail the server status you requested is automatically completed You can change the desired server status using the popup in this column 2 Do Nothing Doesn t do anything with the message on the server 4 Fetch from Retrieves the whole message from the server Server Delete from Deletes the message from the server Server t Fetch amp Retrieves the whole message from the server Delete then delete it from the server Eudora User Manual Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Deleted on IMAP only This message is marked for deletion IMAP Server Delete it from the IMAP server the next time you choose Remove Deleted Messages or the Trash mailbox is emptied on that IMAP server if a Trash mailbox exists Note You can also use the Mail Transfer Options dialog to control the mail transfer on the POP server only For details see Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions on page 85 Subject Column The Subject column displays the subject of the message The sender
79. is inserted on the line containing the cursor or on the line immediately below if the cursor is interior to a line of text This allows attractive formatting of your messages using separators such as appears in web pages Insert Graphic Sponsored and Paid modes only Inserts a graphic in your message A dialog appears for you to select the graphic that you want to include in your text The graphic is inserted into the message body at the insertion point position You can continue typing text Once the graphic is inserted in your message you can drag it to where you Eudora User Manual Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only want it When your recipient opens your message he or she will see the picture right in the message body depending on whether or not the receiving computer and email software supports the display of pictures embedded in message text Link to URL Sponsored and Paid modes only Convert the selected piece of text or the selected graphic to a clickable underlined hyperlink to a Uniform Resource Locator URL you specify When your recipient clicks the link he or she is immediately taken to the URL To create a text or graphic hyperlink do the following 1 Type the text or insert a graphic you want to link in your outgoing message then select the text or graphic you want to hyperlink The text or graphic should be highlighted 2 From the Edit menu choose Text then Link to URL The Link to URL dialog appea
80. it 4 Click Find in the Find dialog if it s open or from the Special menu choose Find then Find Again Command G Finding Text in the Current Window Eudora User Manual 152 Eudora looks for the next occurrence of your new text in the currently open window If a match is found the text is highlighted and the window is scrolled to that selection if neces sary If no match is found the not found alert appears You can keep changing the text to be found so you can look for different items in the same window without having to open the Find dialog or bring it to the front The shortcuts prove especially handy for rapid finding Note The Enter Selection command does not change the Whole word and Match case settings in the Find dialog If you want to change those options for your next Find you must make those changes directly in the Find dialog Stopping a Find Although Find operations are usually so fast that you likely won t have time to stop it if you ever need to stop a Find press the Escape key Esc or press Command period Text Considered in a Find Operation When you use the Find or Find Again command in a current window Eudora will look through the following text depending on what kind of window tt is m Message window All visible header text and all body text in an incoming message All header and body text in an outgoing message To look for text in the normally hidden head
81. it s different from your incoming server Also in the Hosts settings dialog you need to enter the names of the directory servers you will use to look up people on the Internet To enter the name of your mail and directory servers do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Inthe Settings category list scroll and choose Hosts The Hosts Settings panel appears 21 Opening and Configuring Eudora Eudora User Manual Sample settings entered in the Hosts settings dialog S Fatt Checking Mail Mail Server incoming myti r m com ef Overlap POPS commands for better performance LLL Tool bar na betting Attention Sending Mail SMTP Server joutgoing myfirm com You only need to fill this in if it s different from your Mail Server above C Use mail exchange records Directory Services Fh LDAF Server ph myfir mm com Finger Server finger myfirm cord A Live directory service queries Extra Warnings A Mood Watch All connections kf ONS load balancing Internet Dialup 3 Enter the following information in the Hosts settings dialog Mail Server This field should contain the name you entered in the Mail Server field of the Getting Started settings dialog If not enter the full name of the incoming mail server For example incoming myfirm com SMTP Server Enter the name of the outgoing mail sever for your principal email account for example o
82. m f you choose Don t Send for a messages that has never been queued nothing happens the message is held in the Out mailbox until it is either deleted or requeued and sent Editing a Queued Message To edit a queued message do the following 1 2 3 Open the Out mailbox Double click to choose the message summary Make the necessary edits and save it The message is kept in the Out mailbox and remains at the Queued status If you close the changed message without saving it an alert appears asking you to save or discard your changes Taking a Message Out of the Queue A message that is queued but not yet sent can be unqueued 1 2 3 4 Open the Out mailbox Choose the desired message summary From the Message menu choose Change then Queuing to display the Change Queuing dialog Click Don t Send then click OK This changes the message status from queued Q to sendable The message is held in the Out mailbox until it is either deleted requeued or sent Sending Queued Messages When Checking Mail If the Send on check option is turned on in the Sending Mail settings dialog then every time Eudora checks for mail automatically or manually all queued messages are auto matically sent See Sending Mail on page 250 55 Sending Messages with Special Server Instructions Eudora User Manual 56 Sending Messages with Special Server Instructions To send your queued messages with special ins
83. m IMAP FAQ www eudora com techsupport mac imapfag html Technical Support lf after reviewing all of the available materials this user manual the Quick Start Guide the README files the Online Help and the Balloon Help and you still need help contact your ISP or email administrator or the Eudora Technical Support group If you register your copy of Eudora in Sponsored or Paid mode you are entitled to the following m Paid mode 6 calls or email messages for 1 year Sponsored mode 6 calls or email messages per year if you remain in Sponsored mode 28 Eudora User Manual Technical Support m Light mode no technical support Be sure to register as soon as possible to avoid any delays in receiving technical support Also refer to the Eudora family of products technical support Web site which includes a Frequently Asked Questions FAQ section how to information and tutorials Open the following web site http www eudora com techsupport Mac Eudora tech support reps are available Monday Friday from 8 a m to 5 p m Pacific Time using the following phone number and email address Phone 858 658 1292 Email eudora support eudora com When contacting us via telephone or email you will be required to provide the following Registration number Eudora version mode and platform System version What you were doing when the problem occurred and any error messages including error codes that you receiv
84. m Stationery message window m Mailbox window message summaries and preview pane m Search window Mailboxes pane and Results pane following a successful search m Tool windows from the Window menu 149 Finding Text in the Current Window Eudora User Manual 150 Address Book Directory Services window Filters window Mailboxes window Personalities window Signatures window Stationery window You can find additional occurrences of the same word or text string in the current window by choosing the Find Again command in the Find submenu You can change the text to be found on the fly using a selected word or text string so that you can continue looking for different text in the same window Just choose Enter Selection from the Find submenu You use the Find dialog and the Find submenu commands to perform these operations The Find commands each have keyboard shortcuts that make finding text in an active window quick and convenient Finding a Word or Text String in the Current Window To find a word or text string in the current window do the following 1 Open the window in which you want to find the text 2 From the Special menu choose Find or press Command F The Find submenu appears 3 From the Find submenu choose Find The Find dialog appears Find dialog with sample text Find beac id Frind Options W hole word _ Match case 4 Inthe Find field type the tex
85. mail messages on a server and it permits manipulation of remote mail boxes so they function like local mailboxes IMAP4 provides a richer and more complex set of functionality than the POPS protocol IMAP is also called an incoming server IP address The address that serves as a unique identifier of computers on the Internet It is a sequence of 4 small integers each less than 256 When written the numbers are separated by periods For example 210 170 2 45 The DNS converts IP addresses to the more familiar domain names LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a protocol that provides an online fully indexed fast access white pages directory service developed and freely distributed by the Regents of the University of Michigan Mailbox In Eudora a mailbox is a single collection of messages Eudora allows the user to create as many mailboxes as they wish to organize and store their messages A mailbox on a server is the location on the Internet where e mail for a user is delivered Eudora collects messages from the server s mailbox and delivers it to mailboxes on the user s computer Mailbox user A user who sends and receive e mail messages Mailing list A group of recipients to whom users can refer by a common name for example a mailing list called Marketing When users address a message to a mailing list all members of the mailing list receive the message MIME Multi Purpose Internet Mail Extensions A set of conversio
86. mailbox or the mailbox into which they are filtered until they are deleted or transferred to another mailbox Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server If your incoming mail server uses the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP your mail mailboxes and folders are stored on the server not on your computer When you create mailboxes and folders you create them on the server However you can see them in the Mailboxes window in Eudora When you launch Eudora you retrieve your mailboxes and folders from the server When you check mail the mail you retrieve is filtered on the server although your filters are created in Eudora This is beneficial if you have to retrieve mail from different computers Your mail remains on the server for you to retrieve at anytime on any computer During mail checks partial messages or full messages are transferred to your computer with or without attachments depending on the options you specify in the Checking Mail settings dialog your main account see Checking Mail on page 246 This is beneficial if you use a computer with limited disk space or a slow network connection To specify options for your personalities display the Personality Extras settings dialog see Person ality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 87 Creating an IMAP Account Eudora User Manual When a message is transferred either in part or in full from the IMAP server to your computer during a mail check
87. mation for SMTP mail settings Multiple custom domains can be configured messages sent to a custom domain are handled and routed according to its specifications that is through static routes or gateways Daemon Daemons are generally server programs They run continuously and are avail able when clients wish to initiate a session However an SMTP daemon periodically acts as a client when it needs to forward messages that are not to be delivered locally Domain In general a group of computers and other devices under the management of a single administrator or administrative entity In the Internet a domain identifies a range of IP addresses and mail forwarding information See DNS DNS Domain Name Service The naming service used by Internet Mail to support message routing It maps domain addresses to IP addresses so Internet messages can be delivered to a particular server Envelope The envelope is the SMTP commands that enclose the e mail message The SMTP envelope is the sequence of commands from the smtp sender a client to the smtp receiver a server to forward a message to the next hop in the delivery Finger query A directory service that queries a Finger server FTP File Transfer Protocol Gateway In general software that translates information between one protocol and another Header The part of an e mail message that precedes the message It contains informa tion such as the originator recipient and subject of the
88. menu Using Directory Services What Are Directory Services Directory services are electronic white and yellow phone book style services that lets you search for people on the Internet or in your organization s intranet Typically when you want to look someone up you want to find out their email address and perhaps their city or county state or province country phone number organization title and maybe their full name even if you only Know part of it Eudora lets you search for people on the Internet and local intranets using three directory service protocols Ph m LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol m Finger To use any of these directory service protocols and thereby use the directory services available to you on the Internet or within your organization you must first enter the default servers that will provide these services in your Hosts settings which is shown in the next section Specifying Your Default Lookup Servers on page 202 Note The instructions in this chapter are the basic instructions for performing Internet and intranet lookups in Eudora For more details on how to use the Ph and Finger protocols when performing lookups see your email administrator or your Internet Service Provider ISP For detailed instructions on how to perform Internet and intranet lookups using LDAP in Eudora see the separate document Using LDAP in Eudora This document is installed as an online manual in PDF
89. message Also it is used as an individual header field such as the To header 329 330 Glossary HTML Hyper Text Marking Language used to create Web pages A Web client interprets HTML and displays documents and graphics accordingly HTML also allows document authors to establish hypertext links between documents in various locations on the Internet and to create forms and image maps that enable users to interact with Web docu ments HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol is the standard way of transferring information across the World Wide Web It supports a variety of media and file formats across a variety of platforms IAB Internet Activities Board The organization within the U S Department of Defense that is charged with administering the Internet IETF Internet Engineering Task Force The standards setting body of the Internet Internet A giant global network made up of many smaller networks all connected using the TCP IP protocol The Internet is the network of networks which spans the globe TCP IP is generally the network and transport protocol stack used to connect networks but protocol translating gateways enable non TCP IP networks to connect to the Internet as well Internet directory A directory on the Internet that Eudora users can query A directory implementing Ph LDAP and Finger is an Internet directory Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP alows Eudora to access and manuip ulate electronic
90. message see your email administrator Admin istrators can obtain a copy of qpopper from ftp eudora com that may correct the problem see Sources on page 316 Date Column The Date column displays the date and time the message was composed or for timed outgoing messages the date and time the message is scheduled to be sent Eudora uses two methods of displaying date information in mailbox windows m Age sensitive Mail that arrives today has a time stamp mail that arrived within the last six calendar days is stamped with the day of the week and mail that arrived prior to the previous week is stamped with the date m Fixed All mail messages are stamped with the date and time with the date formatted according to the short date format in current use by your computer and the time formatted according to the current time format 115 Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Eudora User Manual 116 To set date information do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll the Setting category icons and choose Date Display The Date Display settings dialog appears 3 Inthe Date format field choose either Age sensitive or Fixed 4 Click OK For more information see Date Display on page 263 Size Column This column displays the size of the message in kilobytes or K where 1K 1024 bytes MoodWatch Column The MoodWatch column displays chili peppers to determine how offensive the text
91. messages in the Results pane summary list To do so select one or more message summaries use standard selection methods and do one of the following Press Delete Choose Delete from the Message menu Choose Trash from the Transfer menu Click Delete on the main toolbar Drag the summaries to one of the following destinations the Trash mailbox icon in the open Mailboxes window the Trash mailbox button on the main toolbar the open Trash mailbox window When you perform one of the above operations the original message is deleted trans ferred to the Trash However the message summary remains in the Results pane summary list but the Mailbox column for that summary is updated to show the new mailbox the Trash mailbox If you then empty the Trash the message summary for the deleted message is removed from the Results pane Note You can undo message deletions from the Results pane in which case the Mailbox column of the message summary is updated to show the message s former mailbox Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders m You can transfer messages via the Results pane summary list To do so select one or more message summaries use standard selection methods and do one of the following Choose the new mailbox from the Transfer menu Drag the summaries to one of the following destinations a mailbox icon in the open Mailboxes window a mailbox button on the main toolbar
92. modify Edit a stationery file New Create a new stationery You enter the name of the new stationery Remove Delete the selected stationery Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion m Edit Open a stationery messages to add a new or edit an existing stationery Creating New Stationery To create a new stationery file from the Stationery window do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Stationery The Stationery window appears 2 Atthe bottom of the Stationery window click the New button 3 Type a name for the new stationery icon that appears and press Return 4 Click the Edit button A new message window is opened for the stationery file 5 Enter the header information and or message body text you want for this stationery 6 Inthe upper right corner normally where the Send or Queue button appears in an outgoing message click the Save button The stationery file is saved 7 Close the stationery message window Note After you have created the new stationery file you can double click on the statio nery s icon in the Stationery window and a new composition message window appears for you to send a message using this stationery Also to change the stationery in a new outgoing message that s already open simply drag the desired stationery icon from the Stationery window and drop it onto the open composi tion window Creating New Stationery Using the Save As Command To create a stationery file using the Save A
93. necessary such as when sending messages that contain long lines of text or special characters If this setting is off quoted printable encoding is never used lt is recommended that you leave this setting on Keep copies of outgoing mail on This field is carried over from the Sending Mail settings dialog Or take settings and text from stationery Stationery None Select a stationery file from the popup or select None for no statio nery If a stationery file is selected that file is used when you open new messages except with the Redirect or Send Again commands under the Message menu The icon bar in the message window is set according to how the stationery message was saved regardless of the settings under Options when not using stationery in this dialog However you can always change these settings from the icon bar after you open the new message Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only The Spell Checking settings control the behavior of Eudora s built in spelling checker You can check the spelling in message composition windows text files and signature files For more information see Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 46 To display the Spell Checking settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Spell Checking icon The Spell Checking settings dialog appears 253 Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora U
94. new products Alan Can you send information on your new products Thank you Fobert Carole can you please send Robert new product information Thanks Alan Messages that have been redirected are identified with a diagonal arrow A in the Status column of their message summary Another way to redirect a message m Setup a filter that uses the Redirect To filter action See Filtering Messages on page 135 and Filter Actions on page 142 Turbo Redirecting You can redirect one or more messages to someone on your Quick Recipient List queue the new message without displaying it and delete the original message all with one command m Press the Option key and choose the recipient from the Turbo Redirect To submenu under the Message menu To Turbo Redirect a message without deleting the original do the following 107 Redirecting a Message Eudora User Manual 108 m Press the Shift and Option keys and choose the recipient from the Turbo Redirect Without Delete To submenu To make Turbo Redirect To appear as the default submenu on the Message menu in place of the Redirect To submenu turn on the Turbo redirect by default option in the Miscellaneous settings see Miscellaneous on page 276 Note that this option does not affect the Redirect command on the Message menu only the Redirect To submenu Redirect and Signatures When you use Redirect or the Redirect To
95. nickname margaret and her email address in your Address Book In the To field type m the feature is case insensitive and Eudora completes the name If you have more than one nickname beginning with M in your Address Book you can select the desired nickname using the nickname popup menu press Command to display the menu You can go through the list using the up and down arrow keys All nicknames in the To Cc and Bcc fields are shown in bold to indicate that they are nicknames previously entered in the Address Book Nickname auto completion in a new message No Recipients No Subject Font Size Colors By Z U E I To margaret From Robert Montgomery lt rmontgomeryemy firm com gt Subject Cc Bec a Attachments Note If you have only a Margaret and a Mary as nicknames in your Address Book Eudora completes the first alphabetical name So if you type m Margaret appears first To complete the nickname press Return or Enter If you press comma Eudora expands the address and adds a comma at the end of the address so you can add another recip ients nickname as shown in the following example Nickname auto completion after pressing the comma key Kdargaret_ Smith yourfirm com mary No Subject TF eG To Margaret Eni thi your ten com mary Fram Robert Montgomery lt emontgomeryamygfiem com gt Business Sub ject CC Ecc s Attachments If you have several ni
96. nicknames on your Quick Recipient List Selecting a nickname creates a new message addressed to that nickname or the individual s represented by it For more details see Using the Recipient List on page 198 Forward To Submenu Sends a copy of the currently open or selected message to someone on your Quick Recipient List 221 Message Menu 222 Choose this command Redirect To Turbo Redirect To Option Turbo Redirect Without Delete to Shift Option New Message With Reply With Reply To All With Option Reply Quoting Selection With Shift Reply Quoting Selection To All With Shift Option Attach Document Eudora User Manual This happens Submenu Sends a copy of the currently open or selected message to someone on your Quick Recipient List but uses the original sender s address as the return address If Turbo redirect by default is turned on in the Miscellaneous settings you need to hold down the Option key to display this submenu title Submenu Performs a turbo redirect to someone on your Quick Recipient List redirect the currently open or selected message to the selected nickname queues the redirected message in your Out box and deletes the original message all in one step If Turbo redirect by default is turned on in the Miscellaneous settings you do not need to hold down the Option key Submenu Performs a turbo redirect as above to someone on your Quick Recipient List
97. on the IMAP Server on page 87 for more details Empties all messages both your local POP Trash mailbox if you have one and all of the remote IMAP Trash mailboxes that you have created on the IMAP servers for your IMAP accounts This command appears only if you have one or more IMAP accounts and the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option is turned on in the Personality Extras settings for at least one of these accounts or a Trash mailbox has been created on the IMAP server for one of these accounts See Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for more details Empties of all messages the local POP Trash mailbox only This command only appears if you have one or more IMAP accounts and at least one of them has an associated Trash mailbox This command gives you a way to restrict the taking out the trash to the local Trash only leaving the remote IMAP Trash mailboxes untouched See Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for more details Selects one of these items to use that installed plug in These items are added to the bottom of the Special menu when certain Eudora plug ins are installed See Using Eudora Plug ins inthe General Reference chapter in the online user manual for more details Eudora User Manual Find Submenu The commands on the Find submenu let you find a text string in the currently open window or search for more complicated information in messages throughout a wide range of your mai
98. one signature at a time in a message but you can have as many different signatures as you want Note Your signature is not displayed in the Eudora message window It appears only to your recipient Multiple signatures are available only if you are operating Eudora in either Sponsored or Paid modes However if you are operating Eudora in Light mode you are allowed only one signature Signatures Window Use this window to manage and apply signatures To open the Signatures window do the following m From the Window menu choose Signatures Or if the Signature window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Sample Signatures window af Standard ih Alternate Business ik co workers ioe Family ie Friends Fun a4 Remove a Edit The Signatures window displays a single column list of your signature files Note You can select only one signature at a time in the list you cannot select multiple signatures 61 Adding a New Signature Eudora User Manual At the bottom of the Signatures window are icon buttons that you can use to add New delete Remove or modify Edit a signature file m New Create a new signature You enter the name of the new signature Remove Delete the selected signature Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion m Edit Open an editing window to add a new or edit an existing signature Eudora comes with a default signature called Standard This is an empty signature file that
99. or an open mailbox window When you perform one of these operations the original message is transferred from its original mailbox to the new mailbox The message summary in the Results pane however stays where it is but the Mailbox column for that summary is updated to reflect the new mailbox in which the message is stored Note You can undo transfers from the Results pane in which case the Mailbox column of the message summary is updated to show the message s former mailbox Note IMAP users see Working with IMAP Mailboxes on page 124 for more information Performing an Additional Search on the Search Results Assume you ve opened the Search window set up your search and clicked the Search button The search is complete or you ve stopped it mid way and now the results appear in the Results pane and the Search results checkbox appears next to the More button or if you have multiple search conditions it appears next to the Match all Match any popup You can now perform an additional search on your search results You can use this feature for example if you haven t quite pinpointed what you want and you know that it s some where in the results list To perform an addition search on your search results do the following 1 Click the Search results checkbox to turn it on 2 Change your search conditions You must change your search conditions for the new search or you will merely return the same results you
100. originally typed this information into the message header but you can modify it see Editing Incoming Messages on page 96 Displaying and Resizing Columns To specify which columns you want displayed in your mailbox windows do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Setting category icons and choose Mailbox Display The Mailbox Display settings dialog appears 3 Check the boxes for the columns you want to display To resize a column in a mailbox window move the mouse pointer until it is over the column divider to the right of the column you want to resize The pointer changes shape to the column resize cursor 4 Hold down the mouse button drag the divider to the position you desire and release the mouse button The column divider moves to the new location and the mailbox is redrawn You can shrink a column only as far as its left divider If you do that a double divider line appears in place of the column and the column s contents are hidden To redisplay the column drag the right divider line to the right Remember that you can also hide and show a column from the Mailbox Display settings See Mailbox Display on page 261 Note You can also resize columns by dragging the divider lines in the headers The pointer does not change shape in this case Using the Mailbox Size Display In the lower left corner of the summary list portion of each mailbox window three numbers show
101. paste itas a quotation into your reply choose Paste As Quotation from the Edit menu an attribu tion line is included for the quoted text Here s a sample attribution line At 10 24 PM 0600 1 20 99 Jane Doe wrote If you copy then paste as quotation blocks of text from different incoming messages into the same reply message then an attribution line will be included for each pasted block of text In this way you can reply to multiple people in one message Forwarding a Message Any message can be forwarded to someone else You forward a message to someone who would consider the message as important as you do To forward the current message do the following From the Message menu choose Forward or click tn A new message window appears with your address in the From field and the original subject preceded by Fwd Also a space appears in the Subject field The original sender s text is quoted in the message body and any original attachments are in the Attached field For details on how text is quoted in the message body see Replying to a Message on page 105 Make any changes or add any comments you want and enter the recipient s address in the To field The message can then be sent or saved for further changes Note If you forward an outgoing message a message you sent the attachments are not automatically included Messages that have been forwarded are identified with a right arrow in the Status
102. replied to messages within Eudora When you send messages to these people again their email names and addresses are included in the automatic nickname completion list Sample History List in the Address book View By Nickname 7 Family EI Dad 3 Mom B Sis ae Uncle Joe 7 amp History List 2 abird J arouleau asparks Q Barbara_Leos G emt 3 gdana 2 ghuntley 3 Gigi_Miller Gwen_Huntley Q jcrotts 197 Using Nicknames that were Not Created by Eudora Eudora User Manual Auto completion allows you to enter a portion of a name in the To Cc or Bcc field and Eudora automatically completes the name for you Just start typing and Eudora attempts to complete the name If multiple recipients match the text you ve entered press Command comma to display a list of names from both your history file and address book Select the correct name and the name and email address appear in the field Using Nicknames that were Not Created by Eudora To use a nickname text file txt that was not created in Eudora place the file in the Nick names Folder in your Eudora Folder located in your System or Documents Folder and be sure the format is correct one nickname on each line with the word alias a space the nickname a space and the real address For example alias joe joe wow com If you show aliases list them at the top of the file and list notes at the bottom of the file You cannot mix aliases and notes Here
103. s the general format alias nickname user company com note nickname lt name realName gt lt address postalAddressLinel postalAddressLine2 postalAddressLine3 gt lt phone phoneNumber gt lt fax faxNumber gt noteField And here s an example using joe above alias joe joe wow com note joe lt name Joe Doakes gt lt address Wow Inc 1234 Main St Anytown CA gt lt phone 714 555 1212 gt lt fax 714 555 1234 gt This is Joe D at Wow supplier for left handed widgets Quit and restart Eudora to see your new entries in the Address Book Saving Your Entries to a File To save your Address Book entries as a text clipping with tab delimited entries do the following m Select the entries you want and hold down the Option key while dragging them to Macintosh s Finder To save them as a text clipping with the standard nickname format use the same process but do not hold down the Option key Using the Recipient List The Recipient List contains the nicknames of recipients to whom you often send mail A nickname appears on this list if you have checked the Recipient List box in the Address Book entry for that nickname 198 Eudora User Manual Including Nicknames on the Recipient List Recipient List checkbox in the Address Book Recipient List lt lt M Full Name Joseph Camp To open a new message and have it automatically addressed to someone on your Recip ient List the item is entered in the
104. same information over and over again See Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 64 for full details Sponsored and Paid modes only Opens the Statistics window to let you see your Eudora usage by day week month or year Sponsored and Paid modes only Opens the Link History window displaying all links ads URLS you activated Opens the Task Progress window or bring it to the front to view the progress of tasks being performed by Eudora in the background and to set automatic mail checking options See Managing Windows in Eudora on page 171 for a description of this window and its features Brings the selected mailbox window or message window to the front of all open Eudora windows 233 Help Menu Eudora User Manual Help Menu Use this menu to access online help topics and to turn Balloon Help on and off Help menu About Balloon Help Show Balloons About this Release Creating Messages Attaching a File Using Signatures Using Stationery Using Personalities Receiving Mail Replying to Messages Deleting Messages Transferring Messages Filtering Messages Using Mailboxes it Using the Address Book Modifers and Shortcuts Selecting a URL Helper Changing Your Password Payment amp Registration Insert System Configuration Command Description About Balloon Displays a dialog giving you brief information on how to use Help Balloon Help Show Balloons Selects Show Balloo
105. selected in the Statistics window Previous refers to the previous day week month or year as selected in the Statistics window Average is the cumulative average that occurs on a day to day basis For example if you choose to view your statistics for each day the current graph would be today and the previous graph would be yesterday The average graph would indicate the cumulative average since you began keeping statistical information in Eudora Color Choose the color you wish to represent the current previous and average criteria 285 Statistics Eudora User Manual Graph Type Choose the graph type you prefer to display for the current previous and average criteria The graph type you choose will appear in the color you chose in the Color column The graph types you can choose are a line a solid filled area a graph bar a circle diamond or a square Count IMAP messages in all mailboxes not just the Inbox Turn this option on if you want Eudora for statistical purposes to count all received IMAP messages regardless of which mailbox they are received into Turn this option off if you want Eudora to count only the IMAP messages received in the Inbox Reset Statistics Click Reset Statistics to erase all of your statistical information and start anew Once you click this button usage information from now will begin to accumu late 286 Eudora Sharing Protocol Sponsored and Paid Modes only Eudora Sharing Protoco
106. standard file dialog click Select Other Once an account is selected to import the Import Mail dialog appears Import Mail dialog Import Mail Please select the items you wish to import from the fresh Cartman Small POP email account wf Email account settings ef Mailboxes messages and attachments wf Address book information wf Signature files 3 Choose the items you wish to import into Eudora and click OK Eudora transfers all the items you checked to your new Eudora account Note If you have not set up a Dominant personality in Eudora Eudora will use the default email account you previously set up in Outlook Express If you do have a dominant personality set up in Eudora the account you choose will be an alternate personality You can choose more than one account Important It may take a little bit of time for the migration to occur depending on how much mail the complexity of your settings and the size of your address book that you are importing into Eudora 24 Eudora User Manual Using Eudora in One of Three Modes Using Eudora in One of Three Modes You can choose one of three operating modes on how you wish to use Eudora They are as follows Sponsored mode This mode provides the full featured Eudora desktop email client at no charge supported by sponsors advertising It includes all of the features that are in the Paid mode Paid mode In this mode Eudora leads you through the payment pr
107. stationery message was saved regardless of any other settings in the Settings dialog However you can always change these settings from the icon bar after you open the new message See Composing Mail on page 252 for more details or Signature Standard From the popup menu choose a default signature to use for this personality or choose None for no default signature If you choose a signature Eudora automatically attaches that signature to the end of outgoing messages for this personality Use this popup to set the default signature to use for this personality when the Stationery popup is set to None If you have selected a default stationery for this personality in the Stationery the signature that was saved with that stationery message file will override your selection in this Signature popup Domain to Add blank Enter the domain name you want Eudora to automatically add to an unqualified name addressed in messages sent from this personality An unqualified name is a name that doesn t have an sign followed by a domain name For example if you enter myfirm com in this field and address a message from this personality to jim assuming you do not have a jim nickname in your Address Book Eudora addresses the message to jim myfirm com See Sending Mail on page 250 for more details 283 Auto Configure ACAP Eudora User Manual 284 Auto Configure ACAP The Auto Configure settings instruct Eudora to ret
108. that are normally only exposed with the Blah Blah Blah icon on the icon bar Body Eudora looks through all text in the body of a message the area below the headers Attachment Eudora looks through all text in the file names of attachment files Name s included with a message Summary Eudora looks through all text in the Who Subject and Date columns of the message summary 158 Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders If you choose This will happen Eudora compares the value of the status of the message Note that the comparison popup values change to s and s not and you must choose the status value from the Status popup that appears next to the comparison popup Priority Eudora compares the value of the priority of the message Note that the comparison popup values change to is is not is greater than and is less than and you must choose the priority value from the Priority popup that appears next to the comparison popup Higher priorities have higher values Attachment Eudora compares the number of attachments sent with the message Count against the match value A message with no attachments has an attachment count of 0 Note that the comparison popup values change to is is not is greater than and is less than and you must enter the count value a whole number into the text field that appears next to the comparison popup Label Eudora compares the value of the message label No
109. the Ask me each time option is on then every time you send or queue a message that contains styled text you are asked how you want to send the text plain and styled both styled only or plain only This setting is identical to the Try to queue a message with styled text option in the Extra Warnings settings See Extra Warnings on page 272 Text in outgoing messages text files and signature files can be formatted using the text editing menu commands found on the Text submenu from the Edit menu However styles in Signatures are sent only if there are styles in the body of the message Otherwise your signature whether it has styles or not will be sent as plain text Text in outgoing messages can also be formatted using the formatting toolbar The Text submenu commands from the Edit menu are described below See Formatting Toolbar Text Styles on page 33 for information on using the formatting toolbar Text Editing Menu Commands To format text use the commands on Text submenu from the Edit menu If text in the message body is selected the menu command applies the formatting to that text If no text is selected but the insertion point is in the message body then the font related commands apply the formatting to the next text you type and the margin related commands apply the formatting to the current paragraph the paragraph containing the insertion point Following is a description of the formatting options 39 Forma
110. the following 1 Inthe To Cc or Bcc field type a unique portion of the nickname 2 From the Edit menu choose Finish Address Book Entry The nickname popup list for that letter appears 3 Choose the desired nickname from the list To insert the real addresses for the entry instead of the nickname do the following m Hold down the Option key and from the Edit menu choose Finish amp Expand Address Book Entry The nickname popup list appears if you have several nicknames begin ning with the same letter To set this auto expansion to happen all the time so that you don t have to hold down the Option key check the Expand nicknames immediately box in the Composing Mail settings For an alternate way to complete nicknames see the next section Using Automatic Nick name Completion Using Automatic Nickname Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only Similar to the Finish Address Book Entry command nickname auto completion lets you enter a portion of an Address Book nickname in the To Cc or Bcc field and has Eudora automatically complete the nickname Press Return or Enter and the email address for the nickname appears provided the Expand nicknames immediately function is turned on in the Composing Mail settings 195 Using Automatic Nickname Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual 196 In the following example you want to send a message to Margaret You need to have entered the
111. the group s purpose or file contents then click Next The Share Group Mailbox dialog appears Share Group Mailbox dialog SS Now ESP Share Group Wizard Share Group Mailbox Please choose a mailbox where messages sent ta this share group should be transferred Click Next to accept the creation of a mailbox with the suggested name W Transfer to New Mail box Marketing plans In Folder Mail Folder Q Transfer to Existing Mailbox 0 Aan existing mailbox must not be assigned to any other share group or any other plugin The In mailbox is not allowed Ce Cen 6 Doone of the following m f you want to create a new mailbox for all group messages choose Transfer to New Mailbox and type the name of the mailbox in the text box m If you want all group messages to go to an existing mailbox choose Transfer to Existing Mailbox then click the long gray button Choose a mailbox from the list then click OK Note You can t transfer messages to either the In mailbox or a mailbox already assigned to another group 7 Click Next The Share Group Folder dialog appears 291 Creating an ESP Group Advanced Setup Eudora User Manuall Share Group Folder dialog New ESP Share Group Wizard i Share Group Folder Please choose a folder where files for this share group will live Click Next to accept the creation of 4 folder with the suggested name and location Use New Folder Marketing plans In Folder ESP gro
112. the message body of incoming message windows m As commands on the Attach submenu under the Message menu m As commands at the bottom of the Special menu Some message plug ins may not be available through the menus or in message windows because they perform their function automatically behind the scenes Resource plug ins once installed can appear in a variety of places within Eudora including in a dialog a menu a string of text or a picture A resource plug in may also operate behind the scenes without your input To change the settings for those installed message plug ins that have settings do the following Eudora User Manual Word Services 1 From the Special menu choose Plug in Settings The Plug in Settings submenu appears 2 From the Plug in Settings submenu choose the message plug in To see which message plug ins are currently installed do the following 1 From the Apple menu Apple logo in the upper left corner of your screen choose About Message Plug ins The dialog that displays shows all installed message plug ins including those not visible on menus or as icons You can scroll through the dialog 2 To close the dialog click OK To unplug or uninstall a message or resource plug in from Eudora do the following 1 Quit Eudora 2 Drag the plug in file out of your Eudora Stuff folder or the other folder in which you installed it 3 Start Eudora The Eudora plug in will no longer appear in its fo
113. the search useful Try working with fewer conditions in this case or making the search text or other value more specific or switching to Match all Every search is different and everyone s mail collection is different and you may need to experiment based on the mailboxes you want to look through the amount of mail in each one the kind of data you re looking for and the crudeness or specificity of your search conditions Your selection in the first leftmost popup target popup determines which popups and other fields will appear in the remainder of the search condition as well as what contents they contain Typically the target popup is followed by another popup that we ll call the comparison popup and that is usually followed by a text field that we ll call the value field However there are a number of variations of this scheme described later Using the Target Popup The target popup specifies the area within a message where you want Eudora to look for text or non text attributes The default target selection is Anywhere If you choose This will happen Anywhere Eudora looks through all text in the headers and message body of a message This includes text in hidden headers that are normally only exposed with the Blah Blah Blah icon on the icon bar It also includes the header labels themselves Headers Eudora looks through all text in the headers of a message including header labels This includes text in hidden headers
114. the spelling dictionaries All capitals NOSTROMO off lIf you turn this setting on the spelling checker ignores any word that contains all capital letters such as an acronym If this is off the spelling checker checks all such words against the spelling dictionaries Suggest words that These settings determine the kinds of suggestions offered by Eudora s Spelling Dictio naries for the correct spelling of a word that is marked as misspelled during a spelling check The suggested words appear on both the Spelling submenu and if available the Control key context popup menu Only one of these settings can be selected at a time Look like the word you typed on When this setting is on then Eudora suggests replacement words that are typographically similar to the word marked as misspelled Sound like the word you typed off If you turn this setting on then Eudora suggests replacement words that are phonetically similar to the word marked as misspelled Look or sound like the word off lIf you turn this setting on then Eudora suggests both look alike and sound alike replacement words for the word marked as misspelled Never make suggestions off If you turn this setting on then Eudora never suggests replacement words for any word marked as misspelled by the spelling checker Attachments The Attachments settings determine how Eudora sends and receives attachments To display the Spell Checking settings dialog do the fo
115. this option on and you want to delete a message but save its attachment move the attachment into another folder before deleting the message Transferring Messages You can transfer messages freely between mailboxes There are several ways to do this m Use the Transfer menu m Drag a message summary to an open mailbox m Drag an open message s Tow Truck to an open mailbox m Drag a message to a mailbox button on the main toolbar m Drag a message to a mailbox icon in the Mailboxes window see Using the Mailboxes Window on page 121 133 Transferring Messages Eudora User Manual 134 To put a copy of a message in another mailbox instead of transferring the message hold down the Option key and use one of the transfer options above This is useful if you want to file a message in more than one mailbox If you try to transfer a message to the Out mailbox an alert appears informing you that some header information may be removed from the message during transfer Click Yes to transfer the message Important Don t forget to clean out your Out mailbox occasionally to increase your system performance Note You can undo mailbox transfers one at time using the Undo command from the Edit menu Using the Transfer Menu The Transfer menu is one way to transfer messages between mailboxes With a current message open or message summaries selected select a mailbox from the Transfer menu The messages are transferred from their prev
116. to do so by doing the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings then Personalities The Personalities settings dialog appears 2 Turn off the Allow Authentication setting and click OK Important If you turn off the Allow Authentication option you may not be able to send mail Please check with your email administrator or ISP for instructions If Eudora detects this situation a warning dialog appears Eudora User Manual Keeping Copies of Outgoing Messages m Click Try Anyway Eudora will try to send your mail without authentication even though it will probably fail to send the mail Click Allow Eudora will turn the Allow Authentication switch back on for that personality m Click Cancel Messages will not be sent for that personality Check with your email administrator or ISP for instruction if you have difficulties Keeping Copies of Outgoing Messages There are three ways to keep copies of your outgoing messages m To keep a copy of every outgoing message in the Out mailbox turn on the Keep copies of outgoing mail option in the Sending Mail settings dialog See Sending Mail on page 250 m To keep a copy of the current outgoing message in the Out mailbox turn on the Keep Copy icon in the icon bar m To keep a copy of the current outgoing message in a particular mailbox put the inser tion point in the Bcc field of the message and select the mailbox from the Fcc menu normally the Transfer me
117. to exactly equal it 137 Filtering Messages 138 Eudora User Manual Note If you select multiple messages with no common Subject sender or recipient Eudora displays a message informing you so and Make Filter command performs no function Action Area The Action area lets you determine the one action that will be performed on messages that satisfy the Match conditions you have specified for this filter The three action choices are all message transfer actions they transfer the filtered message to a mailbox For messages that satisfy your match conditions your simple filter will depending on your selection here transfer the messages to either a new mailbox an existing mailbox or your Trash mailbox m Transfer to new mailbox Select to transfer the filtered message to a new mailbox that you will specify The text field is filled in with a suggested new mailbox name based on your selected content match condition From Any Recipient or Subject You can change this name if you like The mailbox will be created in your Mail Folder in your Eudora Folder under your Documents Folder and it can later be moved using drag and drop in the open Mailboxes window from the Window menu The new mailbox is created in your Mail Folder as soon as you create this filter m Transfer to existing Select to transfer the filtered message into one of your existing mailboxes Choose the mailbox using the button next to the field When you click t
118. to the next or previous message when using the modified or unmodified arrow keys as set in the Moving Around settings If this is off then performing such a message switch will not mark the unread message as read Eudora User Manual Date Display Mark read if deleted on When this setting is on an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane is marked read if you delete it or transfer it to the Trash mailbox If this setting is off the message is not marked read when deleted If this setting is on and you delete the unread message currently being previewed Eudora first marks the message read then deletes it In this case you will not get a warning if you have Eudora set to warn you when you delete unread messages in the Extra Warnings settings Mark read after seconds on 5 When this setting is on an unread message bullet in Status column that is currently being previewed in the preview pane is marked read blank in Status column after the number of seconds entered in the box If this is off an unread message being previewed is not marked read after any length of time Date Display The Date Display settings determine how the date appears in message Summaries To display the Date Display settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Date Display icon The Date Display settings dialog appears Date Display settings Settings Date format Age sensitive
119. usage See Statis tics Window Sponsored and Paid Modes only on page 176 New Script menu A new Script menu appears on the menu bar if you move your AppleScript folder to the Eudora Applications folder or to the Eudora Stuff folder All scripts in your folder and those included with Eudora appear on the menu See Scripts Menu Sponsored and Paid Modes only on page 235 m New Address Book The Eudora address book has been improved for easier usage and maintenance See Using the Address Book on page 181 System Requirements Eudora User Manual 18 System Requirements To use the Eudora Email application you must have at least the following m Macintosh PowerPC processor m Macintosh OS 8 1 or later m Network or Internet mail account that uses POPS or IMAP4 protocol m Access to your mail account via a TCP IP Internet network connection or via PPP dial up networking through a modem Note Some Eudora plug ins such as QUALCOMM s PureVoice Player Recorder require more advanced configurations such as a Power Macintosh and System 7 5 or later Be sure to check the README and other documentation before you use any Eudora plug in Click the following topic for more information Using Eudora Plug ins on page 306 Opening and Configuring Eudora Note Eudora s installation procedure is in the Eudora Quick Start Guide included in the product box If you downloaded Eudora from the Internet the Quick
120. were returned by the search It is a count of the number of message summaries in the Results pane When the search is complete this number stays static You cannot remove messages from the Results pane as you can in regular mailbox windows The message count display is not the same as a mailbox size display Clicking the counter button will do nothing For more information on the normal operations performed in mailbox windows and the message preview pane many or most of which apply to the Search window see Working with Mailboxes on page 111 IMAP users see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for the rule variations in IMAP mailbox windows Here are the major operations you can perform in the Results pane and how they affect the original messages and the mailboxes in which they are stored m Inthe Results pane if you change the Status the Priority the Label or the Server Action via the corresponding column popup the changes are reflected back in the message summary in the original mailbox as well as in the original message itself m f you double click a message summary in the results list to open that message the original message opens Any changes you make to that message for example changing the Priority or Label or editing the message are also made to the original message The changes are reflected both in the results list summary and in the message s summary in the original mailbox m You can delete
121. when on batteries 178 Don t check when using battery option 248 Don t make automatic checks when MacSLIP or OT PPP is not already connected option 276 Don t Send option in Change Queueing dialog 55 Drag and Drop 42 Dragging text 42 Draw horizontal separator lines option 262 Draw vertical separator lines option 262 335 E Edit incoming mail 96 Edit menu Add Word Service command 309 editing a queued message 55 EIMS 316 Email server how to obtain 316 Empty the Trash mailbox option 273 Empty Trash on Quit option 131 276 Enable MoodWatch option 274 Encoding method option 256 Encoding methods AppleDouble 44 AppleSingle 44 BinHex 44 Uuencode Data Fork 44 Esoteric Settings 315 threading Really Miscellaneous 178 ESP Eudora Sharing Protocol 287 advanced setup 292 changing group information 302 configuring global settings 303 creating a group 289 installing 288 inviting members to join 294 joining a group 301 leaving a group 301 maintaining group members 299 Notifications tab 297 Settings tab 296 Sync Folder command 302 tips 288 User tab 294 working with the shared folder 302 Eudora how to open 18 Eudora Application Folder 314 Eudora Attention option 269 Eudora configuration 18 Eudora Email Introduction 17 What s new in this version 17 Eudora Folder 314 Attachments Folder 311 Cache Folder 311 Delivery Folder 311 Documentation Folder 315 Eudora Filters file 311 Eudora ltems fold
122. which Eudora should place incoming attachments when they are received To specify an attachment folder click the long button A dialog appears prompting you to select a folder If you do not select an attachment folder Eudora stores your incoming attachments in the Attachments Folder in your Eudora Folder contained in your Documents Folder TEXT files belong to TeachText This specifies what application is used to open text files When you choose the Save As command from the File menu Eudora creates a text file that is saved for the application named in this field You may want to set this setting to your favorite word processing program To change the application click the application name button A dialog appears letting you select an application Trash attachments with messages off lf this setting is on Eudora automatically deletes an attachment received with a message when that message is deleted The attachment must still be in the folder defined as the Attachment Folder If you want to save an attachment but delete the message move the attachment to another folder or turn this setting off Eudora User Manual Replying Receive MIME digests as attachments on When this setting is on MIME digests are converted to Eudora mailboxes If this is off MIME digests will be displayed as a single long message Replying The Replying settings determine how replies are created To display the Replying settings dialog do the f
123. with a short initial message indicating that the full message will be retrieved Or this notice appears in the preview pane if you are previewing the message Eudora then begins retrieving the message Once the message has been fully retrieved Eudora displays the message content in the message window or the preview pane 99 Viewing IMAP Messages Eudora User Manual 100 Note If you are checking your mail while traveling or if you want to avoid making a network connection for some other reason switch to offline mode or do not open messages you haven t yet retrieved You can distinguish fully retrieved messages from minimally retrieved messages essential headers only by looking at the Server Status column in the open mailbox window If the column for a message summary contains a blank diamond the message has not been retrieved If the column contains a half filled diamond the message is retrieved but not its attachments If the column contains a totally filled diamond the message and its attach ment are retrieved Responding to IMAP Messages When you use the Reply Forward Redirect or Turbo Redirect command on an IMAP message that has only been partially retrieved the incoming IMAP message is then fully retrieved and is excerpted as necessary in the response Eudora notifies you that the retrieval is occurring If the incoming message has attachments and you initiate a Forward Redirect or Turbo Redirect comm
124. you have replied to forwarded and redirected during a specific timeframe Displaying the Statistics Window To display the Statistics window do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Statistics The Statistics window appears Sample Statistics window showing received email for a day SSS statistics SSS H H messages Today messages yesterday average per day messages total fh today Number GS esterday of Messages meee Time of Day Messages read 100 of messages received today 100 of messages received yesterday 32 average 255 total messages Attachments received 2 attachments today 2 attachments yesterday 1 0 average per day 34 total attachments 2 From the popup menu choose to see email usage statistics for the Day Week Month or Year 3 To see more statistical information for example Attachments received check the More statistics box Note To change the color graph type and other settings for the Statistics window go to Statistics on page 285 for more information Printing the Statistics Report To print the information in the Statistics window do the following mw With the Statistics window open go to the File menu and choose Print Your Statistics report will print 176 Eudora User Manual Task Progress Window Task Progress Window The Task Progress window displays activity as it happens For example when you check mail the Task Progress window displays email transfer informa
125. you fill with signature text Adding a New Signature To create a signature do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Signatures The Signatures window appears 2 Atthe bottom of the Signatures window click the New button 3 Type a name for the new signature icon that appears and press Return or click the Edit button The signature text window appears 4 Inthe signature text window type the text you want for your signature When you are finished close the window An alert asks if you want to save the changes to the window 5 Click Save Or to cancel and return to the text window click Cancel Or to close the text window without saving your changes click Discard You can add as many signatures as you like Modifying a Signature To modify a signature do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Signatures The Signatures window appears 2 Click the signature icon you want to modify 3 At the bottom of the Signatures window click the Edit button The signature text window appears Note You can also double click on the signature icon to open the text window for that signature 4 Make your changes to the signature When you are finished close the window An alert asks if you want to save your changes 5 To save the changes and close the window click Save Or click Cancel to return to the text window Or click Discard to close the window without saving your changes To change the name of a signature do the fo
126. your registration code below The exact name you registered under First Name Last Name Your registration code 100012445 Eudora User Manual Quitting Eudora Quitting Eudora To quit Eudora do the following m From the File menu choose Quit or press Command Q If you have queued messages or timed messages due to be sent in the next 12 hours you are given the option to send them See the sections Queuing a Message to Send Later on page 53 and Queuing a Message to Send at a Certain Time on page 54 The Trash mailbox is emptied if the Empty Trash on Quit box is checked in the Miscellaneous Settings See Miscellaneous on page 276 Getting Help Eudora has an online help window that provides quick reference instructions for accom plishing many of Eudora s operations To display an online help window choose the topic you want from the Eudora Help menu Eudora Help menu About Balloon Help Show Balloons About this Release Creating Messages Attaching a File Using Signatures Using Stationery Using Personalities Receiving Mail Replying to Messages Deleting Messages Transferring Messages Filtering Messages Using Mailboxes Using the Address Book Modifers and Shortcuts Selecting a URL Helper Changing Your Password Questions or problems Payment amp Registration Insert System Configuration Eudora also has extensive Balloon Help To turn balloon help on do th
127. 184 Address Books Personal dialog Nickname Uncle Joe A Recipient List Full Name Joseph Camp First Name Last Name fuoseph ome This nickname will expand to the following address es Joe Camp myfi r m com 6 Inthe Full Name field type the real name or an informal name for the person If there is just one address for the entry this name and the address are included in the To field for your recipient to see 7 Inthe First Name and Last Name fields type the first and last name of the person You can interchange the first and last names by clicking Ee 8 Inthe This nickname will expand to the following address es text field enter at least one complete email address for this person Note Make sure this field contains no other information except addresses and nick names or your messages will be addressed incorrectly 9 If you want to put this name on your recipient list check the Recipient List box Note It is recommended that you have no more than 2 000 nicknames per nickname file If the files are too large they may appear collapsed in the address book but you can still use all the nicknames when addressing messages If you have a large number of entries you might want to consider using a Ph or LDAP server Eudora User Manual Adding a Group to the Address Book Adding a Group to the Address Book To create a new group in an address book do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Address
128. 248 background threading 89 248 Balloon Help 27 Base64 322 Bcc 36 Bec button in Directory Services 206 Bcc field 57 in outgoing mail 36 Big icons only option 268 Big icons with names option 268 BinHex encoding 44 BinHex option 256 BLAH BLAH BLAH icon 92 lt blank gt in the Status column 113 Blind copy with Bcc field 36 with Name field in Address Book 184 BMP file format 42 94 Body field in Filters 141 Bold button 34 Bold option 266 334 Index Bold text option 40 Bulleted List button 35 Button type option 268 By default use option key for sender only option 257 C Cache Folder 311 Caps Lock key option 267 Cc 36 Cc button in Directory Services 206 Cc field in Filters 141 In Outgoing mail 36 Change Queueing dialog 53 54 55 Changing your registration 26 Check for mail every minutes option 58 75 248 279 Check mail automatically 58 75 Check for mail every minutes option 58 75 entering password 59 Fetch amp Delete server 84 Fetch icon 84 Fetch server action 84 manually check 58 minimum interval 58 75 Save password option 60 Skip messages over K option 84 Trash icon 84 with special instructions 85 Check Mail command 58 59 Check mail on manual checks option 279 Check Mail Specially command 81 Check Spelling add custom user dictionaries 49 Add to Dictionary command 48 automatically as you type 46 command 47 dictionaries 46 Never make suggestions option 48 Remove from Dictionary co
129. 258 The Fonts amp Display settings determine how Eudora displays windows and text To display the Fonts amp Display settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Fonts amp Display icon The Fonts amp Display settings dialog appears Eudora User Manual Fonts amp Display Fonts amp Display settings Se 11105 MMMM Screen Font Andale Mano f Size Spell Checking Font k l mo Print Font size fio Es Colors Text Quotes Background Attachments Dimensions of message window s Height wf oom windows when opening wf Display graphics in messages e Show formatting tool bar Fonts amp Display af Use Live Scroll bars wf Automatically download HTML graphics ef Animate animated GIF images Replying Date Display Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Note For each of the following three options select the desired font from the popup and type the point size in the text box Screen Font Size Mishawaka 9 These settings specify the font and point size to be used for text displayed in message windows incoming and outgoing mailbox windows message summaries and the preview pane and Search windows message summaries and the preview pane in the Results dialog Fixed Width Font Size Monaco blank These settings specify the font and point size to be used for text displayed in open incoming messages when you
130. 7 Turning off Quoted printable 322 Tutorial pages web site address 28 U Underline button 34 Underline option 266 Underline text option 40 UNIX server POP or IMAP how to obtain 316 unless option 142 unqueueing a message 55 Unquote 40 Unquote button 34 Unquote command 40 Unread status 87 Unwrap Selection command 42 UPPERIlower Text plug in 307 URL choosing an application 97 in incoming mail 97 in outgoing mail 45 Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option 282 Use an alert option 86 269 Use background threading option 89 248 Use Folder button 95 Use Live Scrollbars option 260 Use mail exchange records SMTP Servers Only option 271 Use Navigation Services if they are available option 277 Use old style toc files option 277 Use separate thread for sending option 251 user notification via filters 143 Username in Settings 246 Username option 279 UUCP 319 Mail drop format 320 Working files 320 D macO 320 X macO 320 UUCP Connect 319 Uuencode Data Fork encoding 44 345 Uuencode data fork option 256 uupc 319 V Vertical toolbar option 268 View By popup menu 181 W Warn me when options 272 Warn when sending queueing message with mis spellings option 48 254 Warnings Try to delete 131 Try to delete unread mail option 131 When option key is down option 257 When receiving styles pay attention to option 93 266 When sending mail with applied fonts amp styles op tion 265 Who option 262
131. Checking Mail 53 Sending or Queuing a Message 53 sending a Message Immediately 53 Queuing a Message to Send Later 53 Queuing a Message to Send at a Certain Time 54 Editing a Queued Message 55 Taking a Message Out of the Queue 55 sending Queued Messages When Checking Mail 55 sending Messages with Special Server Instructions 56 Using SMTP Authentication 56 Keeping Copies of Outgoing Messages 57 Checking for Incoming Mail 57 Checking for Mail Automatically 58 Checking for Mail Manually 58 Stopping a Mail Check 59 Using Your Password 59 Changing Your Password 60 Using Signatures and Stationery 61 Using a Signature 61 Signatures Window 61 Adding a New Signature 62 Modifying a Signature 62 Deleting a Signature 63 Including a Signature in Your Message 63 Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only 64 Stationery Window 64 Creating New Stationery 65 Creating New Stationery Using the Save As Command 65 Modifying Stationery 66 Deleting Stationery 67 Sending or Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only Using Alternate Email Accounts Personalities Window Creating a New Personality Modifying a Personality Deleting a Personality Creating a New Message from the Personality Window Changing the Personality of a New Message Checking Mail for Your Personalities Checking for Mail Automatically Replying from a Personality Replies and Personalities Linking a Signature and
132. Directory Services window with the selected text in the Enter query field and perform the query Shift click globe icon in Lists all servers except the reference list of Ph servers That is lists the Directory Services Configured server the Servers used recently and the LDAP window servers but does not list the Ph servers To list all servers including the Ph list click the globe icon without using the Shift key Shift drag selected text Copies and pastes the selected text to the destination but without including any style information 23 Modifiers Eudora User Manual Press this key and do this task Puts a copy of the current message in the selected mailbox and leave the original current message where it is Option Double click Displays a file dialog to select an Internet application e g web URL browser to use for that URL type This happens Option Make Address Creates a nickname consisting of the sender of the message and all the Book Entry original recipients or just the sender if the Reply to all By default setting is turned on in the Replying settings Option To Cc Bcc From the Address Book inserts the full address instead of the nickname or don t if the Expand nicknames immediately setting is turned on in the Composing Mail settings Option drag Attachment Copies the attachment to another folder on your desktop from message window or preview pane Option double clic
133. E SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED FURTHERMORE QUALCOMM DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY QUALCOMM OR A QUALCOMM AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL QUALCOMM AND ITS DIRECTORS OFFICERS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION AND THE LIKE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF QUALCOMM OR A QUALCOMM AUTHORIZED REPRESEN TATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY In no event shall QUALCOMM s total liability to you for all damages losses and causes of action whether in contract tort including negligence or otherwise exceed the amount paid for the Software and its documentation
134. Eudora Nicknames and Nicknames Folder Address Book entries are saved in the default Eudora Nicknames file If you have created additional files those are kept in the Nicknames Folder These files are in UNIX mailrc format The Eudora Nicknames Folder is created when you first start Eudora after installa tion See Using the Address Book on page 181 for more details on creating and using Address Book entries and nickname files Eudora Settings and Eudora Settings bkup Settings information is saved in the Eudora Settings file This file is created when you first start Eudora after installation If you change your settings via the Settings dialog from the Special menu Eudora saves the old settings as Eudora Settings bkup replacing any existing Eudora Settings bkup file and saves the new settings as Eudora Settings See Setting Eudora Preferences on page 245 for information on how to change your settings in the Settings dialog IMAP Folder Mail downloaded from an IMAP account is stored in the IMAP Folder This folder contains one local cache folder for each of your IMAP personalities The IMAP Folder is created the first time you select IMAP in the Server Configuration field of the Checking Mail Settings see Checking Mail on page 246 for your Dominant personality or the Personality Extras Settings see Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 for any of your personalities Deleting an IMA
135. Header field and enter simply Bob in the text field Use the conjunction popup to link the two terms The conjunction options are as follows ignore lgnore the second term if the message matches the first term filter the message and lf the message matches both the first and second terms filter it or lf the message matches either term filter it unless lf the message matches the first term filter it unless the message also matches the second term in which case do not filter it This lets you exclude certain variations of the first term Filter Actions All messages that match the filter criteria are acted on as specified with the Actions popups Each filter can do up to five things to a message that matches the criteria You can use the same action twice if it does not directly affect the original message For example Copy To can be used twice but Transfer To cannot The Actions options are as follows None No action Make Status Assigns the selected status to messages Make Priority Assigns the selected priority level to messages If you select a specific level messages are set to that priority If you select Raise or Lower messages are raised or lowered one priority level if possible based on their pre filter level Make Label Sponsored and Paid modes only Assigns the selected label to messages Label colors and names for Macintosh labels 1 through 7 are set in the Finder s Prefer
136. ING FROM my shared folder box This box is checked by default 8 Ifyou want ESP to warn the person you invite when the potential member attempts to change role type check the Prefer that user does not change role displays warning box If checked the member can change role type but is discouraged to do SO 9 Click OK A message window opens that contains an invitation message for the selected group This message has a special attachment containing the group invitation 10 In an open message window enter the email addresses of the invitee s in the To header You can also enter text in the body of the message ESP Invitation message To swendt From Armand Rouleau atr Subject Please join the Business Plan workgroup Business Plan 1591354r Cc Bcc Attachments 6h 16071555 MIM Open the icon to join the Business Plan workgroup When an invitee accepts the invitation information contained in the attachment creates a group entry in the invitee s Groups window and prompts him or her to specify a share group folder and mailbox ESP sends an RSVP message back to the inviter The inviter then sends an updated copy of the membership list to all the members Configuring Shared Folder Settings Every group member needs a shared folder on his or her hard drive to store documents schedules messages illustrations images or any other file the members deem neces sary for sharing ESP allows you and your group members to determ
137. Link History Mailboxes Personalities Signatures Stationery Statistics Task Progress Choose this command Send to Back Revert to Default Tabs Option Address Book Directory Services Mailboxes This happens Sends the topmost current window to the back of all open Eudora windows This command is active only if the topmost current window is either a single tool window with or without a tab or a tabbed window group In the case of a single window with a tab Tabs is checked checkmark next to it and selecting Tabs removes the tab In the case of a single window without a tab Tabs is unchecked and selecting it adds a tab to the window In the case of a tabbed window group Tabs is checked and selecting it removes all tabs from the member windows and hides all member windows except the currently active one in the group For more details see Managing Windows in Eudora on page 171 Recombines all tool windows except Task Progress into their default tabbed window group configurations See Managing Windows in Eudora on page 171 for more details Opens the Address Book or bring it to the front for creating and editing nickname entries See Using the Address Book on page 181 for complete details Opens the Directory Services window or bring it to the front to use online directories to look people up on the Internet or your local Intranet See Using Directory Services on page 201 for complete details
138. M MD5 SMTP authentication 56 Create Link button 43 Creating a new mail folder 123 Creating a new mailbox 123 Creating a new personality 71 Creating a tabbed window 174 Creating a vacation message 144 Creating an auto reply 144 Creating SMTP Authentication 56 Current maintenance release how to determine 325 D Date column 115 Date Display Settings 263 Date field in Change Queueing dialog 54 Date formats option 263 Date option 262 Delete all messages on server be sure option 86 Delete all messages that have been retrieved op tion 84 86 Delete command 131 Delete from Server action 84 116 Delete from server when emptied from trash option 82 86 248 250 Delete key 124 Delete messages marked for deletion option 85 Delete server action 84 143 Deleted on IMAP Server action 117 Deleting a personality 73 Delivery Folder 311 Detaching attachment 44 Dimensions of message windows options 260 dinosaur icon Filters window 140 Directory Services addressing a message from 206 Bcc button 206 207 Cc button 206 207 finding Ph servers 208 To button 206 207 Disconnect MacSLIP or OT PPP if Eudora connect ed it option 276 Display dates using option 264 Display graphics in messages option 94 260 DNS load balancing option 271 Do Nothing server action 116 does not appear option 141 Domain to Add option 283 Domain to add to unqualified names option 250 252 Dominant personality 57 73 Don t check when not connected 178 Don t check
139. MIME compliant email readers regardless of what operating system they are using For more information on MIME see Using MIME on page 321 AppleSingle TS This works for recipients with MIME compliant email readers on Macin toshes Do not use this type if your recipient is not using a Macintosh ETH BinHex HEX This is best for recipients on a Macintosh with an email reader that is not MIME compliant LILI Uuencode Data Fork Ick This is best for recipients using non Macintosh systems that are not MIME compliant You can select the default encoding method for all outgoing messages in the Attachments settings see Attachments on page 255 On a message by message basis you can select the encoding method from the Attachment Type popup Glon the icon bar of the message composition window Eudora User Manual Inserting the Contents of a Text File into a Message If you want to include the Macintosh file type and resources with an AppleDouble or AppleSingle attachment be sure you click the Macintosh Information icon E This can be important in maintaining the integrity of the file for another Macintosh but can confuse other operating systems You can turn this on by default for all outgoing messages by turning on the Always include Macintosh information option in the Attachments settings See Attachments on page 255 If the attachment is a plain text file it is not encoded in any special format before being sen
140. MTP server name outgoing server if different from the incoming server m default domain m return address if different from username mailhost m checking and sending mail settings m server configuration m authentication method m default stationery m default signature if you re not using stationery Some of these settings are required and some are optional For more details see Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 278 and Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 All other settings in the Settings dialog and elsewhere in Eudora apply to all personali ties If you change any of those settings the changes apply to all personalities as well Note You can create multiple personalities for the same user account Just use a different personality name and some of the information from the first personality that is you clone the personality and change a few items However make sure you don t check mail for the same account If you do so you ll receive an error message 69 Using Alternate Email Accounts Eudora User Manual 70 Personalities Window You use the Personalities window to manage gain access to and apply your e mail accounts personalities when you use more than one account To open the Personalities window do the following From the Window menu choose Personalities Or if the Personalities window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Sample
141. Mac OS 8 5 and later 3 Choose your preferred spelling from the submenu or the context popup menu Or choose Add to Dictionary or press Shift Optiont Command 6 to add the new word to your custom user dictionary 47 48 4 Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manuall Correct each highlighted word until you are finished To proceed through the message either double click the next highlighted word or choose Find Next Misspelling from the Spelling submenu or the context popup menu or press Option Command 6 More Spell Checking Information The spelling checker ignores any text that is preceded by a quote mark which is normally an excerpt bar also called a sidebar but which in older versions of Eudora can also be an angle bracket gt for unstyled text Eudora assumes that this quoted text was originally from another message and therefore does not need to be spell checked The spell error word highlighting is not a style It is a visual cue for you only and is removed from the message when you send it or close it It will not affect any other styles in your message To correct a word marked as misspelled you can place the cursor anywhere inside the word and then display the Spelling submenu or the context popup menu You do not have to double click the word lf Eudora has no suggestions for the correct spelling of a misspelled word in any of its spelling dictionaries then suggestions are not lis
142. P personality icon and click the Check Mail button F check mail Alternately if the personality is configured in the Personalities settings dialog to check mail during manual or automatic mail checks choose Check Mail from the File menu or simply wait for the next automatic mail check When you resynchronize a mailbox its contents are completely updated according to all operations that have been performed on the mailbox from all computers that have access to it Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders Resynchronization deals with changes at the message level coordinating all changes made to the messages in a particular mailbox from any number of different computers Refreshing deals with changes at the mailbox and folder level coordinating all changes made to the list of mailboxes and folders for that particular IMAP account from any number of computers as mailboxes and folders are added deleted renamed and other wise changed Because the mailboxes and folders in your IMAP account are stored remotely on the IMAP server you can change any of these from other computers and other users who have access to these items can change them as well The Mailboxes window does not reflect the real time status of the mailbox and folder list for your IMAP account s and between mail checks a disparity can grow between what appears in a particular IMAP list and what is actually on that IMAP server as new mail boxes are ad
143. P personality or changing its Server Configuration field from IMAP to POP deletes the local cache folder for that IMAP account from the IMAP Folder See Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for more informa tion Mail Folder Mailbox files are kept in the Mail Folder This folder is created when you first start Eudora after installation Note The Mail Folder contains mailbox files for all of your POP accounts IMAP mail is kept in the IMAP Folder Eudora User Manual Eudora Folders In Out and Trash in the Mail Folder Mail is saved in the In Out and Trash mailbox files and in mailboxes that you create These files are all in UNIX spool format Mailbox Aliases in the Mail Folder Eudora supports the use of aliases for mailboxes that you have moved to a location outside the Eudora Folder This allows you to use these mailboxes from within Eudora Place the mailbox aliases in the Eudora Folder or a subfolder within the Eudora Folder Note A mailbox alias is automatically created and placed in the Eudora Folder when you open the mailbox by selecting the Other command from the Mailbox menu or one of its submenus If you open the mailbox by selecting Other the mailbox alias is deleted when you quit Eudora However if you open the mailbox by selecting Other from a submenu under the Mailbox menu the mailbox alias remains in the Eudora Folder indefinitely These arguments also apply when you transfer one or more messa
144. P servers keep a list of other Ph and LDAP servers available on the Internet While this is not always a complete list of every Ph and LDAP server on the Internet you can gain access to the available servers In the open Directory Services window the current server also called the active server is the server listed in parentheses to the right of the Enter query field label This may or may not be your default lookup server depending on what server you have used for your most recent lookup To get the list of Ph and LDAP servers from the current server click the globe icon in the open Directory Services window As shown in the figure this icon is located to the right of the Enter query field and under the Lookup button Directory Services window showing globe icon Services Click the globe icon to geta list of lookup servers from the current server A list of Ph and LDAP servers appears in the results area To go to any one of the servers listed in order to perform a query on that server do the following m Hold down the Command key and click the server URL or just double click the URL Note If you go from a Ph server to an LDAP server or vice versa you will need to use the rules of the new protocol when you submit queries Here are the items you will generally see in a server list returned when you click the Globe icon Eudora User Manual Finding and Using Lookup Servers from Around the World Configured server
145. POP or IMAP protocol for receiving and managing your mail For the correct protocol check with your email administrator or your ISP To enter POP or IMAP information do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 From the Settings category list scroll and choose Checking Mail The Checking Mail settings dialog appears Sample settings entered in the Checking Mail settings dialog POP server oe Settings SSS Account Server Information Mail Host outgoing mfi r m g m Mail Frotocol w POP cad MAF Authentication Passwords Kerberos ga APOP ef Save password vit Getting Started ef Overlap commands Connection _ Check for mail every minutes _ Don t aute check when using battery ef Use background threading Composing Mail i ef Send on check Mail Management _ Leave on server for days _ Delete from server when emptied from trash L Skip messages aver K Spell Checking Attachments 3 Inthe Mail Protocol field choose POP or IMAP depending on which protocol your incoming mail server uses the default for this field is POP Note that your Username and Mail Server should be the same as in the Getting Started settings dialog Some of the fields will change depending on whether you choose POP or IMAP Your your ISP or email administrator will tell you if you need to enter any additional informa tion in the POP related or IMAP related fields such as an
146. Paid modes only The Main Toolbar gives you easy access to your frequently used Eudora functions Main Toolbar You can set the buttons to correspond to your function keys the F keys on an extended keyboard and you can create new buttons for most Eudora commands Buttons on the main toolbar are context sensitive they are highlighted if they can be used for the current task and are dimmed if they cannot For example if an incoming message is currently open or selected in a mailbox the Reply toolbar button is highlighted because you can reply to the message If no incoming message is open or selected the Reply button is dimmed because there s no message to reply to For toolbar buttons that corre spond to menu commands the state of the button highlighted or dimmed matches the state of its associated menu command For more information go to the tutorial section on the Eudora website See www eudora com techsupport tutorials To add a new button to the main toolbar do the following 1 While pressing the Command key move the cursor between two buttons or at either end of the toolbar depending on where you want the new button to go 2 When the arrow changes to a splitter cursor click it The Toolbar Button Creation dialog appears Toolbar Button Creation dialog Toolbar Button Creation Please choose any menu item or press any key combination Remove Button 3 Choose a menu item or enter a key combination Th
147. Queueing command 55 Quick Recipient List Forward To submenu 199 Insert amp Expand Recipient command 199 Insert Recipient command 199 New Message To submenu 199 putting nicknames on 199 Redirect To submenu 199 QuickDraw GX Picture file format 42 94 342 Index QuickDraw Picture PICT file format 42 94 QuickTime 42 94 QuickTime Image File 42 94 Quitting Eudora 27 Quote add remove 40 Quote command 40 Quoted printable MIME 321 turning off 322 Quoted printable icon 32 Quotes color option 259 R Read from Internet Config not recommended op tion 277 Real name 319 Real Name in Settings 246 Real Name option and UUCP 319 Real name option 280 Receive MIME digests as attachments option 257 Recipient List option 199 Redirect To filter action 143 Redirect To submenu 199 redirecting via filters 143 Registering Eudora 25 Registration changing 26 Regular Expressions 168 Remove a signature 63 Remove All button 124 Remove Button 305 Remove from Dictionary command 48 Remove It button 124 Removing a personality 73 Removing IMAP mailboxes and folders 127 Renaming a mail folder 123 Renaming a mailbox 123 Renaming IMAP mailboxes and folders 127 Reorganizing Tabbed Windows 173 Reply to all option 257 Reply With filter action 68 143 Reply With submenu 64 replying with stationery via filters 68 with stationery via filters 143 Replying Settings Copy original s priority to reply option 38 replying with stationery
148. Replies to the sender and all of the original recipients and Selection To All instead of quoting the entire message quotes only the text Shift Option you ve selected from the original message If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings you only need hold down the Shift key not also the Option key Sends a copy of the currently open or selected message to someone else The entire message is quoted including the header Redirect Sends a copy of the currently open or selected message to someone else but uses the original sender s address as the return address That way if your recipient responds to the message the response goes to the original sender rather than you This is amessage handoff It says got this message but it really should have gone to you Here it is and now m out of the loop Note that the text is not quoted and only the message body is included Send Again Resends a message that has been rejected by the mail system Eudora reformats the message for you to make it look just as it did when you first sent it You can also use this command to resend any message and thereby save typing you can resend a long message to another recipient or send a different message to the same long list of recipients In this sense Send Again lets you treat any message like a stationery file New Message Submenu Sends a new message to someone on your Quick To Recipient List This submenu lists all of the
149. Reply To All In this case you must press the Option key to create a reply to only the original sender m To include yourself as a recipient turn on the When replying to all Include yourself option in the Replying settings This applies only if you are using Reply To All 105 Forwarding a Message Eudora User Manual Note To determine who you are for the Include yourself option Eudora uses the me nickname if you have one If you do not have a me nickname set up in your Address Book Eudora uses the contents of the Username Mail Host and Return address fields from the Getting Started settings Incoming mail personalities are usually in the form of username mailhost The me nickname is particularly useful if you have multiple addresses and do not want replies to go to any of those addresses To put the addresses of the other recipients of the original message in the Cc field instead of the To field turn on the When replying to all Put original To recipients in Cc field not To field option in the Replying settings dialog Only the original sender s address is put in the To field This works only if you are using Reply To All To ensure that your reply has the same message priority as the original message each time you reply to a message turn on the Copy original s priority to reply option in the Replying settings dialog Note If you copy text from an incoming message to the clipboard then
150. Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only Use these settings The values you choose for the following options apply only when you are not using statio nery that is when the Stationery popup is set to None If on the other hand you have selected a stationery file in that popup then the values below are ignored Instead Eudora sets the icon bar of the new message according to how the stationery message was saved So if you choose stationery that uses an Alternate signature and you set the Signature popup below to a Standard signature your Alternate signature will be used in the new message created from the stationery file Signature Standard Select a signature from the popup or select None for no signa ture If you select a signature Eudora automatically attaches that signature to the end of outgoing messages from your Dominant account You can override this setting with the Signature popup in the composition window See Using a Signature on page 61 Word wrap on When this setting is on a carriage return is not required at the end of each line of type in an outgoing message Eudora automatically wraps text to the next line with line breaks at roughly 76 characters per line This makes your mail more legible to recipients using line oriented mail systems It is strongly recommended that you leave this setting on May use Quoted Printable on If you turn this setting on Eudora uses quoted print able encoding when
151. Stationery to a Personality Creating an IMAP Personality Receiving Messages Managing Your Mail on the POP Server Creating a POP Account Leaving Mail on the Server Deleting a Message from the POP Server Skipping Messages Over a Certain Size Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions Checking for Mail from Your POP Account Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server Creating an IMAP Account Checking Mail from Your IMAP Account First Mail Check Subsequent Mail Checks Incoming Message Window Title Bar Icon Bar Message Body Receiving Attachments Viewing Graphics Attachments as Pictures in the Message Specifying an Attachment Folder Editing Incoming Messages Using Active URLs Viewing HTML Text Viewing HTML Graphics 67 69 69 70 71 73 73 73 74 19 19 79 79 76 78 81 81 81 83 84 84 85 86 8 88 90 90 91 92 92 93 93 94 95 96 97 97 98 vil Using the Speak Option to Read Your Messages Sponsored and Paid modes only saving a Message to a File Printing a Message Viewing IMAP Messages Responding to IMAP Messages Transferring IMAP Messages Retrieving Attachments Minimal Headers Only Full Message Except Attachments Over K Full Message with Attachments Actions That Retrieve IMAP Messages Automatically Deleting IMAP Attachments Replying to Messages Replying to a Message Using the Reply Options Forwarding a Message Redirecting a Message Turbo Redirecting Redirect and Signatures Sending Reje
152. Suggest words that Look like the word you typed Sound like the word you typed M Look or sound like the word i Never make suggestions Attachments 3 Select Automatically as you type if not already selected 4 Click OK Your automatic speller should be on Checking Your Spelling Manually If you prefer not to use the automatic spell checker Eudora has a manual method to check your spelling However to check spelling manually you must have Check spelling Only when requested turned on in the Check Spelling settings dialog See Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 253 To check your spelling manually do the following 1 In an open message window text file or signature file in Eudora from the Edit menu choose Spelling then Check Spelling or press Command 6 Or click in the main toolbar Eudora scans your entire message including the Subject line of outgoing messages or the selected text and highlights all the misspelled words 2 Double click the highlighted word or place the insertion point anywhere in the word to select it Either display the Spelling submenu or hold down the Control key and click the highlighted word to display the spelling context popup menu The submenu and the context popup menu each list Eudora s suggestions for the correct spelling of the misspelled or unknown word Note The Control key works only if the Contextual Menu Manager is installed which is included in
153. TP server handles this by holding your mail until the other computer is ready to accept it eliminating the inconvenience of having unsent messages hanging around on your Macintosh Incoming Mail When somebody sends you mail other computers use the SMTP protocol to deliver the mail to your POP or IMAP server Your POP or IMAP server puts mail in your mail drop where it stays until the Eudoragram picks it up When you check your mail Eudora uses POP version 3 or IMAP version 4 to pick up your mail and move it to your computer Why doesn t Eudora use SMTP to receive your mail SMTP works best when the computers it knows about are always ready for mail Unless you wanted to run Eudora and your computer 24 hours per day seven days a week SMTP wouldn t work well for you It also doesnt work well in lab environments where you might use any number of different computers More Information If you want to know more about the Internet in general consult the book Internetworking with TCP IP by Douglas Comer 1988 Prentice Hall ISBN 0 13 470154 2 025 If you want to Know more about SMTP RFC 822 POP version 3 and MIME the official standards are as follows mw RFC 821 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol by Jonathan B Postel m RFC 822 Standard for the Format of Internet Text Messages by Dave Crocker m RFC 1939 Post Office Protocol Version 3 by Marshall Rose m RFC 2045 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions b
154. Text The Styled Text settings tell Eudora when to use style information in outgoing and incoming messages To display the Styled Text settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Styled Text icon The Styled Text settings dialog appears Styled Text settings Settings Sending mail with styles Send plain amp styled both Send styled mail only d Send plain text mail only L Ask each time gt When receiving styled mail pay attention to ef Bold fey Font yf Left right center 4 Italic 4 Size ff Margins Underline PyfColor y Excerpts Pi uh T A Formatting Toolbar ef Show formatting toolbar Eudora Labels gt g Styled Text amp Moving Around Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Sending mail with styles When sending mail with applied fonts amp styles Send plain amp styled both Spon sored and Paid modes only This specifies how to send a message that contains text styles Choose Send plain amp styled both to send the message in both plain text form and styled text HTML format Recipients whose emailers cannot read styled mail will still be able to read the message in plain text form Choose Send styled mail only to send the message with all styled text and not as a plain text message Choose Send plain text mail only to send the message in plain text form only with all sty
155. The pane is a replica of the Mailboxes window from the Window menu It duplicates your mailbox and folder structure and also shows underlines for those mailboxes and folders in which there is unread mail This can be useful if you want to target your search based on the Read or Unread status of messages Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Click an item in the Mailboxes pane to select it Use the Shift key to select a contiguous range of items or drag select and use the Command key to make non consecutive selections adding or removing items in a group selection Press Command A to select all of your mailboxes and folders To deselect an entire selection click somewhere outside the selection Important When you click a folder to select it all mailboxes and folders contained in that folder are also selected This is one difference from selection rules in your Mailboxes window Your selection in the Mailboxes pane determines where Eudora will look when conducting the search Eudora will look at all messages contained in the selected mailboxes and folders Starting and Stopping the Search To start a search do the following 1 Setup your search conditions in the Match area 2 Choose Match all or Match any for multiple conditions 3 Choose your desired mailboxes and folders in the Mailboxes pane 4 Click Search to start the search or press Return Eudora begins searching through the selected mailboxes and matc
156. To field select the nickname from any of these three submenus found in the Message menu m New Message To Opens a new message and addresses it to the selected nick name Forward To Forwards the current message s to the selected nickname Redirect To Redirects the current message s to the selected nickname To insert a recipient s nickname into a message that you have already opened do the following 1 Move the cursor to where you want the nickname 2 From the Edit menu choose Insert Recipient The Insert Recipient submenu appears 3 From the Insert Recipient submenu choose the nickname To insert the real address es instead of the nickname do the following 1 Hold down the Option key and from the Edit menu choose Insert amp Expand Recip ient The Insert amp Expand Recipient submenu appears 2 From the Insert amp Expand Recipient submenu choose the nickname To set this to happen all the time so that you don t have to hold down the Option key turn on the Expand nicknames immediately option in the Composing Mail settings see Composing Mail on page 252 in the user manual You can add more than one nickname from the Recipient List to the To Cc and Bcc fields of any message If you add the nicknames by selecting them from the Insert Recip ient submenu or Insert amp Expand Recipient Eudora automatically adds commas where necessary Including Nicknames on the Recipient List To includ
157. a s memory size Mail stored in Eudora s In Out Trash and any open mailboxes increases the amount of memory Eudora needs to operate mail stored in other mailboxes does not If you have a large amount of mail in these mailboxes try transferring them to other mailboxes to decrease Eudora s memory requirements If that does not stop the alert from appearing increase Eudora s memory size from the Finder First quit Eudora Then highlight the Eudora application icon select Get Info from the Finder s File menu and increase the Preferred Size for the application Eudora displays the following alert when you try to launch the program Eudora cannot continue Error opening your settings file Quit Eudora click the Quit Now button in the alert and make sure you are not already running another copy of Eudora If you are already running another copy either quit that copy and relaunch the second copy or continue using the first copy You cannot use two different copies of Eudora simultaneously Eudora displays the following error when you try to check mail ERR Maildrop lock busy This usually happens after your Macintosh has hung during a mail check and you are now attempting to reconnect to the mail server Try checking your mail again in 1 minutes If the problem persists contact your email administrator and tell them you have a POPper process that needs to be disconnected System A
158. a certain size the oldest least used image files are deleted to make room for new image files For more information on this folder see Eudora Folders on page 311 Using the Speak Option to Read Your Messages Sponsored and Paid modes only In Eudora you can have a voice read your messages aloud Basically if a message window is open the voice can read the text of that message including either the To or From field as well as the Subject field Also in the message summaries list of a mailbox you can select a range of message Summaries to be read aloud When one message is read the voice will say Next message when switching messages Important You must have PlainTalk installed and active to take advantage of Eudora s speech capabilities If your version of Mac OS System Software does not include PlainTalk built in you can retrieve an installer from lt http www apple com gt To have Eudora read your email message s do the following 1 Highlight the message summary ies in the summaries list in a mailbox or open a message 2 From the Edit menu choose Speak Eudora User Manual Saving a Message to a File Eudora will read the message s to you Note Eudora can read a message in any mailbox including the Out and Trash mailboxes However in the Out mailbox the voice will read the To and Subject fields only If you have a message from someone else not the sender embedded in the message the voice wi
159. a copy of the message remains on the server until you actively delete it You may want to check with your email administrator or ISP to see if they have any restric tions for limited mail storage and aging in your IMAP account Note Io manage IMAP mailboxes and folders go to Working with IMAP Mailboxes on page 124 Creating an IMAP Account To gain access to your IMAP account to check mail and manage your mailboxes you must first create an IMAP personality The IMAP personality also serves as the root folder for your hierarchy of mailboxes and mail folders in which you store your email on the IMAP server You can create an IMAP personality as your dominant personality or as an alternate personality To create an alternate personality see Creating an IMAP Personality on page 8 To create an IMAP personality as your dominant personality do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Checking Mail The Checking Mail settings dialog appears Checking Mail settings dialog showing IMAP options SSS Jettings Account Server Information Mail Host outgoing mfir mm com Mail Protocol D POF fm AP Location prefix e Save password Connection sending Mail ef Check for mail every minutes J Don t auto check when using battery wf Use background threading e Send on check a Composing Mail Download Options Spe
160. a mailbox is sorted by Sender and a new message comes in from Bob it will be grouped with other messages from Bob Note Click once on a column heading button to sort the messages in that mailbox by that column and also turn on automatic sorting by that column for new messages that come into the mailbox Click the button twice to sort the column but turn off automatic sorting by that column for new messages that come into the mailbox Saving a Message to a File You can save one or more messages incoming or outgoing to a separate text file on your computer To save a message to a file do the following 1 Open or select the messages s you want to save to text 2 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears letting you choose a name and location for the file Save As dialog incoming messages Si hkiacintoshHo co Macintosh bd AppDMIME ect Qi Apple Extras Cl Applications Desktop Archive sea ii Assistants Save as Cancel McGee Project C Guess Paragraphs 4 Include Headers 146 Eudora User Manual Saving a Message to a File Note If you are saving messages from your Out box the Stationery option and the Go To Stationery Folder button also appear in this dialog 3 Enter the name you want to give the text file and select the appropriate options Guess Paragraphs Removes extraneous carriage returns from each message leaving returns only at the ends of paragraphs and also
161. acintosh Information icon 45 Include outdated Return Receipt To option 277 Incoming mail server 57 incoming mail server POP 81 Incoming message window icon bar 92 BLAH BLAH BLAH icon 92 Fetch icon 92 pencil icon 92 priority popup 92 Subject field 92 Tow Truck icon 93 message body 93 Incoming option 139 Indent In button 35 Indent Out button 35 Initial capitals option 255 Insert amp Expand Recipient command 199 Insert Graphic command 42 Insert Graphic option 40 338 Index Insert Horizontal Rule button 42 Insert Horizontal Rule command 42 Insert Horizontal Rule option 40 Insert System Configuration 28 Inserting a file 45 Inserting objects in a message 42 Installing Eudora 18 Internet Dialup settings 275 Internet e mail server how to obtain 316 intersects nickname option 141 is not option 141 is option 141 ltalic option 266 ltalic text option 40 ltalics button 34 J JFIF file format 42 94 JPEG file format 42 94 K Keep copies of outgoing mail option 57 251 253 Keep Copy icon 33 57 keeping copies of outgoing messages 57 Kerberos 317 Kerberos option 82 247 248 281 keyboard shortcuts 242 Keychain 278 L Label column 115 Label column popup menu 265 Label option 262 Label submenu 265 labels assigning via filters 142 changing the color and text 264 Eudora labels 264 how to assign to a message 265 Macintosh labels 264 Last used field 144 LDAP servers list 209 Leave on server for day
162. ad For more details see Message Preview Pane on page 118 Show message previews by default on If you turn this setting on the message preview pane appears by default in all mailbox windows If this is off the message preview pane is hidden by default in all mailbox windows Whether this setting is on or off you can always show or hide the message preview pane in any open mailbox window by using the preview pane show hide button disclosure triangle at the bottom left of the message summary list in the mailbox window The show hide button affects the display of the preview pane in the current mailbox window only and no other mailbox windows The following four settings apply to any open mailbox window in which the message preview pane is visible regardless of whether the Show message previews by default setting above is on or off Mark read if clicked in or tabbed to or scrolled on When this setting is on an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane is marked read if you click in the preview pane tab to the preview pane or operate the preview pane s scroll bar Each of these actions moves the keyboard focus to the preview pane If this is off clicking in tabbing to or scrolling the preview pane will not mark the message read Mark read if next message used to move away on When this setting is on an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane Is marked read if you move
163. age or mailbox If you choose a mailbox from the menu the mailbox window opens for that mailbox If you choose a folder the Mailboxes window opens and the folder is highlighted in the window Creating Mailboxes and Folders Eudora lets you create mailboxes to put messages in and folders to put mailboxes or more folders in There are three ways to create mailboxes and folders m Using the New command from the Mailbox menu m Pressing the New Mailbox or New Folder button in the Mailboxes window from the Window menu The Mailboxes window is especially useful if you want to create multiple mailboxes quickly m Using the New command from the Transfer menu Eudora User Manual Using the Mailboxes Window Creating a Mailbox or Folder Using the Mailbox Menu To create a new mailbox or mail folder do the following 1 2 3 4 From the Mailbox menu choose New The New Mailbox dialog appears New Mailbox dialog New Mailbox Creating a mailbox in Mail Folder Please name the new mailbou O Make it a folder L To create a mailbox type in the new mailbox name and click OK The mailbox is created and added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus and to the Mailboxes window To create a mail folder type the name of the new mail folder and check the Make it a folder option Click OK to create the folder The New Mailbox dialog appears again Type the name of a mailbox to create within the new folder then click OK
164. ailbox off lf you turn this setting on closing any mailbox window except the Out mailbox also closes all the open messages from that mailbox Empty Trash on Quit on J When this setting is on the Trash mailbox is emptied when you quit Eudora If this is off the Trash is emptied only when you choose the Empty Trash command from the Special menu or one of its variants Eudora User Manual Miscellaneous Turbo redirect by default off If you turn this setting on and you select a recipient from the Turbo Redirect To submenu from the Message menu a redirected message is created with the specified recipient the message is queued and the original message is deleted Hold down the Option key to do a regular Redirect or hold down the Shift key to suppress the deletion of the original message Re sort mailboxes less often off If you turn this setting on mailboxes are sorted only when they are opened or when messages is added to them Use old style toc files off If you turn this setting on each mailbox stores its table of contents in a mailbox toc file instead of in its resource fork the latter being the default in 3 0 and later versions of Eudora If you have upgraded to version 3 0 or later this is auto matically on You should turn this off at some point so that your mailboxes convert to using resource forks Include outdated Return Receipt To off Sponsored and Paid modes only If this setting is off
165. ality in the From field popup menu See Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 69 Subject Brief text indicating the contents of the message This field can be left blank although it is considered a point of email etiquette to include a subject with each message Cc Email addresses or nicknames of people to whom a copy of the message Is to be sent These recipients are displayed in the message header for all recipients to see Multiple addresses and nicknames must be separated by commas This field can be left blank Cc means carbon copy Bcc Email addresses or nicknames of people you want to send a copy of this message to in confidence The Bcc field does not appear in the header of received messages so the recipients in the To and Cc fields will not know that a copy of this message was sent to these addresses Multiple addresses and nicknames must be separated by commas This field can be left blank Bcc stands for blind carbon copy Sponsored and Paid modes only You can also use the Bcc field to keep a copy of this message in one of your mailboxes To do this put the insertion point in the Bcc field and select the mailbox from the Fcc menu normally the Transfer menu The name of the mailbox is inserted into the Bcc field preceded by f and the whole expression is placed in quotes After the message is sent it is moved to that mailbox Fcc stands for folder carbon copy
166. am i ae kf Send mail whenever sends are done i a ef Allow authorization statistics Note Also you can display the Personalities settings dialog by choosing Settings from the Special menu In the Personalities settings dialog just click the New button to enter a new personality Enter the appropriate information Following are the field descriptions Personality Name Enter the name of the personality being created or example Business or School lt lt Dominant gt gt indicates your dominant personality Note The name shown here may be different from the Real name associated with the personality 71 Creating a New Personality Eudora User Manual 72 Username Enter the name you use to login to this email account For example in the incoming mail account rclark worldmail myfirm com the login name is rclark The part after the at sign is the name of the incoming mail server that is the mail host name Mail Server Enter the name of the incoming mail server for this personality All incoming messages to this personality are routed through this server Check for mail every minutes Enter a number in this option to specify the time intervals between mail checks for this personality Check mail on manual check Turn this option on so each time you check mail manually for example by choosing the Check Mail command from the File menu mail is checked for this personality as well When you create a persona
167. an automatic mail check Checking for Mail Manually You can manually check for new mail at any time using any of these methods m From the File menu choose Check Mail Press Command M m Click the Check Mail button on the main toolbar If you have not successfully entered your password since opening the Eudora program you are prompted for it The Task Progress window is momentarily displayed indicating that an attempt to reach your incoming account is being made and showing the personality name for each incoming account being checked At the end of the mail check barring errors the Task Progress window is closed Eudora User Manual Using Your Password Stopping a Mail Check To stop a mail check use one of these three methods m Click the Stop button in the Task Progress window m Press the Escape key Esc m Press Command period Using Your Password Each time you open Eudora and check mail for the first time you need to enter a password for each incoming account that you have This password is required by the incoming server before it transfers your mail so that no one else can get your mail from the server However if your are using OS9 or later you can use Apple s System Keychain to store your Eudora password See www eudora com techsupport mac for more informa tion Note This does not protect your mail once it is on your Macintosh Unless a message has been sent with some type of security it is i
168. an save the searches to review at a later time See Saving a Search Results Window on page 168 Using the Search All Command The Search All command gives you a quick way to search through all mailboxes using selected text 1 In an open Eudora window select the text that you want to search for 2 From the Special menu choose Find then Search All The Search window appears Eudora performs a search for the selected text through all mailboxes The Search window is opened all of your mailboxes are selected in the Mailboxes pane the selected text is entered into the text field of the one search condition Anywhere contains lt selected text gt and the search is performed The results appear in the Results pane Note If no text is selected when you choose Search All the result is the same as with the Search command that is the Search window is opened all of your mailboxes are selected in the Mailboxes pane and Eudora waits for you to specify your search conditions Using the Search Mailbox Command The Search Mailbox command gives you a quick way to search through a single mailbox 1 With a message window or mailbox window open from the Special menu choose Find then Search Mailbox or press Option Command F 2 Set your match conditions and conduct the search as described under Basic Search Procedure on page 153 When you choose Search Mailbox the Search window is opened and the current mailbox the one containing t
169. and the attachments will accompany the message automatically For more details see Retrieving Attachments on page 100 Transferring IMAP Messages When transferring IMAP messages consider the following m You can perform transfers in the normal way that is by using the Transfer menu or using drag and drop You drag open messages by using the Tow Truck icon You drag message summaries by selecting them and dragging the selection m You can transfer messages from an IMAP mailbox to another IMAP mailbox even across IMAP accounts This action does not retrieve the messages to your computer m You can transfer messages from an IMAP mailbox to a POP mailbox This action retrieves the IMAP messages to your destination POP mailbox on your computer m You can also transfer messages from a local POP mailbox on your computer to an IMAP mailbox This moves the message from your POP mailbox on your computer to your IMAP mailbox on the server m When transferring IMAP messages or when making a POP to IMAP transfer you may first need to make a network connection to complete the transfer m The first time you transfer or delete a message from an IMAP mailbox Eudora will try to create a Trash mailbox if the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option is turned on for that IMAP account in the Personality Extras settings See Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 Retrieving Attachments Attachments for an inc
170. ane along with all mail boxes and folders contained in that folder This lets you search through the entire mail folder and only that mail folder If you choose Search Mailfolder while text is currently selected in a current message window Eudora performs a search on that text looking through the current mail folder only The Search window is opened the mail folder is selected in the Mailboxes pane along with all mailboxes and folders in that folder the selected text is entered into the text field of the one search condition Anywhere contains lt selected text gt and the search is performed The results appear in the Results pane Note If you choose Search Mailfolder while a top level mailbox is open a mailbox directly under your Eudora Folder or while a message from such a mailbox is open then the Search window opens with your Eudora Folder and all of its contents are selected in the Mailboxes pane If you choose Search Mailfolder while no message window or mailbox window is open the Search window opens with all of your mailboxes and folders selected in the Mailboxes pane Using the Enter Selection Command with Search The Enter Selection command can also be used with the Search feature You use it to change the search text in the Search window also behind the scenes To use this command 1 With the Search window closed select any word or text string in an open window in Eudora 2 From the Special menu choose
171. are New Folder coo Rernove To open a mailbox or folder within the window double click it or click it once and press Return You can move among the folders and mailboxes using the up and down arrow keys or close or open folders by clicking on the triangle to the left You can start typing the name of the mailbox or folder you want and it is highlighted when you have typed enough unique characters to identify it the item must be displayed so a mailbox that is in a closed folder cannot be selected this way Three buttons appear at the bottom of the window left to right New Mailbox New Folder and Remove If you have multiple personalities and at least one uses an IMAP incoming mail server a fourth button appears Refresh See Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for details If the icons appear only on the buttons resize the window wider and the titles will appear Like other Eudora windows the Mailboxes window can be placed anywhere on your desktop and open To move the Mailboxes window drag it by the title bar as you would with any Macintosh window Select mailboxes and folders in the following ways m Click the icon to select a single item click on the name only when you want to rename the item m Hold down the Shift key and click to select a consecutive range of items m Hold down the Command key and click to make non consecutive selections adding or subtracting individual items from a group selectio
172. argins option 266 Mark read after seconds option 263 Mark read if clicked in or tabbed to option 262 Mark read if deleted option 263 339 Mark read if next message used to move away op tion 262 May use Quoted Printable option 253 me nickname for personal identification 38 258 277 Message body in incoming mail 93 in Outgoing mail 36 Message header Bcc field 36 Cc field 36 From field 36 in incoming mail 93 In Outgoing mail 35 Subject field 36 To field 35 Message plug ins 307 Message Plug ins submenu 308 Message preview options 262 Message priority how to set 37 Message summaries 112 Attachments column 114 changing the subject of 96 copying 113 Date column 115 Label column 115 MoodWatch column 116 Priority column 114 resizing columns 117 selecting 112 Sender Recipient column 115 Server Action column 116 Size column 116 Status column 113 Subject column 117 message window height option 260 message window width option 260 Messages transferring to a mailbox in the Mailboxes win dow 124 MIME 321 ASCII 321 mapping 323 Quoted printable 321 MIME digests 257 MIME Labeling 322 Minimal headers only option 79 89 249 282 Miscellaneous Settings 276 Empty Trash on Quit 131 Mixed capitals option 255 modifiers not shown in Eudora s menus 237 shown in Eudora s menus 239 340 Index Modify a personality 73 Modify a signature 62 MoodWatch settings 274 MoodWatch 49 changing settings 274 enable 274 ico
173. aries in an open mailbox window or in the Results pane of a Search window in ascending order by the selected column You can also select Group Subjects to turn on and off the grouping of messages by subject to create conversational threads such as those seen in Internet newsreaders For more details see Sorting Messages on page 145 Note that the by Mailbox option is available only in a Search window with the Results pane active Submenu Same as the item immediately above but sort the messages in reverse order by the selected column descending rather than ascending Opens the Settings dialog so that you can modify your Eudora settings For complete descriptions of all Eudora settings see Setting Eudora Preferences on page 245 Eudora User Manual Choose this command Plug in Settings Change Password Change Password for Selected Personalities Forget Password Forget Password for Selected Personalities Empty Trash Special Menu This happens Submenu This submenu lists your installed message plug ins that have settings you can configure Selecting an item opens a settings dialog for that plug in Modify the settings as desired then click OK to save your changes or Cancel to discard them For more details see Using Eudora Plug ins in the General Reference chapter in the online user manual To see a listing of all your installed message plug ins select About Message Plug ins from the Apple men
174. ate gt Ein gt CL company p E eng A Eudora Se gadmin A search condition is a single line in the Match area and consists of selections you make from a combination of popups along with text you enter in text fields You can add additional search conditions by clicking More Each time you click More another condition is added to the bottom of your condition list When you have more than one search condition the Fewer button appears next to the More button Click Fewer to remove search conditions from your list from the bottom up 157 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual When you have more than one search condition the Match all Match any popup appears next to the More and Fewer buttons Select Match all if you want the search to capture a message only if that message satisfies all of your search conditions Select Match any if you want the search to capture a message if that message satisfies at least one of your search conditions When using Match all the more conditions you have the finer your search and you can reach a point where the search returns nothing A common error is to specify too many conditions too specific search values and Match all If such a search returns nothing try backing off on your search by using fewer conditions or less specific search values or switch to Match any By contrast a Match any search with multiple conditions can result in too many found messages to make
175. ationery Folder button 66 Guess Paragraphs 147 H Height option 260 Help menu 27 Hide Balloons command 28 Insert System Configuration 28 Show Balloons command 27 Help balloon 27 Hide Balloons command 28 Hide the recipient list with Bcc field 36 with Name field in Address Book 184 History list 197 Horizontal toolbar option 268 Hosts Settings 21 270 Mail option 22 Hot link in incoming mail 97 In Outgoing mail 45 how to assign a label to a message 265 check your spelling 46 47 generate filter reports 277 request a return receipt from yourself 277 set background color in messages and mailbox windows 259 set quoted text color 259 set text color 259 337 spell check outgoing messages as they are sent or queued 48 stop a mail check 59 turn off all mail checking for a selected person ality 279 HTML 39 HTML graphics automatic download option 260 HTML text how to view 97 Hypertext Markup Language format HTML 39 Icon bar in incoming mail 92 in outgoing mail 32 ignore option 142 Ignore words with option 254 IMAP FAQ web site address 28 IMAP Folder 312 IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix option 78 89 249 282 IMAP mailboxes and folders deleting 127 IMAP mailboxes and folders renaming 127 IMAP mailboxes renaming 127 IMAP option 82 247 248 281 IMAP or POP 23 IMAP server 57 how to obtain 316 Immediate send option 33 53 54 251 Importing from Outlook Express 24 In mailbox 87 In report user notification 143 Include M
176. ault 7 Inthe Store up to _ previous versions text box indicate the number of previous document versions you want Eudora to store The system default is one version Configuring Group Change Notifications You can specify the role you want to play in the group which determines whether or not you can send or receive updates to the shared folder When you ve determined your ESP role you can then decide how you want ESP to handle updates to the shared folder and group membership Eudora User Manual Configuring Group Change Notifications 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Inthe left column choose the Group name whose change notifications you want to set for your role 3 Click the Notifications tab The Notifications dialog appears Notifications dialog W Full Member send and receive updates Broadcasting Member Conky send updates ignore any incoming updates Receiving Member never send updates but process incoming updates d Custom Member use the settings in the Advanced tab Notifications ef Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder ef ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM rey shared folder wf Log any share group actions Wf ask before responding ta a membership update wf Log any membership updates 4 Click one of the following in the Role area Full Member user sends and receives updates This allows you to receive and sen
177. authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MDb5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only The Personality Extras settings supplement the Personalities settings in defining your alternate email accounts Note The display of some of the fields in this settings dialog depends on what you choose in the Server Configuration field POP or IMAP Below we first list the fields common to both server configurations then list the fields particular to each server configuration POP and then IMAP To display the Personality Extras settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Personality Extras icon The Personality Extras settings dialog appears Eudora User Manual Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only Personality Extras settings POP server EEE SETTINGS o Personality to Configure Koi a ersonality Busi ness gt Internet Dialup More Checking Mail Mail Protocal POP IMAP Authentication Passwords Kerberos APOP LI Skip messages over o k _ Leave on server for day s More Sending Mail Stationery None or Signature ef Standard r Domain to Add ula Statistics Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Personality to Configure POP and IMAP Personality Do
178. belong to option in the Attachments settings Note Out box messages saved to a stationery file are saved in Eudora format and are not affected by this setting To specify the application to use for saved messages do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Attachments The Attachments settings dialog appears 3 Inthe TEXT files belong to option near the bottom of the settings dialog click the button A standard file dialog appears 4 Using this dialog search through your disk to locate the desired application probably your favorite word processing program 5 Select the application and then click Open The selected application appears in the TEXT files belong to button as shown in the following figure 147 Saving a Message to a File Eudora User Manual Attachments settings dialog showing the selected application Settings Sending Attachments Encoding method C AppleDouble MIME id Applesingle W Bi nhex Uvencode data fork se ige ite DO Always include Macintosh information Receiving Attachments Attachment Folder attachments TEXT files belong to TeachText _ Trash attachments with messages e Receive MIME digests as attachments Replying ol Date Display concen a 148 Finding and Searching Note If you are operating Eudora in Light mode you will have limited functionality when using Eudora s Finding a
179. body of incoming messages and in the message preview pane m You can open an attachment from an open message window or the message preview pane double click the attachment name icon or picture or press the Command key and single click the item If you have the application that the attachment was created in that application launches and the attachment opens 93 Viewing Graphics Attachments as Pictures in the Message Eudora User Manual 94 m You can move an attachment into another folder on your desktop without leaving the message window To do so drag the attachment from the message window or the preview pane to the folder where you want to siore it m You can copy an attachment into another folder on your desktop without leaving the message window To do so press the Option key and drag the attachment from the message window or the preview pane to the folder where you want to store the copy The original attachment stays where it is Tip If you hold down the control and option keys while double clicking a received attach ment icon within the body of a message Eudora displays the attachment in the Finder Note The Attachment column popup menu in the mailbox window message summaries list provides an easy way to determine the attachments received Select the message summary and hold down the mouse button on the Attachment column of the summary The popup menu lists the file names of all attachments received with the message Select
180. bottom of the menus Each root folder menu item has its own submenu that lets you access the remaining folders and mailboxes in that account After your first mail check for an IMAP account an In box mailbox item is added to that IMAP submenu on the Mailbox and Transfer menus The In mailbox is the assigned In box for all new mail coming in to your IMAP account Each IMAP account has its own In box 125 Working with IMAP Mailboxes Eudora User Manual 126 m Each IMAP submenu under the Mailbox and Transfer menus contains a New command for creating new mailboxes in the account See Creating New IMAP Mail boxes and Folders on page 126 m IMAP submenus under the Mailbox and Transfer menus may have a command called This Mailbox Selecting this command opens the containing IMAP folder as a mailbox SO you can view the messages contained in that folder Unlike POP folders IMAP folders may contain not only mailboxes and other folders but also messages Creating New IMAP Mailboxes and Folders Creating an IMAP personality adds a root IMAP folder to your mailbox and folder structure The root folder carries the name of the personality and is available on the Mailbox and Transfer menus and in the Mailboxes window You can now create new mailboxes and folders under that root IMAP folder To create new IMAP mailboxes and folders use the same methods as you do with POP as follows m On the IMAP submenu under the Mailbox and Tra
181. broken in funny places The best solution is to turn on the Word wrap option in the Sending Mail Settings found in Settings under the Special menu When composing a message press Return only when you want to start a new paragraph Eudora will take care of breaking your paragraphs into lines Your mail server complains that you do not have a Date header in your mail Eudora will not put a Date header on your mail if you haven t set the correct time zone information on your Macintosh You can set the time zone using the Map control panel or if you have System 7 Pro or System 7 5 the Date amp Time control panel Remember to change your time zone for Daylight Savings Time so that Eudora can set the Date header correctly You have received a message that contains columnar text and when you open the message the columns do not line up properly Your screen font is probably a proportional font This is true if the Screen Font field of the Fonts amp Display Settings found in Settings under the Special menu is set to a proportional font In this case too a Fixed Width button appears on the icon bar of the open incoming message Click Fixed Width The message text is temporarily reformatted in the fixed width font specified in the Fixed Width Font field of your Fonts amp Display Settings Be sure that a fixed width font such as Courier is selected in this field The message text remains formatted in your fixed width f
182. ce code 317 Ph servers list 209 Phone number for technical support 29 Photoshop file format 42 94 PICT file format 42 94 Plain text option 40 Play a sound option 86 269 Play Sound filter action 143 Plug in Settings submenu 309 Plug ins 306 attachment 43 how to purchase third party Eudora plug in soft ware 307 how to remove 309 included with Eudora 307 message 307 resource 307 Rot13 Text 307 Space amp Tab Converter 307 UPPERIlower Text 307 Plugins Kerberos Settings 315 Synch I O 315 Toshiba 315 Plugins folder in Eudora Pro Folder for extra plug ins 315 PNG file format 42 94 POP option 82 247 248 281 POP or IMAP 23 POP server 57 81 how to obtain 316 Popup menu title bar 120 preview pane display control settings 262 Print current item 310 selection only 310 Print filter action 143 Print Font option 259 printing via filters 143 priority assigning via filters 142 Priority button 32 Priority column 114 Priority option 262 Priority popup default for replies 38 in composition window 37 in incoming mail 92 in outgoing mail 32 levels 37 Raise and Lower 37 Prompt for receipts requested by self option 38 277 PureVoice sound files 43 Q Q in the Status column 53 113 Queue button 53 54 Queue For Delivery command 53 Queued Q status 53 queued messages how to edit 55 sending on mail checks 55 taking them out of the queue 55 queueing a message to send at a certain time 54 Queueing mail to send later 53
183. chines for the service Extra Warnings The Extra Warnings settings determine if you are warned before taking certain actions you did not intend to take Most of the warnings appear with an option to stop that warning from being displayed again If you choose that option you can turn the warning back on using the Extra Warnings settings To display the Extra Warnings settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Extra Warnings icon The Extra Warnings settings dialog appears Extra Warnings settings Settings Deleting LLLI Warn me when l Tool bar ef Try to delete unread mail ef Try to delete queued mail Ef ff Try to delete any unsent messages Getting Attention Queueing amp Sending Warn me when l LI Try to queue a message with no subject L Try to queue a message with styled text ef Try to quit with messages queued to be sent Try to send a message whose size is more than K Other yy Warn me when l Mood watch ff Set a changed message back to read only bef Empty the Trash mail box a ff Try something that requires too much memory L Try to follow an ad s link while offline Extra Warnings Internet Dialup Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Deleting Warn me when I Eudora will warn you when you attempt to perform any of the checked actions Try to delete unread mail on When this setting is on you are warned
184. choose Get Info from the Finder s File menu m Look for the Eudora version number in the dialog m Next using your World Wide Web browser display the following web site lt http www qualcomm com eudora gt and check to see what the latest version of Eudora is If that version is later than the one you have see your Eudora adminis trator about obtaining the later version This may solve the problem you ve encoun tered If you do have the latest version of the Eudora software read the current README file for potential known conflicts The README may also contain suggestions on how to resolve some of these problems The following troubleshooting table provides the suggested corrective action for some of the most common error messages or symptoms 325 Troubleshooting 326 Eudora User Manual Symptom Corrective Action Eudora displays the following error when you try to send or queue mail Sorry can t queue this message all messages must have addresses in the to or bcc fields Either the message you are trying to send or the first message queued in your Out mailbox doesn t have a valid address You need to enter a valid email address in the To or Bcc field An address in just the Cc field will not work Eudora displays the following alert when you try to launch the program Memory is tight You may need to close some windows clean up your In Out and Trash mailboxes or increase Eudor
185. cial symbols like the section mark MIME provides a way around this restriction It offers two encodings quoted printable and base64 These encodings use US ASCII character codes to represent any sort of data you like including special characters or even non text data Quoted printable is used for data that is mostly text but has special characters or very long lines It s very simple Quoted printable looks just like regular text except when a special character is used The special character is replaced with an and two more char acters that represent the character code of the special character So a section mark in quoted printable looks like this A8 However there are some other things that quoted printable does For one since it uses an to mean something special equals signs must themselves be encoded as 3D Second no line in quoted printable is allowed to be more than 76 characters long If your mail has a line longer than 76 characters the quoted printable encoding will break your line in two and put an at the end of the first line to signal to the mail reader at the other end that the two lines are really supposed to be all one line Finally a few mail systems either add spaces to or remove them from the ends of lines So in quoted printable any space at the end of a line gets encoded as 20 to protect it from such mail systems Let s try an example He
186. ck Sponsored Mode free with ads Eudora displays the ad window m To use Eudora in paid mode click Paid Mode costs money no ads Eudora displays the Eudora web site for you to purchase Eudora m To use Eudora in light mode click Light Mode free fewer features Eudora changes to Eudora in light mode by shutting down certain features In the Keeping Current section m To register your copy of Eudora click Register with Us Eudora takes you to Eudora s registration web page Enter your information and an email will be sent to you confirming your registration If you are using Eudora in either Sponsored or Paid mode you need to register to be eligible for technical support If you don t register or use Eudora in Light mode you are not eligible for technical support m To enter or change your profile click Profile Eudora displays a web site where you can provide information about yourself to help in customizing ads that may be of interest to you m lo find the most current version of Eudora click Find the Latest Update to Eudora The Eudora web site displays for you to retrieve the latest version of Eudora In the Your Registration Information section click Enter your code to change your registration when you change from one Eudora mode to another The Registration dialog appears Registration dialog Thank you for your registration To complete your registration please enter the name you registered under and
187. cknames that begin with M it may be better for you to display the nickname popup menu and select the nickname you want In the example below suppose you want to Cc Mike on your message Type m and press Command comma The nickname popup menu appears Eudora User Manual Using the Recipient History List Sponsored and Paid modes only Nickname auto completion popup menu Wargaret_Smith yvourtirm com Maryc amp home com No Subject S r E 5 e Gi Z 2 L To Margaret Smi th your firm com Marye home com From Robert Montgomery lt rmontgomeryemyfirm com gt Business Sub ject Cc Hargaret Bec Mary Attachment Mike Hona m Select the nickname using the mouse pointer or arrow keys m To cancel without selecting a nickname click outside the popup or press Escape Esc or Delete To complete the nickname s address press Return or Enter To turn the nickname auto completion feature off do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll down the Settings category icons and choose Composing Mail 3 Deselect the Auto complete Nicknames box To turn the feature on just check the box 4 When finished click OK Using the Recipient History List Sponsored and Paid modes only A history list of all recipients of your messages now resides in your address book as an address book The history file consists of names and email addresses of people you have previously sent forwarded or
188. click the Fixed Width button on the icon bar of the open message window Be sure to select a fixed width monospaced font from the popup rather than a proportional font For more details see Incoming Message Window on page 91 Print Font Size Courier blank These settings specify the font and point size to be used for printed text in messages you print using the Print command from the File menu and its variants Print One Copy Print Selection Colors lTIo change the colors for each of these settings click the color area and select the new color using the Macintosh color picker that appears If you are given the choice of multiple color pickers select the one you want Text black This specifies the color to be used for text displayed in Eudora messages mailbox windows and Search windows Quotes gray This specifies the color to be used for displaying quoted excerpted text in replies The Quotes color is an additional visual cue that helps you and your correspondents distinguish quoted text from the new text you type Background white This specifies the background color to be used in Eudora messages mailbox windows and Search windows Be sure that the color you select here provides a sufficient contrast to the new and quoted text colors so that you can read your text 259 Fonts amp Display 260 Eudora User Manual Dimensions of message windows Width 80 This specifies the width in number of
189. coming option 139 intersects nickname option 141 invoked from top to bottom 140 is not option 141 is option 141 Manual option 139 Match Type field 141 Matching Text field 141 or option 142 Outgoing option 139 simple 136 starts with 141 unless option 142 Filters command 139 Filters window 139 Find Next Misspelling command 48 Finding messages in mailboxes folders 153 Finding text in the current window 149 Fix curly quotes option 251 Fixed option 263 Fixed Width Font option 259 Flash an icon in the menu bar option 86 269 Font option 266 Font popup 34 Font text options 40 Fonts amp Display Settings 257 Formatting text Bold 40 Center 40 Color 40 Completely Plain 40 Font 40 Insert graphic 40 Insert Horizontal Rule 40 ltalic 40 Left 40 Link to URL 41 Plain 40 Right 40 Size 40 Underline 40 Formatting Toolbar in outgoing mail 33 formatting toolbar automatic on off switch 260 266 Forward To filter action 143 Forward To submenu 199 Forward934 315 forwarding via filters 143 From field in Filters 141 fip eudora com 316 Full message except attachments over K option 79 89 249 282 function keys using with main toolbar 268 G Generate filter reports option 277 Get HTML Graphics button 98 260 Getting Attention Settings 268 Getting Help 27 Getting Started Settings 19 245 Mail Host setting 57 Return address if not username mailhost option 36 GIF file format 42 94 gnuucp 319 Go To St
190. con to show or hide the formatting toolbar for changing the style of your text The cursor must be in the message area in order for you to use the icons on the formatting toolbar For details see Formatting Toolbar Text Styles on page 33 Quoted Printable Encoding If this is on quoted printable encoding is used when sending messages or plain text attachments that contain either special characters or long lines of text It is recommended that you always leave this icon on Include Macintosh Information If this is on the Macintosh file type and resources are included in all but Uuencode attachments For details see Attaching a File to a Message on page 43 a Word Wrap E When the message is sent the text is automatically wrapped meaning o that carriage returns are inserted at the end of each line of text with roughly 76 characters per line Eudora User Manual Using the Composition Window Keep Copy lf this is on Eudora puts a copy of this message in your Out mailbox as soon as you send the message Eudora keeps this message copy in your Out mailbox until you either delete it or transfer it to another mailbox i Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only FR If this is on your recipient s email software returns a message to you noti fying you when your recipient has opened your outgoing message However for this feature to work your recipient s email system must support return receipts Fo
191. cret of other group members you will get a security error when you receive file changes from them So if you choose to use a shared secret word or phrase for improved security be sure that all group members set the exact same shared secret word or phrase The secret word or phrase is case sensitive Maintaining Group Members In the User dialog box in the Groups window you can maintain your group members by deleting them from the group inviting new members or by syncing the selected member s shared folder To maintain group members do the following 1 2 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears In the left column choose the group whose users you wish to maintain 299 Maintaining Group Members Eudora User Manuall 3 Choose the Users tab The Users dialog appears and a list of members of the selected group appears User dialog showing group names and users Natifications 3 Armand Gwen Steve Delete Sync Folder In this dialog you can do all of the following m Delete To delete group members select the member s name and click Delete Generally you use the Delete button to remove an invalid member You can also use it to avoid sending messages to someone Note To preserve group participation and communication use the Delete function sparingly In most situations the departing group member uses the Leave function to notify all group members of the departure from the
192. cribed below Account Server Information POP and IMAP Username This is your email user name carried over from the Getting Started settings Mail Host This is the name of your incoming mail server carried over from the Getting Started settings Mail Protocol POP Choose either the POP or IMAP setting that corresponds to the protocol used by your incoming mail server If your incoming mail server uses the Post Office Protocol POP choose POP If your incoming mail server uses the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP choose IMAP If you are not sure which item to select choose POP But you should get the actual value from your email administrator or your ISP Tip If all of your mailboxes are created and stored on your local computer your Macintosh you are probably using POP If all of your mailboxes are created and stored remotely on the incoming mail server itself rather than on your computer you are probably using IMAP Authentication Passwords Specify which POP authentication technology to use with your email account Passwords Kerberos or APOP Ask your email administrator which one to specify Save password off Turn this setting on so your password is remembered even if you quit and restart Eudora You ll never be prompted to enter it You should use this setting only if your computer is in a secure place 247 Checking Mail 248 Eudora User Manual POP only Overlap commands off Turn this se
193. cripts folder Scripts Dictionary Thu Jul Z7 2000 11 11 AM amp List Settings Wed Jan 13 1999 10 34 AM Gh Open Sender s Home Page Thu Jul 27 2000 11 09 AM Photo Phind Thu Jul Z7 Z000 11 11 AM Thesaurus Thu Jul 27 2000 11 10 AM 2 To add anew AppleScript drag and drop the new script into the Scripts folder To delete an AppleScript drag and drop the script from the Scripts folder to another folder To add a Scripts option icon to the Eudora toolbar do the following 1 Move the pointer to the spot you want the new Script option icon to go Press the Command key The Toolbar Button Creation dialog appears Toolbar Button Creation Toolbar Button Creation Please choose any menu item or press any key combination Remove Button Cancel 2 From the Scripts menu choose the option you want represented as an icon on the toolbar The icon is added to the toolbar 3 Click the icon to perform the same task as the option in the Scripts menu 236 Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Modifiers Certain functions in Eudora can be implemented by holding down one or more modifier keys while performing another action Eudora uses the Shift Option Command and Control keys as modifier keys Eudora s modifiers can be divided into two groups The first consists of all those modifiers that do not appear anywhere in Eudora s menus The second consists of all those modi fiers that result
194. ct Play Sound Sponsored and Paid modes only Plays the selected sound when messages are received Speak Sponsored and Paid modes only When a message is received that matches the filter criteria your Macintosh speaks in the selected voice the name of the message s sender Who and or the Subject Note You must have Speech Manager version 1 4 or higher installed in your system Extensions folder and enabled in order for this filter action to be available and to work Open Sponsored and Paid modes only Opens the mailbox and or message when a message is received If you set a previous action to filter messages into a mailbox then that mailbox is opened Print Sponsored and Paid modes only Prints one copy of each message Notify User Notifies you As normal and or In report when messages are received The As normal option notifies you based on the options you have selected in the Getting Attention settings in Settings from the Special menu see Getting Attention on page 268 The In report option notifies you by displaying a filter report that details what filter actions have been performed Forward To Sponsored and Paid modes only Forwards messages to the specified email address es Forwarded messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages Note Eudora will not redirect reply forward if the received message is Prece dence bu
195. cted Messages Again Replying with a Stationery File Sponsored and Paid modes only Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Working with Mailboxes Opening a Mailbox Opening Other Mailboxes Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Message Summaries Status Column Priority Column Attachments Column Label Column Sender Recipient Column Date Column size Column MoodWatch Column server Status Column Subject Column Displaying and Resizing Columns Using the Mailbox Size Display viii 98 99 99 100 100 100 101 102 102 103 103 105 105 105 106 107 107 108 108 108 109 111 111 111 112 112 113 114 114 115 115 115 116 116 116 117 117 117 Contents Contents Message Preview Pane Using the Title Bar Popup Menu Creating Mailboxes and Folders Creating a Mailbox or Folder Using the Mailbox Menu Creating a Mailbox Within a Folder Using the Mailboxes Window Creating a New Mailbox or Mail Folder Renaming a Mailbox or Mail Folder Moving a Mailbox or Mail Folder into Another Folder Moving Messages from One Mailbox to Another Deleting a Mailbox or Mail Folder Working with IMAP Mailboxes Using the Mailboxes Window with an IMAP Account Using the Mailbox and Transfer Menus with an IMAP Account Creating New IMAP Mailboxes and Folders Resynchronizing an IMAP Mailbox or Folder Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders Creating and Using IMAP Trash Mailbox
196. cted a browser for HTML Eudora asks you to choose one 97 98 Viewing HTML Graphics Eudora User Manual Note Eudora for Macintosh does not handle HTML frames If you receive an HTML frame open it in your browser Viewing HTML Graphics Before you can view an HTML graphic in a Eudora message two conditions must be met m Make sure the Automatically download HTML graphics option is turned on in the Fonts amp Display settings If not turned on each HTML graphic image displays as a broken graphic icon See Fonts amp Display on page 258 Note Turning off the Automatically download HTML graphics option does not affect HTML graphic files already displayed on your computer m Make sure you are connected to the Internet so the graphic files can be retrieved from the web to your computer If you want to view HTML graphics an open message do the following 1 Open the message 2 On the icon bar of the open message window click the Get HTML Graphics button see Icon Bar on page 92 for more details Note HTML graphic files that are retrieved to your computer either automatically via the Fonts amp Display setting or manually via the icon bar button are stored in your Cache Folder which is in the Eudora Folder contained in your System or Documents Folder This Cache Folder is managed the way cache folders are managed in web browser applica tions Files continue to be added to the folder and when the folder reaches
197. d Creating a Mailbox or Folder During Transfer To create a mailbox and transfer the current message into it at the same time do the following m From the Transfer menu choose New instead of the name of the mailbox The New Mailbox dialog appears New Mailbox dialog New Mailbox Creating a mailbox in Mail Folder Please name the new mallbou Make it a folder You can create a new mailbox or mail folder for details see Creating Mailboxes and Folders on page 120 When you are done the current message is transferred into the new mailbox Filtering Messages Note If you are using Eudora in Light mode you have limited use of the Filters feature in Eudora Many of the email management functions in Eudora can be done automatically using filters For example you can automatically reply to a request for information transfer all the messages from your children into a Personal mailbox and label all the messages from your customers as Hot A filter can be thought of as a personal secretary that takes your mail and does certain things to it that you specify One kind of filter might watch for particular mail from a mailing list and move it into a mailbox open the message and play a sound Another might look for other kinds of mail and give it a label color a high priority a new Subject line or have a voice speak the name and subject of the message You can create as many of these filters as you like a
198. d Subject Marathon From jokeaday aud Header dd To eudora comments contains JL dng Headers maccprogramnoing ma Subject Mac Ay digest Subject TidBITS Subject Your computer bogdan Any Header mactech mail Any Header gameletter Subject Makefilter Any Recipients opentpt lt Any Recipients swe modem Any Headers lasertag lt 2 Any Recipients machtasanit ignore Actions Last used 11 76797 Make Label From me Server Options 7 Fetch ef Delete 2 To add anew filter click New or to modify a filter click an existing filter to select it 3 Select the options for how you want the filter to be used as an automatic filter to be invoked on any Incoming and or Outgoing mail and as a Manual filter that can be invoked when you choose Filter Messages from the Special menu Any combination of these options works 4 Define the criteria for the filter use the header item popup lists and the text fields to specify which header items should include a particular string of text You can define two related terms for the criteria so that your filter is as specific as possible For detains see Filter Criteria The Match Area Filters Window on page 140 5 Define the action s to be taken on messages that fit the criteria For details see Filter Actions on page 142 139 Filtering Messages 140 Eudora User Manual 6 To save the filter from the File menu choose Save or
199. d including all headers and the entire message body m Eudora retrieves all inline components including graphic files displayed in the message inserted hypertext links inserted horizontal rules and for example any internal HTML components from a transmitted web page These components or parts when retrieved are stored in your Parts folder in the Eudora Folder m Any attachments within the specified size limit are retrieved and stored in your Attach ment Folder or whatever folder you have designated to receive attachments m Any attachments above the specified size limit are not retrieved but are left on the server You can manually retrieve these attachments later Any attachments that have been retrieved to your computer appear as normal in the message window or the preview pane They appear as an icon and name pair oras a picture in the message if a graphics file and the proper settings are turned on Any attachments that have not been retrieved to your computer appear as an icon and name pair with a small down arrow l called the Fetch arrow displayed next to the icon To retrieve an attachment that has a Fetch arrow click the Fetch arrow The attachment is retrieved to your computer and stored in your Attachment Folder or whatever folder you have designated to receive attachments When the retrieval is complete the Fetch arrow disappears and the attachment appears either as an icon and name pair or as a pictu
200. d right arrow 113 Q Queued 53 113 Redirected diagonal arrow 113 Replied left arrow 113 Sent checkmark 114 Timed Queue clock icon 54 113 Status column 113 Status option 262 Sticky sort 145 stopping a mail check 59 Styled Text Settings 278 Subject changing via filters 143 Subject column 117 Subject field 36 changing in message summaries 96 in Filters 141 in incoming mail 92 in Outgoing mail 36 Suggest words that option 255 System requirements 18 T Tab Contents and Auto Activation 173 Tab key switching fields with 35 Tab to switch fields option tab to insert tab option 267 Tabbed Windows 172 closing 175 default 173 new 174 opening activating 174 reorganizing 173 Tabs and the Save As command 147 tabs 147 taking a message out of the queue 55 Targa Image File 42 94 Task Progress popup menu 178 Task Progress window 53 177 background display setting 270 TCP IP option and UUCP 320 Technical support phone number 29 Text color option 259 TEXT files belong to option 147 256 threading 89 178 248 251 TIFF file format 42 94 Time field in Change Queueing dialog 54 Index Timed Queue status clock icon 54 time queued messages 54 Title bar for outgoing mail 31 Title bar popup menu 120 To button in Directory Services 206 To field in Filters 141 Toolbar formatting 33 main 305 adding a button 305 changing a button 306 displaying 306 dragging files to create buttons 306 mapping to function k
201. d files for the group either automatically or manually Broadcasting Member user only sends updates ignores any incoming updates This allows you to send files only to the group either automatically or manually Incoming files are ignored Receiving Member user never sends updates but processes incoming updates This allows you to receive files only from the group either automatically or manu ally Any changes you make to the shared folder are ignored Custom Member use the settings in the Advanced tab Go to step 6 The Full Member role is the default 297 Configuring Group Change Notifications Eudora User Manuall 298 In the Notifications area do the following m f you want ESP to notify you when updates are coming into your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder box This box is checked by default m f you want ESP to notify you when updates are going out of your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates OUTGOING FROM my shared folder box This box is checked by default m If you want Eudora to record all changes to group membership check the Log any membership updates box The box is checked by default m f you want ESP to notify you before the shared folder is updated check the Ask before processing any updates from my shared folder box The box is checked by default m f you want ESP to monitor any of the group actions check the Log a
202. d period of time it would be better to set up an auto reply on the server Ask your email administrator or ISP for more information Sorting Messages When you check your mail and new messages come in to your In box or are filtered out of the In box and into other mailboxes the new messages are placed in their mailboxes in the order in which they arrive By default these new messages are added to the bottom of the message summary list in the mailbox window Note that this is not necessarily strict date order since occasionally messages may arrive out of date order Similarly when you transfer messages to another mailbox then by default those messages are added to the bottom of the message summary list in that mailbox You can sort the messages in any open mailbox to organize them in order according to one of the column attributes such as Date To sort the messages in an open mailbox window do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Sort The Sort submenu appears 2 Choose the name of the column you want the messages sorted by Special menu and Sort submenu Filter Messages d Make Address Book Entry 3K Make Filter Find Sort by Status Settings ats El eG Plug in Settings d a by Label change Password by Sender Forget Password by Date Empty Trash by Size by Mailbox by Mood by Subject Group Subjects You can perform complex sorting by holding down the Shift key and sor
203. ddress to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you If you use an invalid return address no one will be able to reply to mail sent from this personality Send mail whenever sends are done Turn this option on so queued mail for this personality is sent whenever Eudora sends queued mail Allow Authentication lf this setting is checked Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MD5 is not avail able LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used In the Settings category list click Personality Extras and enter additional information if you wish for that personality See Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 for field descriptions 7 When finished click OK Eudora User Manual Modifying a Personality Modifying a Personality To modify a personality do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities window appears 2 Click the personality icon to highlight the personality you wish to modify You can modify only one personality at a time 3 Click the Edit button The Personalities settings dialog for that personality appears 4 Make any changes you want then either click OK or click the Personality Extras cate gory in the Settings
204. dds the selected word which has been marked as a misspelling to your User Dictionary Remove from Removes the selected word which is not marked as a Dictionary misspelling from your User Dictionary This action adds the word to your User Anti Dictionary Suggested If you have displayed the Spelling submenu following a Corrections spelling check and while a word marked as a misspelling is selected Eudora lists on this submenu under the other commands its suggestions for the correct spelling of the misspelled word If Eudora has no suggestions in its dictionary however no suggestions are listed on this submenu Eudora User Manual Mailbox Menu Mailbox Menu This menu lets you open a mailbox or bring an open mailbox to the front and also create new mailboxes Mailbox menu Mailbox AE Wee offer Books CDs Games Movies Family Friends School Work Choose this command This happens Opens the mailbox where incoming messages are stored until they are deleted or transferred to another mailbox Opens the mailbox where messages you compose are stored where queued messages are held until actually sent and where copies of sent messages may initially be stored Opens the mailbox where deleted messages are stored Displays the New Mailbox dialog to create a new mailbox Note The New command also appears on all folder submenus POP and IMAP in which case the mailbox is created within that folder see b
205. ded to the account and existing ones are changed or removed To refresh the list of mailboxes and folders for one or more of your IMAP accounts so that the Mailboxes window and the Mailbox and Transfer menus displays the latest update of what is actually on each IMAP server To refresh the mailbox or folder list for one IMAP account do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Mailboxes The Mailboxes window opens 2 Click the icon of the root IMAP folder whose list of items you want to refresh 3 At the bottom of the Mailboxes window click the Refresh button to refresh the list of mailboxes and folders for the selected IMAP account Note The Refresh button appears only if you have IMAP mailboxes set up To refresh the mailbox and folder lists for a of your IMAP accounts at once do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Mailboxes The Mailboxes window options 2 Without making any selections press the Option key and click the Refresh button Eudora User Manual Working with IMAP Mailboxes When you refresh the list for an IMAP account the list of mailboxes and folders is updated according to what actually appears on that account s IMAP server at that time The Mailbox and Transfer menus are also updated to show the current IMAP mailbox and folder hierarchy Creating and Using IMAP Trash Mailboxes Eudora gives you the option to create a Trash mailbox on the remote IMAP server corre sponding to your IMAP account
206. der as described above For more details see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 Message Menu Eudora User Manual This menu lets you create send and delete messages as well as add attachments and also change certain properties of a message Message menu Message Wew Message Reply Forward Redirect Send Again New Wessaqe To Forward To Redirect To Reply With New Wessaqe With Attach Document H Attach b Send Immediately E Change d Eudora User Manual Message Menu Choose this command This happens New Message Opens a new message composition window so that you can create a new message and send it Reply Replies to the sender of the currently open or selected message If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings then you must hold down the Option key to display this command Reply To All Replies to the sender and all of the original recipients of the Option currently open or selected message If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings you do not need to hold down the Option key Reply Quoting Replies to the sender only and instead of quoting the entire Selection Shift message quote only the text you ve selected from the original message If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings then you must hold down both the Shift and Option keys to display this command Reply Quoting
207. dministrators You might also want to try the QUALCOMM popper It has a timeout that will reset the mailbox if the connection closes abnormally You can ftp it anonymously from ftp eudora com in the quest unix servers popper directory Eudora User Manual Troubleshooting Symptom Corrective Action Eudora displays the following error when you try to check mail There has been an error transferring your mail said PASS and then the POP server said ERR Password supplied for lt username gt is incorrect First verify the correct spelling of your entries in the Username and Mail Host fields of the Getting Started Settings found in Settings under the Special menu Make sure that each entry is complete and uses proper lettercase throughout Remember that these entries are the respective components of your POP account name that appear before and after the at sign your POP account name is of the form username mailhost Second verify that you re entering your password correctly the Caps Lock key must be off If the problem persists see your email administrator Eudora displays the following alert Mailbox lt mailboxname gt has a damaged table of contents Shall build a new one When the dialog appears after the alert message appears click Create New Table of Contents Correspondents are complaining that lines in the messages you send are not wrapping correctly lines are
208. documentation about the Internet itself Server An entity that provides a network service A server can be hardware such as a file server software Such as a mail server or services Such as a transportation service A mail server is a program that accepts relays and delivers mail SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol The protocol widely implemented on the Internet for exchanging e mail messages Static mail route A mail route that an administrator explicitly specifies on a particular domain Static routes bypass domain name systems DNS TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP is a set of protocols for computer network communication The protocols provide conventions for connecting networks and routing traffic between them It supports local area networks as well as interconnections between local area networks TCP IP protocols are described in IETF RFCs as well as numerous reference works Username A character string by which users are known e g Idempster UUCP UNIX to UNIX Copy Protocol is a UNIX e mail protocol World Wide Web Also known as the Web the World Wide Web is a graphical interface to Internet resources Web refers to the set of hypermedia pages accessible via the Internet 331 Glossary 332 Index Index Click page number to display topic Symbols in the Status column 114 222 115 e in the Status column 37 55 113 uAccess 319 A About Message Plug ins
209. dora Open Eudora Getting Started Settings Auto Configure Settings Automatic Configuration Hosts Settings Specifying POP or IMAP for the Incoming Mail Server Protocol Importing from Outlook Express Using Eudora in One of Three Modes Choosing an Operating Mode and Registering Eudora Quitting Eudora Getting Help Technical Support Creating Messages Creating an Outgoing Message Using the Composition Window Title Bar Icon Bar Formatting Toolbar Text Styles Message Header Message Body saving a Message for Later Changes Setting the Message Priority Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only Text Editing Menu Commands Other Formatting Options Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only Attaching a File to a Message sending Attachments to Non Eudora Users Inserting the Contents of a Text File into a Message 17 17 17 18 18 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 25 2 2 28 31 31 31 31 32 33 35 36 36 37 38 39 39 41 42 43 45 45 Contents Including a URL in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only 45 Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only 46 Checking Your Spelling Automatically 46 Checking Your Spelling Manually 47 Check Spelling on Send or Queue 48 Adding Custom User Dictionaries 49 Using MoodWatch 49 Using MoodWatch for Outgoing Messages 50 Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages 51 Sending Messages and
210. dow containing one function Examples of normal windows are message windows mailbox windows and any of the windows accessible from the Window menu when they are in the single state ungrouped without tabs Tabbed Windows A tabbed window is a collection of windows containing several functions The combined windows form a single window in which each member window has its own tab for acti vating and dragging But only tool windows that is only those that are accessible from the Window menu can be combined into a tabbed window in this way or can stand alone with a single tab Other kinds of windows such as message windows and mailbox windows cannot be combined into tabbed windows The tool windows each of which can be tabbed are as follows in order down the Window menu m Address Book m Directory Services m Filters m Mailboxes m Personalities m Signatures m Stationery m Task Progress Anatomy of a Tabbed Window Eudora User Manual 172 Anatomy of a Tabbed Window A tabbed window is a collection of tool windows combined into one window Each tool window in the tabbed window has its own window tab Below is an example of a tabbed window with the Signatures window active Sample tabbed window tabs at top Signatures ait Standard ah Alternate ik Business ik co workers jh Family ik Friends ik Fun Remove E Edit A window tab has two purposes m Lets you bring the window to the front of the grou
211. e it might be a good idea to have three maps for dealing with Post Script files as follows Content Type application Content SubType postscript Filename suffix Creator Code mipr Type TEXT This map will catch most MIME PostScript files and set their creator to MacLPR Content Type Content Sub Type Filename suffix eps Creator Code dPro Eudora User Manual Troubleshooting Type EPSF This map will match any incoming file with a suffix of eps regardless of the MIME type info and set its type to EPSF and creator to dPro MacDraw Pro But what if a file comes in with a suffix of eps and a MIME type subtype of application postscript Which map gets used The first one gets used when Eudora has a choice between matching a suffix and matching MIME type information MIME wins A third map may be in order Content Type application Content SubType postscript Filename suffix eps Creator Code dPro Type EPSF This makes application postscript files with suffixes of eps get tyoe EPSF and creator dPro Troubleshooting Occasionally you may encounter a problem or bug when using Eudora as indicated by an error message or some other type of symptom m Make sure you have the current maintenance release of Eudora m Locate the Eudora application in your Eudora Application Folder m Click the application to highlight it and
212. e Styled Text settings is set to HTML Sponsored and Paid modes only Inserts a picture graphic file in message text at the current cursor position This command is only available if the Send styled mail with option in the Styled Text settings is set to HTML 217 Edit Menu 218 Eudora User Manual Choose this command This happens Link to URL Sponsored and Paid modes only Converts the selected text to a hyperlink to a URL You specify the URL when prompted This command is only available if the Send styled mail with option in the Styled Text settings is set to HTML and text in the message is selected Spelling Submenu Sponsored and Paid modes only The Spelling submenu under the Edit menu lets you use Eudora s built in spelling checker to check your spelling in composition messages text files signature files and stationery message files For more details see Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 46 Spelling submenu Check Spelling 0 Find Next Misspelling 6 Add to Dictionary lt 6 Remove from Dictionary Choose this comand This happens Check Spelling Checks the spelling in the current message or the text signature or stationery file Misspellings are highlighted in the window Find Next Finds the next misspelling in the spell checked message or Misspelling file This command is only available following a spelling check Add to Dictionary A
213. e a nickname on the Recipient List do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Address Book or press Command L Or if the Address Book is in a group of tabbed windows click its tab 2 Choose the appropriate Address Book entry from the list and check the Recipient List box next to the Nickname field 199 Including Nicknames on the Recipient List Eudora User Manual 200 The nickname for the selected entry is added to the Recipient List If you change a nick name or remove an entry the Recipient List is updated as appropriate For more details on this list see Using the Recipient List on page 198 To add multiple nicknames to the Recipient List do the following m Choose the desired entries using multiple selection methods and check the Recipient List box To remove one or more nicknames from the Recipient List do the following m Choose the appropriate Address Book entry or entries from the list and uncheck the Recipient List box Note that checking and unchecking the Recipient List box performs the add remove operation to the Recipient List automatically without requiring you to save the change in the Address Book However if you make other changes to your Address Book during the same session you will need to save them Nicknames on the Recipient List are available from m The nsert Recipient submenu under the Edit menu m Ihe New Message To Forward To and Redirect To submenus under the Message
214. e checked for those personalities without re entry of the appropriate password This protects you from unauthorized checking and reading of your mail by others who might have access to your computer This command appears only on the Special menu if the Personalities window is open and one or more personality items are selected in the list Deletes all messages from the Trash mailbox These messages are permanently removed from your Macintosh Note If you have one or more IMAP accounts and at least one of them has a Trash mailbox on its associated IMAP server Empty Trash empties your local POP Trash mailbox if you have one along with any remote IMAP Trash mailbox for any IMAP server you ve connected to recently For more details see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 Opens the ESP window where you can create and maintain ESP share groups 229 Special Menu 230 Choose this command Remove Deleted Messages Option Empty All Trash Mailboxes Option Empty Local Trash Mailbox Shift Plug in Names This happens For all messages marked as deleted in the currently open IMAP mailbox removes those messages from the IMAP server and from your computer This command appears only if the currently open mailbox resides on an IMAP server and if the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option is turned off in the Personality Extras settings for the associated IMAP personality See Managing Your Mail
215. e following 1 From the Help menu choose Show Balloons 2 Move the mouse pointer to a Eudora menu selection or item on the screen to display a brief description of that item 2 Technical Support Eudora User Manual Balloon Help No Recipients 12 59 PM No Subject Lee this menu to change the signature that will From be attached to your mail Your standard signature text will be Subject ci sent Bcc e Attachments You can use Balloon Help even when a dialog appears To turn Balloon Help off do the following m From the Help menu choose Hide Balloons Note If you have an extended keyboard with a Help key you can press the key to turn Balloon Help on and off When sending a message to the Eudora Technical Support group to report a problem if you are eligible for technical support or when you send us an email message to report a bug do the following 1 After composing your message place the cursor at the bottom of your message composition window 2 From the Help menu choose Insert System Configuration Your computer s configuration is inserted at the bottom of the message This helps Eudora engineers analyze the problem You can get specialized help from the Eudora website Just access the following web addresses m Tutorial pages www eudora com techsupport tutorials m Get immediate help www eudora com techsupport mac m X Eudora Settings www eudora com techsupport mac xsettings html
216. e location of both your incoming POP or IMAP and outgoing SMTP servers 2 Inthe Directory Services field enter the name of a host computer that will be providing you either the Ph or the LDAP service In the example an LDAP server name has been entered Many organizations have their own Ph and LDAP servers and there are a number of public Ph and LDAP servers out on the Internet that you can use to look people up You can enter either a Ph server name or an LDAP server name in this field and you can change the server name at any time while using Eudora 3 Optional In the Finger field you can enter the name of a host computer that will provide your Finger service However if you leave this field blank Eudora will use the server you ve entered in the SMTP field as the server that will provide your Finger service And if you ve left the SMTP field blank as well Eudora will use the server named in the Mail field 4 When you have finished entering your server names in the text fields click OK to save the changes and close the dialog 202 Eudora User Manual Looking Someone Up Note Ask your email administrator or your ISP to provide you the server names for the Directory Services and Finger fields You can also use the Globe icon in the Directory Services window to find other lookup servers as discussed later in this section See Hosts on page 270 for more information If you are upgrading from an earlier version of Eudora
217. e name of the search results window and click OK The search results window is saved in the Search folder To retrieve the saved search results window do the following m From the Special menu choose Find and the name of the search results window is listed at the bottom of the Find submenu Select it and the saved search window will display Note You can also sort messages in the Search window when the Results pane is active This sorts the messages resulting from a search Use the Sort submenu from the Special menu or click the column headings The Sort by Mail option is available only in the Search window Results pane Just click the Mailbox column heading in that pane and Eudora sorts the messages resulting from a search The Sort by Mailbox option is not available in mailbox windows Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only When searching for messages in Eudora an option you can use is regular expressions Following is a description of regular expressions and how they are used in Eudora You can find regular expressions in the Find Messages window located in the comparison pop up The option matches regexp appears In the Find Messages window regexp Is not case sensitive Following are symbols that are supported in Eudora Symbol Character representation period represents any one character brackets contain a set of characters from which a match can be made It corresponds to one character in the sea
218. e preview pane m Press the spacebar to page down through the message Eudora User Manual Message Preview Pane m Use the arrow keys as set in the Moving Around settings unmodified or modified with Command Option etc to switch to the next or previous message in the mailbox m Use standard commands that you would normally use in an open incoming message window whether via the menus the main toolbar or keyboard shortcuts and modifiers These include Reply Forward Redirect Delete Transfer Save As Print and more m Double click an attachment name icon or picture to open the attachment m Double click a URL hot link to launch the application for that URL Every mailbox window has a triangle button at the bottom left of the mailbox summary list just to the left of the mailbox size display Click this button to show or hide the preview pane within the current mailbox only this does not control whether the preview pane is shown or hidden in other mailboxes Preview pane show hide button middle left a Alan Bird ese AM Sv wl Pete Resnick Ta S2 AM 6 R Gwen Huntley 9 26 AM 6 z Anita Hix 10 46 AM 5 6 11K 0K At last night s Network Computing Well cor Eudora Pro Email 4 8 was awarded the Best Computing category This was the second yi products have been nominated but the First lf the preview pane is set to display in every mailbox window Show message previews by default is turned on you can use the triangle b
219. e reassigned to the personality For additional details on the remaining fields below see Getting Started on page 245 Hosts on page 270 Checking Mail on page 246 and Sending Mail on page 250 Checking Mail Username blank Enter the email name for this personality s account on the associated incoming mail server Mail Host below Mail Server blank Enter the name of the host computer that runs the incoming POP or IMAP mail server that receives this personality s incoming mail Check for mail every minutes off blank If you turn this setting on and you enter a number in the box mail is automatically checked for this personality at the specified interval If this is off no automatic mail checking takes place for this personality even if a number is in the box It is recommended that you enter a minimum interval of 15 minutes You can have different mail checking intervals for different personalities However if auto matic mail checking is set for your Dominant personality then the Check Mail command reflects the time of the next check for the Dominant personality Check mail on manual checks on If you turn this setting on and each time you do a manual check for mail by selecting Check Mail fro the File menu mail is checked for this personality If this is off manual mail checks do not check mail for this personality You can also perform manual mail checks for one or more selected perso
220. e request when you receive the incoming message If this is off you are not asked to respond to the request This setting does not affect whether your other recipients get the request They will always get the request in a return receipt message provided they have a compatible mailer Note To determine who you are for the above setting Eudora uses the me nickname if previously set up in your Address Book If you do not have a me nickname set up Eudora uses the contents of the Username Mail Host and Return address fields from your Getting Started settings Use Navigation Services if they are available on When this setting is on Eudora will use the newer Navigation Services dialogs for opening and saving files rather than the older style dialogs To use this setting you must have Navigation Services version 1 1 or later installed on your computer 2 1 Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only 2 8 Eudora User Manual Exchange Find and Search menu command keys off Turn this setting on if you want to switch the Find menu command key Command F to the Search menu command key Option Command F Use system keychain to store passwords Iurn this setting on if you want to use Apple s keychain feature to store your Eudora passwords Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only The Personalities settings along with the Personality Extras settings are used to define the necessary information for your multiple
221. e spellings for misspelled words that is suggest words that look like the word you typed that sound like the word you typed or that look or sound like the word or never make suggestions m Check outgoing messages for spelling as they are sent or queued and alert you if the message contains misspellings so that you can correct them before you send or queue the message Note Changes to the spelling settings can be made in the Spell Checking settings dialog See Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 253 Checking Your Spelling Automatically Eudora s automatic spell checking feature highlights spelling errors as you type You can correct the word now or later or after you finish writing your message Before you can use the automatic speller you need to make sure the Check spelling Automatically as you type is turned on in the Spell Checking settings dialog To turn the automatic speller on do the following Eudora User Manual Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and select Spell Checking The Spell Checking dialog appears Spell Checking dialog Settings Check spelling W Automatically as you type Getting Started Only when requested FF peel when sending queueing message with misspellings ait Ignore words with _ Initial capitals Nostromo _ Mixed capitals noSTRomo C Numbers ndstr Imo _ All capitals NOSTROMO
222. e user manual This menu provides basic file and mail functions File menu New Text Document Open Open Selection Open in Browser Close Save Save As Import Mail Send Queued Messages Check Mail Page Setup Print Print One Copy Quit Choose this command New Text Document This happens Creates a new plain text document The format in which the document will be saved is determined by the text editing application selected in the TEXT files belong to option of the Attachments settings Eudora User Manual Eudora User Manual File Menu Choose this command This happens Open Opens a plain text file mailbox file or Eudora Settings file Open Selection Opens the selected highlighted item a message summary a converted attachment a URL or from the Mailboxes window a mailbox Open in Browser Opens the selected highlighted message summary or the currently open message in your World Wide Web browser Used for enhanced display of messages containing HTML formatted text e g Web pages a correspondent has sent you via email Save As Saves the currently open message or selected message summaries to a plain text file Or saves the currently open or selected outgoing message s to a stationery file Or saves the currently open plain text file with a new name Import Ma
223. ead it will just send the data fork with the MIME information attached to it 323 Practical Issues 324 Eudora User Manual Example Map in an EuOM Resource EuOM ID 128 from Eudora 7 0 Content Type japplication Content postscript SubType Filename suttix Creator Code Type EP SF Hewline io 0 i conversion Nay suppress 30 oi 1 PeESOUPCE The map above says that all files of type EPSF no matter what the creator should be sent as application postscript that eps should be added to the filename that carriage returns should not be turned into carriage return linefeed pairs and that when the Always include Macintosh information switch is off the resource fork won t be sent Receiving EulM resources are used for receiving files They re pretty much the same as EUOM resources except that the MIME type and subtype are used for matching and the Macin tosh creator code and type are applied to the file received As with EUOM resources you can leave parts blank If you want to match all files with an eps suffix regardless of the MIME type or subtype leave the type and subtype blank If you don t care what the filename suffix is leave that blank and match with the MIME type and or subtype only Again as with EUOM resources Eudora will choose the map that matches best With EulM resources it s sometimes a good idea to use several maps to catch all impor tant cases For exampl
224. ead if deleted z Mark read after seconds Date Display Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below 261 Mailbox Display 262 Eudora User Manual Columns Status Priority Attachments Label Who Date Size Server Mood Turning on any of these settings all are on by default causes the corresponding column to be displayed in mailbox windows The Subject column is always displayed in mailbox windows You can however resize the Subject column in a mailbox window so that the column is hidden Drawing Draw horizontal separator lines on lIf you turn this setting on horizontal separator lines appear in mailbox windows separating message summaries Draw vertical separator lines off If you turn this setting on vertical separator lines appear in mailbox windows separating columns Use Finder list color scheme on lIf you turn this setting on the background color of the Mailbox window will be the same as the Finder s color Show count of selected messages off lf you turn this setting on the number of messages you select appears to the left of the number of messages in a mailbox located on the left side of the bar between the mailbox and the preview pane Message Preview These settings control whether the message preview pane is shown or hidden by default in all mailbox windows as well as the conditions under which unread messages being previewed are automatically marked re
225. ecking Mail The Checking Mail settings dialog appears 81 Managing Your Mail on the POP Server Eudora User Manual Checking Mail settings dialog showing POP options SSS Jettings Account Server Information Username Mail Protocol fm POP D IMAP Authentication j Passwords Kerberos E APOF e Overlap commands e Save password Connection Sending Mail fy Check for mail every minutes T Don t auto check when using battery e Use background threading e Send on check Composing Mail Mail Management _ Leave on server for days _ Delete from server when emptied from trash w k Spell Checking Attachments _ Skip messages over 3 Inthe Server Configuration field choose POP Fill in the rest of the fields of this dialog as required Following are the descriptions of the POP options Authentication Specify which POP authentication technology to use with your email account Passwords Kerberos or APOP Ask your email administrator which one to specify Overlap commands Turn this on to have Eudora send commands to your POP server immediately instead of waiting for a previous command to be completed Using this option is faster but not all servers will comply Leave on server for days Turn this option on and enter the number of days you want Eudora to leave messages on the POP server When this option is on Eudora copies incoming messages to your computer w
226. ed 29 Technical Support 30 Eudora User Manual Creating Messages Creating an Outgoing Message An outgoing message is a message you send to someone else The simplest way to create an outgoing message is to do the following m From the Message menu choose New Message or press Command4 N Or on the Eudora toolbar click E The composition window appears Using the Composition Window The composition window consists of the title bar the icon bar the formatting toolbar for text styles the message header and the message body Composition window including header fields OD SS No Recipients 10 09 AM 0700 No Subjects H amp eA 7 es Font Size Colors B ZU To From Daron Clifford lt O0Clifforditmy firm com gt Business 4 Subject Ce Bcc X ttachments message header message body Title Bar The title bar provides information about the message including the name of the addressee the time and date the message was sent and the message subject m To open the mailbox in which the message resides double click the title bar m To open a menu containing the mailbox and or folder s in which the message resides hold down the Command key and click the title in the title bar Select the mailbox from that menu to open it Select a folder to open the Mailboxes window with that folder highlighted 31 Using the Composition Window Eudora User Manuall 32 Icon
227. ed the message neither is copied nor leaves the In mailbox To specify what you want to do with each message the next time you check mail either set the server action popup in the message summary or use the Fetch and Trash icons in the open message window icon bar Important If you delete the message header and you have the Delete from server when emptied from trash option turned on in the Checking Mail settings the message is gone completely from Eudora and the server the next time trash is emptied Transfer mail for the following personalities If you have multiple personalities you can check or send mail based on the following m Options on the right side of this Mail Transfer Options dialog m Options in the Checking Mail settings for your dominant personality only m Options in the Personalities and the Personality Extras settings for any of your person alities You can also specify the personalities whose mail you want to check or send with this mail transfer Press the Shift key to select multiple personalities in sequence or the Command key to select them out of sequence Checking for Mail from Your POP Account When Eudora does a mail check automatic or manual you can be notified of new mail in any combination of the following ways m An alert dialog m A flashing mail icon in the menu bar m The opening of the mailboxes into which new mail is delivered m A special New Mail sound These options are turned on o
228. editing tools This happens Edit menu Undo Typing EZ Cut A Copy C Paste ae Paste As Quotation EY Clear Text Select All Wrap Selection Finish Address Book Entry amp Insert Recipient Message Plug ins Speak Spelling Add Word Service Choose this command Undo Redo Undo Reverses the last action taken Redo Re perform the action that has been undone Deletes the selected text and place it on the Clipboard Copies the selected text and place it on the Clipboard Copy amp Unwrap Copies the selected text to the Clipboard but remove the Option carriage returns at the end of each line Copy Without Copies the selected text to the Clipboard but remove all Styles Shift style information Copy Without Copies the selected text to the Clipboard but remove all Styles amp Unwrap style information and remove the carriage returns at the end Shift Option of each line Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the current cursor position insertion point This happens Eudora User Manual Eudora User Manual Choose this command Paste Without Styles Shift Paste As Quotation Clear Text Option Select All Wrap Selection Unwrap Selection Option Finish Address Book Entry Finish amp Expand Address Book Entry Option Insert Recipient Insert amp Expand Recipient Option This happens Inserts the contents of
229. either sending the message with spelling errors or with corrections To send the message with spelling errors do the following Eudora User Manual Using MoodWatch m Inthe alert click Send Anyway To correct the spelling errors do the following 1 Click Cancel 2 Fix the errors 3 Send the message again The alert displays until all spelling errors are corrected To customize Eudora s built in spelling checker see Spell Checking Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 253 Adding Custom User Dictionaries To add a custom user dictionary for use with Eudora s built in spelling checker simply drop it into one of your Spelling Dictionaries folders When you install Eudora Eudora creates a Spelling Dictionaries folder in your Eudora Stuff folder under your Eudora Application Folder Your custom user dictionaries are normally kept in this folder when you create them However you can also create a Spelling Dictionaries folder in your Eudora Folder under your System pre OS9 or Documents Folder If you create such a folder then Eudora will put your newly created customer user dictionaries there You can also add new dictionaries to that folder Note If you do create a Spelling Dictionaries folder in your System or Documents folder be sure to move your User Dictionary into that folder Always keep these two dictionaries in the Spelling Dictionaries folder you are currently using A dictionary is just a list of words in
230. elect the mailbox Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Eudora User Manual 112 Once you have opened a mailbox using the Other command the mailbox remains on the Mailbox and Transfer menus until you quit Eudora However if you open the mailbox within a folder or subfolder it remains on the Mailbox and Transfer menus indefinitely even if you quit and restart Eudora Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Mailboxes contain all of your incoming and outgoing message summaries Additionally if the Show message previews by default setting is turned on in the Mailbox Display settings dialog mailboxes also show the message preview pane To open a mailbox do the following m From the Mailbox menu choose the mailbox you want to open or double click its icon or name in the Mailboxes window from the Window menu Mailbox showing message summaries Slept Validation Request a Request for techni Re sdge bills promotionie ps ne 728 00 by way of Judi Y 7 28 00 Diane Brown 728 700 rie ret Adrienne Loder 7 26 00 Cathy O0 amp Dan OD Yf2srfoo International Bi 7I 28100 dawid 7I 25r 0 Haveern Goel f f 28 S00 david Yf2sfoo dawid Yf 25 00 728 00 Wednesda Looking for good Windows Web Page Qsily Manna from Fwd Daily Manna Need Location af low rating text two chilies low high pdatel 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 i 1 a gt Message Summaries Each line in a mailbox window represents a message and
231. elow Opens a mailbox that is not stored in your Eudora Folder within your System Folder and add an alias for that mailbox to the Mailbox and Transfer menus This alias is deleted when you quit Eudora Note The Other command also appears on all folder submenus POP only not IMAP in which case the mailbox alias is stored in that folder and is not deleted when you quit Eudora it remains there until you actively delete it from the Mailboxes window Your Opens the selected mailbox that you have created Mailboxes Your Folders Selects a mailbox from any of the folders or subfolders you have created to open that mailbox Or select New or POP only Other as described above 219 Message Menu 220 Choose this command IMAP Account root folders This happens If your email account is stored on an IMAP server or if you have multiple personalities and the incoming mail server for one or more of them uses IMAP Server Configuration is set to IMAP in the Personality Extras settings your IMAP account root folders are listed here after your POP account mailboxes and folders if you have a POP account Eudora lists one IMAP root folder for each IMAP personality you have set up The folder name is the personality name of that IMAP personality Select a mailbox from any of your IMAP folders or subfolders to open that IMAP mailbox Or select New to create a new mailbox within the account folder or subfol
232. email personalities Note For more details see Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 69 To display the Personalities settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Personalities icon The Personalities settings dialog appears Personalities settings Settings Personality to Configure Personal ity Business New Personality Mame Checking Mail Miscellaneous Username John Davis Mail Server business myfi rm cam Personalities y Check mail every minutes ef Check mall on manual checks Internet Dialup ha FL Fall Sending Mail a Person CO S All 1A o m E Lip uw a on SMTP Server SMTP myfirm cam Return address Join Day is e myfirm com bef Send mail whenever sends are done ef Allow authorization Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Personality to Configure Personality Dominant The popup menu in this field lists your alternate email accounts that is your multiple personalities Your Dominant personality is your primary email account It s the one that s associated with all mail stored before you began using multiple personalities Click New to create a new personality Click Remove to delete the personality currently selected in the popup You cannot delete your Dominant personality Eudora User Manual Personalities Sponsored
233. ems that use uuencode Sending When you create a map in an EuOM resource you use the Creator Code and Type fields to specify what documents the map applies to These fields should be filled with the four byte creator code or Macintosh type of the documents you want to send If you leave the Creator Code blank but fill in the type the map is used for any document of that type regardless of creator If you fill in both Creator Code and Type a document has to match both for the map to be used Given the choice Eudora uses the map that matches both creator and type The other parts of the map are used to construct the MIME information Content Type and Content SubType are the MIME type and subtype to use for the document Filename suffix allows you to tell Eudora to add a suffix to the filename as an extra hint to the receiving system for example you might have Eudora add xls to Excel files Newline conversion tells Eudora whether or not to convert carriage returns in the file to carriage return linefeed Usually you should set this to 1 for text data but to O for binary files Finally May suppress resource fork is used in conjunction with Eudora s Always include Macintosh information option in the Attachments Settings If you set this to 1 and Always include Macintosh information is off Eudora won t send Macintosh type and creator infor mation with the file and won t send the resource fork Inst
234. en send and check mail while you work in other applications To instruct Eudora to check mail in the background turn on the Use background threading option in the Checking Mail settings To instruct Eudora to send mail in the background turn on the Use separate thread for sending option in the Sending Mail settings See Checking Mail on page 246 and Sending Mail on page 250 Using the Address Book The Address Book is where you keep information about individuals or groups that you correspond with Each entry in the Address Book includes a name for a person or group their full email address email addresses for groups a full name any contact information including both home and work information other email addresses and information and any notes You can also use the Address Book to put names on the Recipient List and to address a new message See Using the Recipient List on page 198 To open your Address Book do the following m From the Window menu choose Address Book or press Command L or click the Address Book icon on the main toolbar Address Book with example entries See Arcs BOOk Address Book 2 Filters ke Directory Services Link History view By Nickname Nickname ff Recipient List lt Eudora Nicknames 7 Family 2 Dad Full Hame Joseph Camp First Name Last Name 3 amp History List This nickname will expand to the following address es Q abird Jceamp aol com 2 arouleau
235. enu appears From the New Message With submenu choose the desired stationery A new message composition window appears containing the header and body from the statio nery file You can edit and send this new message just as you would any other message To reply to a message with a particular stationery do the following 1 2 From the Message menu choose Reply With The Reply With submenu appears From the Reply With submenu choose the desired stationery A new message compo sition window appears The stationery header text is incorporated into the reply header text The stationery body text is inserted below the quoted body text from the original message You can edit and send this new message just as you would any other message Note Another way to reply using a particular stationery is to drag the message summary from the mailbox window and drop it on an icon in the open Stationery window A new reply message is created using that stationery and is composed as described above To use a particular stationery file for all of your outgoing messages do the following 1 2 From the Special menu choose Settings Scroll the Settings category icons and choose Composing Mail The Composing Mail settings dialog appears From the Stationery popup choose the desired stationery Most new messages use this file unless you create the message with the Redirect or Send Again command or from the New Message With or
236. er The match options are as follows contains or does not contain lf the specified header item contains or does not contain the text string filter the message It allows other text to surround the text string Using contains makes it easier to make a filter match is or is not lf the specified header item is or is not a complete match of the text string filter the message starts with or ends with lf the specified header item starts with or ends with the text string filter the message The starts with item refers to the first non whitespace character after the colon so any spaces after the colon are ignored appears or does not appear lIf the header item appears or does not appear in the message filter the message the text field is ignored This is useful for filtering messages based only on the types of fields they contain intersects nickname The header field is broken into addresses that are matched against the addresses and nicknames in the specified nickname The user name and mail host name must exactly match one of the nickname addresses Type the text string that you want the filter to search for into the text fields 141 Filtering Messages 142 Eudora User Manual Note Be sure not to enter a header label in the text field as part of the text string e g To From Bcc For example to filter all messages from Bob do not enter From Bob in the text field Rather choose From in the
237. er 312 Eudora Log file 312 Eudora Nicknames file 312 336 Index Eudora Settings file 312 Extra Plugins Folder 315 IMAP Folder 312 In file 313 Mail Folder 312 Mailbox Aliases 313 Nicknames Folder 312 Old Log file 312 Out file 313 Signature Folder 313 Spool Folder 313 Stationery Folder 313 Trash file 313 README file 314 Eudora Information 316 Eudora Internet Mail Server EIMS 316 Eudora Items folder Plugins folder 312 Eudora Labels Settings 264 Eudora Log file 312 Eudora New Mail option 269 Eudora Sharing Protocol ESP 287 Eudora Stuff folder 307 308 309 Eudora WorldMail Server 316 Excerpt bars 40 Excerpts option 266 Exiting Eudora 27 Expand nicknames immediately option 195 199 252 Extra Plugins Folder 315 Extra Plugins folder 308 Extra Warnings Settings 272 Try to delete any unsent mail option 131 Try to delete queued mail option 131 Try to delete unread mail option 131 F Fcc menu 36 57 Fetch amp Delete server action 84 116 Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option 86 Fetch from Server action 84 116 Fetch icon 84 92 Fetch server action 143 Fetch Settings Now option button 285 filter actions 142 Filter Messages command 139 filter reports how to generate 277 Filtering Messages 135 Filters and option 142 appears option 141 Conjunction field 142 contains option 141 Index does not appear option 141 does not contain option 141 ends with 141 header field 140 ignore option 142 In
238. ers of an incoming message turn on the Blah Blah Blah icon on the icon bar m Text document window All text in the window m Signature file window All text in the window i e the contents of the signature file m Stationery message window All text in the headers and body of the stationery message m Mailbox window If the cursor is currently in the message summary list then all text in the Who and Subject columns of the message summaries Eudora highlights the entire message summary if the Find is successful If the message preview pane is visible and a message is currently being previewed and keyboard focus is currently in the preview pane then all text in the headers and body of the message being previewed This discussion also applies to the results in the Results pane of the Search window following a successful search m lool windows accessed from the Window menu Address Book All text in all text fields of the Address Book Nickname Name Postal Address Phone Fax Address es Notes Directory Services window All text in the results of a query query results area of the window but not the Enter query field Filters window All text in the filters list and the text entry fields of each filter Mailboxes window All text in the names of all items mailboxes and folders in the window including items in closed folders Eudora will scroll down below the current scroll
239. erver to your computer and then deleted from the incoming server There are several options that you can use to control your mail transfers and the storage on the server These options are available in the following three areas in Eudora m Checking Mail settings for your dominant personality only See Checking Mail on page 246 For information on personalities see Using Multiple Personalities Spon sored and Paid modes only on page 69 Personality Extras settings for all of your personalities See Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 Also you can display the Personali ties Extras settings dialog by pressing the Edit button that appears in the Personalities Window for a selected personality icon See Checking Mail for Your Personalities on page 75 Mail Transfer Options dialog you can display by pressing the Option key and choosing Check Mail Specially or Send Messages Specially commands from the File menu Creating a POP Account To gain access to your POP account to check mail you must first create a POP account for your dominant personality You can create a POP accounts for alternate personalities To create an alternate person ality see Creating a New Personality on page 71 To create a POP account as your dominant personality do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Ch
240. es Organizing Your Messages Deleting Messages POP Procedure IMAP Procedure To Mark a Message for Deletion To Unmark a Message for Deletion To Remove All Messages Marked for Deletion Automatically Deleting Attachments Transferring Messages Using the Transfer Menu Dragging Messages Creating a Mailbox or Folder During Transfer Filtering Messages Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Command Match Conditions Action Area Make Filter dialog buttons Detailed Filters with the Filters Window Filter Criteria The Match Area Filters Window 118 120 120 121 121 121 123 123 123 124 124 124 125 125 126 127 128 129 131 131 131 132 132 132 133 133 133 134 134 135 135 136 136 138 138 139 140 Contents Filter Actions 142 Creating an Auto Reply Sponsored and Paid modes only 144 Sorting Messages 145 Saving a Message to a File 146 Choosing an Application for Saved Messages 147 Finding and Searching 149 Finding Text in the Current Window 149 Finding a Word or Text String in the Current Window 150 Finding the Next Occurrence of Text Find Again 151 Changing the Find String to the Selected Text Enter Selection 151 Stopping a Find 152 Text Considered in a Find Operation 152 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders 153 Basic Search Procedure 153 Using the Search All Command 155 Using the Search Mailbox Command 155 Using the Search Mailfolder Command 156 Using the Enter Selectio
241. es on When this setting is on Eudora replaces all curly quotation marks in message text or text attachments with conventional straight quotation marks prior to sending the message It also replaces bullets and en em dashes These marks are special characters and this setting allows messages to be sent without using quoted printable encoding If your recipients have Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME there s no reason to use the above setting Only turn it on if most of the people you correspond with don t use MIME Automatically Fcc to original mailbox off Sponsored and Paid modes only If you turn this setting on replies are automatically copied to the same mailbox that contains the original message However this feature does not apply to your In box Fcc stands for folder carbon copy Keep copies on If you turn this setting on a copy of each message you send is kept in the Out mailbox If this setting is off a copy of each outgoing message is put in the Trash mailbox after the message is sent 251 Composing Mail Eudora User Manual Composing Mail The Composing Mail settings determine what Eudora features are available to you when composing messages To display the Composing Mail settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Composing Mail icon The Composing Mail settings dialog appears Composing Mail Settings S t
242. es from the list use stan dard selection methods and click GF Remove Note You cannot remove the Eudora Nicknames file Addressing a Message from the Address Book You can open and address a new message from the Address Book using the To Cc and Bcc buttons To create a new message from the Address Book do the following 1 2 In the Address Book eniry list choose the entry you want to address the message to You can select multiple entries by holding down the Shift key to choose multiple entries in sequence or the Command key to make non sequential selections Click To Cc or Bcc at the bottom of the Address Book A new composition window appears with the selected nickname s inserted in the recip ient field Note A quick way to open a message in the Address Book is to double click an entry A new message opens and the selected nickname is inserted in the To field Once the composition window appears you can use any of the following methods to insert additional nicknames into the recipient fields To Cc and Bcc Choose one or more entries in the Address Book entry list and click To Cc or Bec Choose one or more entries in the entry list and drag the selected entries to one of the recipient fields Choose one or more entries and double click anywhere on the selection to add the nickname s to the To field Note Hold down the Shift key while clicking To Cc or Bcc to keep the Address Boo
243. essage plug in you can obtain the Software Devel oper s Kit SDK for the EMSAPI by anonymous ftp at ftp eudora com Plug in Software That Comes with Eudora When you install Eudora the following message plug ins are automatically installed in the Eudora Stuff folder contained in your Eudora Folder the folder containing your Eudora application These message plug ins operate on text in open outgoing and incoming messages m Rot13 Text Scrambles message text by rotating the letters 13 places through the alphabet Your recipient must apply Rot13 at the receiving end in order to unscramble the text and read the message That is your recipient rotates each letter another 13 places through the alphabet back to its original position in the alphabet 13 13 26 m Space amp Tab Converter Converts multiple spaces in message text to tabs or vice versa UPPERI ower Text Converts message text to either all upper case all lower case initial word capitals or initial sentence capitals 307 Using Eudora Plug ins Eudora User Manual 308 When you start Eudora these conversion services appear on the Message Plug ins submenu under the submenu To use one of the services open an outgoing or incoming message then choose the service from the Message Plug ins submenu The conversion is performed on the entire text in the message If text is selected in the message when you choose the service the conversion is performed only on tha
244. et application you want to use for a URL type do the following 1 Press the Option key and double click the URL A standard file dialog appears 2 Select the application you want then click Open The application is opened and goes to the selected URL The next time you select a URL of that type the same application is automatically used Someone may send you a message containing a hot link that is poorly formatted and Eudora does not recognize it as a URL Eudora will not highlight the text string but you can still use it as an active link by doing the following 1 Select the entire string of text that you think is a hot link 2 From the File menu choose Open Selection or press the Command key and click the selection It s better to enclose hot links in angle brackets lt gt for example lt http www qualcomm com eudora gt This helps Eudora and other software prod ucts to recognize the hot link Viewing HTML Text Sometimes you may receive Web pages or other HTML formatted text in email messages Eudora displays these messages as best it can but if you want to display them in your World Wide Web browser you can do so right from Eudora by doing the following 1 Open the message or highlight its message summary in the mailbox window 2 From the File menu choose Open in Browser Eudora uses the browser you have selected for use with active HTML hot links see Using Active URLs on page 97 If you have not yet sele
245. ete a mailbox or mail folder do the following 1 Choose the mailbox you want to remove 2 Atthe bottom of the Mailboxes window click the Remove button or press the Delete key on your keyboard A dialog appears asking you to confirm the deletion 3 To delete the item click Remove It If you selected more than one mailbox or mail folder you are prompted to delete each selected item Click Remove It to delete the items one at a time or click Remove All to remove all of them without further prompts If you choose to remove a mailbox in which messages are still stored or a folder in which other mailboxes or folders are stored all the messages mailboxes and folders contained within the selected mailbox or folder are also removed Note You cannot remove the Eudora Folder or the In Out or Trash mailboxes ltems removed from the Mailboxes window are also removed from the Mailbox and Transfer menus They are moved to the Finder s Trash and can be recovered before emptying the Trash Working with IMAP Mailboxes IMAP mailbox management is similar to POP mailbox management The differences are due mainly to the fact that all IMAP mailboxes and folders are stored on the IMAP server rather than on your Macintosh In other words your IMAP mailboxes are managed remotely rather than locally Note You may find that some mailboxes on your IMAP server were created by others and made accessible to you You may have both read and write pe
246. ew mailboxes nicknames and filters etc and not affect other users on the Macintosh 310 Eudora User Manual Eudora Folders Note To give users easy access to their mail you can create aliases for their Eudora Settings files and put them wherever you want on the Macintosh the Apple Menu Items folder is a good option Eudora Folders The first time you start Eudora it creates a Eudora Folder within your System pre OS9Y or Documents Folder Even though you do not need to access the Eudora Folder during normal operation this section is provided to show you where Eudora stores your mail boxes messages nicknames settings and other data Attachments Folder Incoming attachments are saved in the Attachments Folder until you specify another folder via the Attachment Folder button in the Attachments Settings see Attachments on page 255 The Attachments Folder is created when you first start Eudora after installation See Receiving Attachments on page 93 for more details on managing incoming attachments Cache Folder HTML graphic files that are downloaded to your computer are stored in the Cache Folder These files are generally contained in web pages that a correspondent sends to you via email from their web browser These incoming graphic files are downloaded either auto matically if the Automatically download HTML graphics option is turned on in your Fonts amp Display Settings see Fonts amp Display on pa
247. eys 306 moving a button 306 removing a button 306 scrolling arrows 306 transferring messages using 306 toolbar main settings 261 Toolbar Button Creation dialog 305 Toolbar Settings 261 306 Tow Truck icon 93 124 Transfer mail for the following personalities option 86 Transfer To filter action 86 143 transferring via filters 143 Transferring mail to another mailbox and creating a mailbox or folder 135 by dragging it 134 by dragging the Tow Truck icon 134 using the option key 134 using the Transfer menu 134 Transferring mail to the Out mailbox 134 Trash attachments with messages option 133 256 Trash icon 84 Trash mailbox 131 Troubleshooting 325 Can t queue this message 326 ERR Maildrop lock busy 326 Error opening your settings file 326 Mailbox has a damaged table of contents 327 Memory is tight 326 Message columns don t line up 327 Messages not wrapping correctly 327 No Date header in your mail 327 Password is incorrect 327 and README file 325 Try something that requires too much memory op tion 273 Try to delete any unsent messages option 273 Try to delete queued mail option 272 Try to delete unread mail option 272 Try to queue a message with no subject option 273 Try to queue a message with styled text option 273 Try to quit with messages queued to be sent option 273 Try to send a message whose size is more than K option 273 Turbo redirect by default option 27
248. f an incoming message is not currently open or selected the Message menu s Reply command is dimmed you cannot use the Reply command You also cannot reply to an outgoing message Apple Menu The Apple menu lets you open items in your Apple Menu Items folder and view information on the currently active application or program The Apple Computer logo appears at the top of the menu When Eudora is the currently active application there are two Eudora related commands on the Apple menu Eudora commands on the Apple menu About Eudora About Messaqe Plug ins 212 Choose this command About Eudora About Message Plug ins File Menu This happens Displays the Eudora Email splash screen which contains information on this version of Eudora Also Registration information name and number are included Click Credits then More Credits to view a full listing of the QUALCOMM personnel who worked on the Eudora program Click Visit Web Site to open your default web browser and go to QUALCOMM s Eudora web site Click OK to close the splash screen Displays a dialog that lists your installed message plug ins by icon and name Although you can select each item you cannot perform any operation on it from the dialog Scroll bars appear to let you scroll through a long list Click OK to close the dialog For more information on message plug ins see Using Eudora Plug ins in the General Reference chapter in the onlin
249. ffensive language in the message There may be offensive language in the message i There is offensive language in the message 7 na i After you click the Send or Queue button a warning appears indicating there is offensive text in your email message Following is the warning you would get if three chili peppers displayed MoodWatch warning Your message may cause offense Your message to doe Campe mytir mm com regarding Don t be late is the sort of thing that might get your keyboard washed out with soap if you get my drift m To send the message despite the offensive text click Send Anyway Your message is sent If you have Eudora set to Queue messages for later transmission you can still retrieve the message in the Out mailbox to edit or delete it You can then send the message or requeue it m To return to the composition window without sending or queueing the message click Cancel Eudora User Manual Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages By changing the options in the MoodWatch settings dialog you can have MoodWatch scan your incoming messages for offensive text as well The indicators are one two or three chili peppers appearing in the mailbox s message summary column as shown MoodWatch scanning incoming mail V UE H obel eee B SANMA Tris Friday Adrienne Loder Friday Looking for good home for adult cat Cathy D amp Dan D Friday Windows Web Page Submissio
250. filters before user filters Run automatic filters after user filters Automatic Actions fq Allow automatic processing of incoming attachments Af Allow automatic scanning of shared folders Come Coe In the ESP Automatic Filters Precedence area choose Run automatic filters before user filters or the Run automatic filters after user filters Depending on which option you activate ESP filters incoming messages into the shared folder either before or after your own filters take effect To run the automatic ESP filters before your personal filters is the default In the Automatic Actions area check the Allow automatic processing of incoming attachments box if you want the shared folder updated automatically with email message attachments as specified in the Settings dialog The default is to automati cally process incoming attachments If you want your shared folders scanned automatically at the frequency you specified in the Settings dialog check the Allow automatic scanning of shared folders box The system default is to allow automatic shared folder scanning Using the ESP Mailbox and Folder When you create or choose a mailbox for the ESP Groups the mailbox looks and func tions similarly to other Eudora mailboxes except you can perform ESP functions by clicking the buttons just below the title bar 303 Using the ESP Mailbox and Folder 304 Eudora User Manuall Following is an example of an ESP mailbox ESP ma
251. format in the Documentation Folder 201 Specifying Your Default Lookup Servers Eudora User Manual Specifying Your Default Lookup Servers To specify your default lookup servers do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings Scroll through the list of icons and choose Hosts The Hosts Setting dialog appears Hosts settings with sample server entries Settings Checking Mail Mail Server incoming myTirm com wf Overlap POPS commands for better performance a Tool bar HE sending Mail Getting Attention SMTP Server outgoing myfirm cam You only need to fill this in if its different from your Mail Server above LI Use mail exchange records s Directory Services Ph LDAP Server ph myfirm com Finger Server finger myfirm con Extra Warnings 3H Mood Watch wf Live directory service queries All connections y Mf ONS load balancing Internet Dialup The Mail field should contain the name of your incoming mail server This is the POP or IMAP server that receives the mail that people send you The SMTP field should contain the name of your outgoing mail server which is the server that processes your mail when you send it out Note If your email administrator or your ISP instructed you to leave this field blank it s because your SMTP server resides on the same computer as your incoming mail server In that case Eudora uses the server name in your Mail field as th
252. ft Paste Paste Without Styles Pastes from the clipboard but first removes any style information from the text to be pasted Option Plain Completely Plain Removes all style information from the selected text and returns it to the default settings This command appears under the Text submenu from the Edit menu Option Wrap Unwrap Selection Removes all carriage returns from the selected Selection text Option Finish Finish amp Expand Completes the nickname and expands it into its Address Book Entry Address Book Entry associated address es Option Insert Insert amp Expand Inserts the nickname and expands it into its Recipient Recipient associated address es Shift Reply Reply Quoting Replies quoting the currently selected text only not Selection the entire message Option Reply Reply To All Replies to the sender and all recipients or just the sender if the Reply to all By default setting is turned on in the Replying settings Messsage Menu Shift Option Reply Quoting Reply Selection To All Replies to the sender and all recipients quoting the selected text only or just to the sender if the Reply to all By default setting is turned on Option Redirect To Turbo Redirect To Performs a Turbo Redirect that is redirects to the selected nickname on the Quick Recipient List queues the redirected message and deletes the original message all in one step or simply Redirect if the Turbo redirec
253. fter the number of seconds entered in the box m Mark read if clicked in or tabbed to or scrolled lf this setting is on then an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane is marked read if you move the keyboard focus to the preview pane by either clicking in the preview pane or Tabbing to the pane or operating its scroll bar if available Mark read if next message used to move away lf this setting is on then an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane Is marked read if you move to the next or previous message using the modified or unmodified arrow keys as set in the Moving Around settings m Mark read if deleted lf this setting is on then an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane is marked read if you delete it If this setting is off then the message Is not marked read when deleted Note that if this setting is on and you delete the unread message currently being previewed Eudora first marks the message read then deletes it Note Eudora will not automatically mark as read the new unread messages that are received following a mail check or filter action until you take action on the first new unread message in the new list in that mailbox Using the Title Bar Popup Menu In an open message or mailbox window hold down the Command key and click on the title in the title bar A popup menu appears showing the hierarchy of mailboxes and folders containing that mess
254. g options to format the text of your outgoing messages text files and signature files The formatting is sent to your recipients using Hypertext Markup Language format HTML HTML is the text formatting standard used by Web browsers and newer email applications Besides allowing you to use enriched text HTML also lets you create bulleted lists and embed pictures horizontal lines and links to URLs hyperlinks in your outgoing email messages Note that the formatting your recipient sees depends on how well their email software supports these standards It s important to know that you cannot completely control what happens on your recipients computer Depending on the type of computer they are using their email software their installed fonts their settings or preferences and other considerations they could end up viewing something slightly or even very different from what you had intended Also the formatting changes you make are sent to your recipients but your default text settings are not Any text you did not change appears using your recipients default text settings which may be different from yours In Eudora you can select preferences for sending text in your messages as follows 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category list and choose Styled Text 3 Inthe Styled Text settings dialog you can select whether you want Eudora to send your messages with styled or plain text or both If
255. gain Send Again command m Transfer the message from an IMAP mailbox to a POP mailbox an IMAP to IMAP transfer will not retrieve the message Automatically Deleting IMAP Attachments For information on deleting messages see Deleting Messages on page 131 To have IMAP messages attachments automatically deleted do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category list and choose Attachments 3 Inthe Attachments settings dialog turn on the Trash attachments with messages option 4 Make sure the attachments if retrieved are still in the Attachment Folder or the folder you have specified for attachments For details see Attachments on page 255 If you have these options turned on and you want to delete an IMAP message but save its attachment move the attachment into another folder before deleting the message Important If you delete a message from the IMAP server whose attachments have not been retrieved the attachments will be deleted from the server Make sure you have retrieved all wanted attachments before deleting the message 103 Viewing IMAP Messages Eudora User Manual 104 Replying to Messages Replying to a Message To reply to the current message do the following m From the Message menu choose Reply or click l A new message window appears with the original sender s address automatically placed in the To field of the header All of the sender
256. ge 258 or manually when you click the Get HTML Graphics icon of an open incoming message window The Cache Folder is managed the way cache folders are managed in web browser appli cations That is files continue to be added to the folder until the folder reaches a certain size at which point the oldest least used image files are deleted to make room for new image files For more details on HTML graphic files see Viewing HTML Graphics on page 98 Delivery Folder When you check mail your new incoming messages are downloaded and stored in the Delivery Folder until they are filtered This is only a temporary storage area and is usually empty between mail checks Eudora Filters Any filters you create are saved in the Eudora Filters file See Filtering Messages on page 135 for instructions on creating and using filters Eudora Folders 312 Eudora User Manual Eudora Items The Eudora Items Folder contains special files and folders for use with Eudora The Plugins folder different from the Extra Plugins folder in the Eudora Application Folder contains settings and information files for your installed Eudora plug ins The Eudora Items folder is created when you first start Eudora after installation Eudora Log and Old Log Mail transfers and errors are logged in the Eudora Log file When the file reaches 100K in size it is saved as Old Log replacing any existing Old Log file and a new Eudora Log file is created
257. ge Access Protocol A sample server name might be worldmail myfirm com Check with your ISP or your company s email administrator if you re not sure what to enter here Sending Mail Real name blank required entry Enter the name assigned to your principal account generally your first and last name The text you enter here is included in the From field in all of your outgoing messages from this account It identifies you to your recipients SMTP Server Enter the name of the outgoing mail sever for your principal email account if different than the incoming mail server name for example smtp1 myfirm con All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server If the computer that runs your primary incoming mail account is the same as your outgoing mail server you can leave this field blank Return address blank if not username mailhost Enter the return email address that has been assigned to you by your ISP or your company s email administrator This is the address that other people use to send you email Also the address you enter here is included in the From field in all of your outgoing messages from this account When a recipient replies to a messages from this account the reply is sent to this address If you do not enter an enter an address in this field Eudora uses your incoming mail account as the return address Incoming mail accounts are usually in the following format username mailho
258. ge the email address for a personality When saved in the ESP Groups window ESP asks you if you want to update both your ESP s information and other members information or just update your ESP information If you choose both an email message is sent to all group members and automatically updates your changed email address m Do use ESP as a mini mailing list for perhaps a family group of friends coworkers and so on The list of email addresses stays current in all of the members lists when the addresses are modified m Don t put large files in ESP Other members of your group may have mail systems with limits on file size m Don t put files in ESP where group members need to work on them at the same time ESP works best when one member works on one file at a time Don t put files in ESP that need to be updated in realtime There will be a few minute delay in updated group files Eudora User Manual Creating an ESP Group Creating an ESP Group You can create a group and then invite members to join it All members of a group are of equal importance Although you are creating the group it does not mean that you are its leader When you create a group ESP assigns the group a unique identifier which avoids any naming conflicts To create a new group do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears ESP Groups window SS B82 GS SF A 4 Business Plan EIMS Marketing documents
259. ges to a mailbox by selecting the Other command from the Transfer menu or one of its submenus Parts Folder Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME are stored in the Parts Folder This folder is created when you first start Eudora after installation This folder includes graphic files and other objects that were inserted or embedded into the text of an incoming message These MIME parts are deleted from the Parts Folder when you delete the message Signature Folder Signatures are kept in the Signature Folder This folder is created when you first start Eudora after installation The two default signature files are Signature corresponding to the Standard selection in Eudora and Alternate Any additional signature files you create in Eudora are kept in this folder See Using a Signature on page 61 for more details on how to create and use signatures Spool Folder Attachments that are being forwarded or redirected are kept in the Spool Folder until the corresponding message is deleted The n temp and Out temp mailbox files in this folder are used as temporary storage depots for incoming and outgoing mail received and sent during mail checks and sends This folder is created when you first start Eudora after installation Stationery Folder Stationery message files you create are kept in the Stationery Folder by default See Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 64 for more details on creating and using s
260. group The Delete function bypasses this process m Invite To invite anew ESP member to join the group click Invite See Inviting Members to Join Your Group on page 294 m Sync Folder To send the entire contents of your shared folder to another group member choose the member s name and click Sync Folder Note ESP updates email addresses when you change the email address for a person ality When saved in the ESP Groups window ESP asks you if you want to update both your ESP s information and other members information or just update your ESP infor mation If you choose both an email message is sent to all group members and auto matically updates your changed email address 300 Eudora User Manual Joining a Group Joining a Group ESP manages group membership through a shared mailing list allowing group members to share files and messages ESP creates the mailing list through a series of processes called invitations ensuring that each member of the group has explicit knowledge of group membership by acknowledging and approving each new member To join an existing group do the following 1 Wait for an email message from one of the group members inviting you to join their group The Join ESP Share Group dialog automatically appears after Eudora is done receiving the email message 2 To join the group click Join If you don t want to join click Cancel ESP prompts you to join the group by opening the New G
261. guring Eudora Eudora User Manual 20 Return address Enter the return email address that has been assigned to you by your ISP or your company s email administrator This is the address that other people use to send you email Also the address you enter here is included in the From field in all of your outgoing messages from this account When a recipient replies to a messages from this account the reply is sent to this address If you do not enter an enter an address in this field Eudora uses your incoming mail account as the return address Incoming mail accounts are usually in the following format username mailhost For example suppose your incoming mail account is John Davis worldmail myfirm com but your return address is John Davis myfirm com You would then enter John Davis myfirm com in this field Sample settings entered in the Getting Started settings dialog settings Checking Mail Username John Davis Mail Server server mytirm com Sending Mail SMTP Server smtpserver mytirm cam You only need to fill this in if it s different from your Mail Server above Return Address John Davise myfir m corn You only need to fill this in if it s different from Username MailServer z Attachments 2 To save your settings click OK Auto Configure Settings Automatic Configuration If your ISP or company provides Application Configuration Access Protocol ACAP settings you can
262. hat position and the other tabs are displaced to accommodate it If you do not drop the tab onto an existing tab Eudora adds the new tab at the end of the group of existing tabs 173 Opening and Activating Tabbed Windows Eudora User Manual 174 To reorganize the left to right order of tabs within a tabbed window do the following m Drag the tabs left and right The drop scheme is the same as that described previously lf after reorganizing your tabbed windows you change your mind you can revert to the original default tabbed windows that came with Eudora by doing the following m Press and hold the Option key and from the Window choose Revert To Default Tabs Opening and Activating Tabbed Windows To open a tabbed window group open any of its member windows by selecting the appro priate command from the Window menu The tabbed window opens with the selected window as the active frontmost window lf the tabbed window group is already open and you wish to display one of its member windows that is currently not active do one of the following m Click the member window s tab m Choose the desired window from the Window menu The desired window comes to the front of the tabbed group If you deselect Tabs from the Window menu while a tabbed window group is open check mark next to Tabs disappears the active window becomes normal and the other windows in the group disappear Creating a New Tabbed Window To create
263. have now This change can be as simple as changing a single character in a specified text string Note Because the search is performed only on the results in the Results pane changing your selected mailboxes in the Mailboxes pane will have no effect 3 Perform the search by clicking the Search button or press Return and allow the search to continue to completion or stop it at any time Your new results will likely be a subset of your first results and may make it easier to find the information you re looking for You can perform additional searches on the results returned by each subsearch by keeping the Search results checkbox clicked turned on changing the search conditions each time and performing the search Note The Search results checkbox is only displayed following a successful search that is one that returns at least one message into the Results pane This is true whether you allow the search to run to completion or you stop it partway 167 Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual 168 Saving a Search Results Window Once you have performed a search you can save the search results to display or to conduct additional searches later To save a search results window do the following 1 Perform the search 2 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears showing Search Folder as the folder the search results window is to be saved to 3 Inthe Save As dialog type th
264. he Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Command on page 136 for details on the use of the Incoming Outgoing and Manual checkboxes in the Filters window Match area Each filter can use one or two terms as its criteria connecting them as appropriate with the conjunction popup Header uUse this field to specify which message header items you want the filter to search You can choose an option from the popup menu or enter one yourself this is helpful if you want to use a header item that does not appear on the menu such as X Priority Eudora User Manual Filtering Messages The selections are as follows m lo m Cc m From m Subject m Reply To m Any Recipient m Any Header m Body m Personality The Any Recipient option searches all possible recipient items To Cc Bcc the Any Header option searches all message headers including hidden headers that are shown with the BLAH BLAH BLAH option the Body option searches the message body and the Personality option searches the name of the personality associated with the message Use the Match Type popup to control how the header item is matched with the text string in the text field Note It s better that you keep the contents of all fields as specific and brief as possible The greater the complexity the less the likelihood of a match Carefully check the header you re looking at in the match area of the filt
265. he Shift key and choosing Make Address Book Entry From Selection command from the Special menu To use the Make Address Book Entry command do one of the following m In an open window go to step 1 m nan open mailbox window first select the message summary or Summaries you want in the address book then go to step 1 1 From the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry Make Address Book Entry command Special Filter Messages Make Address Book Entry Make Filter Find Sort Settings Plug in Settings in settings Change Password Forget Password Empty Trash The Make Address Book Entry dialog appears 192 8 9 Make Address Book Entry dialog Make Address Book Entry Personal Information Nickname Johnny S Full Name John Campos First Name Last Mame This nickname will expand to the following address Cam pose myfi r mm com In the Address Book Eudora Nicknames z C Quick Recipient Add Details Create Nickname In the Nickname text box Eudora enters the name in the email address or the message You can change it if you like In the Full Name field Eudora enters the full name as it appears in the email address of the message You can change it if you like In the First Name and Last Name fields Eudora enters the first and last name of the person as it appears in the email address or the message You can change it if you like In the This nickname will expand to the f
266. he button you can select a mailbox from the Transfer menu Delete Message transfer to Trash Select to delete the message that satisfies the filter match conditions by transferring it to your Trash mailbox This feature is useful for deleting unsolicited email Tip If you frequently transfer messages to a certain mailbox manually you may want to automate the process First open the mailbox select a few representative messages and select the Make Filter command from the Special menu The Make Filter function then creates a filter that matches the messages and transfers them to the mailbox of your choice Make Filter dialog buttons After you have set up your match conditions and filter action click Create Filter the default button to create the filter The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list in the Filters window The filter is available immediately and will act on messages that satisfy the conditions at the next mail check mail send or selection of the Filter Messages command from the Special menu Add Details to create your filter and also open the Filters window There you can add additional information to specialize your new filter The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list and is immediately available in the form in which it was set up in the Make Filter dialog Any changes you make in the Filters window must be saved before they become effective See the following section Detailed Fil
267. he Finger protocol for Internet and intranet searches You can obtain this server name from your ISP or from your email administrator If you leave this field blank Eudora uses your SMTP server as your Finger server Live directory service queries off Check this box if you want your directory services to act on search information automatically This saves you time when you perform Internet or intranet searching The connection with your Directory Services server is kept open in the open Directory Services window when the window is on top and in use Directory service queries are automatically sent to the server when you pause after typing query text in the Enter query field of the window All connections DNS load balancing off Check this box to spread the usage of several Eudora users over many host computers Turn this setting on if your network administrator tells you to 2 1 Extra Warnings 2 2 Eudora User Manual System Administrators DNS load balancing works by making Eudora choose a random address from the list of addresses returned by the DNS without DNS load balancing Eudora will always choose the first address from the list If you have several machines that can perform the exact same service list all of their IP addresses under one domain name then instruct your users to use that domain name and to turn on the DNS load balancing setting Now the users are most likely to use any one of the balanced ma
268. he Special menu See Extra Warnings on page 272 Quitting Eudora empties the contents of the Trash mailbox when the Empty Trash on Quit option is turned on in the Miscellaneous settings found in Settings from the Special menu See Miscellaneous on page 276 Finally if you want to delete just a few messages from the Trash mailbox do the following 1 Open the Trash mailbox 2 Select the desired messages Deleting Messages 132 Eudora User Manual 3 From the Message menu choose Delete or press the Delete key Deleting a message from the Trash removes it completely from your computer IMAP Procedure If you have the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server option turned off all new messages are delivered to your IMAP server and are kept there until you manually delete them Also whenever you retrieve a message either in part or in full from the IMAP server to your computer either during a mail check or through another activity that retrieves messages a copy of the message is kept on the IMAP server until you manually delete it Therefore to delete an IMAP message you must delete it from the IMAP server To delete messages you must perform two steps m Mark the message for deletion m Remove all messages marked for deletion from a mailbox To Mark a Message for Deletion To mark a message for deletion do the following 1 Option the IMAP mailbox or folder containing the message 2 Select the message summary
269. he current message or the one corresponding to the current mailbox window is selected in the Mailboxes pane This lets you search through that mailbox only If you choose Search Mailbox while text is selected in a current message window Eudora performs a search on that text looking through that mailbox only The Search window is opened the mailbox is selected in the Mailboxes pane the selected text is entered into the text field of the one search condition Anywhere contains lt selected text gt and the search is performed The results appear in the Results pane Note If you choose Search Mailbox while no message window or mailbox window is currently open the Search window opens with all of your mailboxes selected in the Mail boxes pane 155 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual 156 Using the Search Mailfolder Command The Search Mailfolder command gives you a quick way to search through a single mail folder 1 With a message window or mailbox window currently open from the Special menu choose Find then Search Mailfolder or press Option Command F 2 Set your match conditions and conduct the search as described under Basic Search Procedure on page 153 When you select Search Mailfolder the Search window is opened and the current mail folder the one containing the current mailbox window or the one containing the mailbox that contains the current message is selected in the Mailboxes p
270. heck 177 Task Progress Window Eudora User Manual 178 You can set mail checking options from the popup menu at the lower left corner of the Task Progress window The options on this menu are shortcuts to Eudora settings normally found in the Settings dialog that specify the conditions under which automatic mail checks occur Task Progress window popup menu SSS Task Progress SFB Don t check when not connected Don t check when on batteries Offline never check There are three mail checking options on this menu m Don t check when not connected If you use a modem to dial in to a server to check your mail choose this option so Eudora won t try to check your mail if automatic checking is set when you are discon nected m Don t check when on batteries If you use a laptop computer to dial in and check your mail choose this option so Eudora won t try to check your mail if automatic checking is set when your laptop is powered by batteries only Eudora can distinguish whether your laptop is powered by batteries or electricity Mail checking can be a drain on computer batteries m Offline never check Choose this option if you do not want Eudora to attempt to make any connections This is useful if you check mail from a laptop and if you are not connected to any network Note You can send receive and compose mail all at the same time and you can perform other operations simultaneously as well Eudora will ev
271. hen you empty the Trash POP Procedure To put a message in the Trash do the following 1 Select the message 2 From the Message menu choose Delete or from the Transfer menu choose Trash Also you can just press the Delete key or click the Delete button on the main toolbar The message is transferred to the Trash mailbox To delete the messages in the Trash mailbox removing them permanently from your Macintosh do the following m From the Special menu choose Empty Trash To delete a message permanently without sending it to the Trash first do the following 1 Select the message 2 Hold down the Shift and Option keys and from the Message menu choose Nuke or use any of the delete options Warning You cannot undo a Nuke operation If you delete or nuke a message that has an attachment the attachment is moved to Trash on your desktop However the Trash attachments with messages option must be checked in the Attachments settings found in Settings from the Special menu The attachment must be in your Attachment Folder or the folder you ve designated to receive attach ments For this to happen see Automatically Deleting Attachments following this section For more information on the attachment settings see Attachments on page 255 You can set up Eudora to warn you if you try to delete unread queued or unsent messages To do this turn on these options in the Extra Warnings settings found in Settings under t
272. henever you check for mail If you leave the text box blank your mail is left on the server indefinitely See the next section Leaving Mail on the Server for more information Delete from server when emptied from trash Turn this option on to delete messages from the POP server when they are removed from your Trash mailbox Skip messages over K Turn this option on and enter a file size in Kilobytes in the text field and Eudora will not retrieve the message in its entirety if its over the file size you specified here These messages are retrieved only in part which include the first few lines of the message along with a statement that says the message is not complete This option can be useful if you have a slow connection 4 To save the information and close the Settings dialog click OK Your POP account is now created 82 Eudora User Manual Managing Your Mail on the POP Server Leaving Mail on the Server If you use the POP protocol for your incoming server to retrieve mail your mail is normally deleted from the server once it is delivered to Eudora However most POP incoming servers allow you to keep your mail on the server so you can retrieve it from several different computers at various times Facts you should know if you decide to leave your mail on the server m Some mail servers won t allow you to keep mail on them m Your system administrator may not allow you to keep mail on the server even though you have the
273. her group members membership lists Until you save changes to the ESP Groups window you can cancel your departure from the group Just choose the share group that you had planned to leave and click Rejoin which is what the Leave button will be renamed when you chose this group If you re sure you want to leave the group then save changes to the ESP Groups window by either closing the window and choosing Save in the displayed dialog box or by choosing Save from the File menu ESP will send a message to other group members announcing your departure from the group Working with the Shared Folder Use the shared folder like any folder in the Finder by adding modifying or deleting files as needed To open the shared folder do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups 2 Inthe left column choose the name of the group you want to open and click Open Folder The Save Changes dialog opens 3 To save any changes before ESP opens the folder you can click Save Don t Save or Cancel The shared folder opens allowing you to access its files ESP periodically scans the folder for changes according to your settings and sends the updated files to other group members To update the shared folder of another group member manually select the member from the Users dialog and click Sync Folder This sends the entire contents of the shared folder to the selected member As ESP receives periodic changes to the shared folder f
274. hift Make Filter Sort Descending Option Eudora User Manual This happens Filters the currently open message or selected message summaries against all manual filters in your filters list Manual filters are those for which the Manual checkbox is checked in the Match area of the Filters window for that filter or in the Match area of the Make Filter dialog when you created that filter See Filtering Messages on page 135 for more details Creates an entry in your Address Book a nickname containing the address es in the open or selected message s or other window where this command is available See the chapter Using the Address Book on page 181 for more details Creates an entry in your Address Book a nickname containing the selected address es See the above cited chapter for more details Opens the Make Filter dialog to create a simple transfer filter using the information in the currently open or selected message s See Filtering Messages on page 135 for more details Submenu The Find commands on this submenu let you look for a text string in a currently open window not just message windows but other windows as well The Search commands open a Search window so you can perform more advanced searching for specific information in messages across a wide range of mailboxes and mail folders For more details see the separate section below and Finding and Searching on page 149 Submenu Sorts the message summ
275. highlighted clickable hyperlink to a URL that you specify When your recipient clicks the hyper link in the received message he or she is immediately taken to the URL You must fully qualify the protocol before in enter the web site address http ph ftp for example http www eudora com For more details see Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 42 For more information on text styles see Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 39 Message Header Outgoing message headers consist of six fields To From Subject Cc Bcc and X Attach ments You can directly edit the To Subject Cc and Bcc fields To move the insertion point between these fields press the Tab key or click in the desired field with the mouse or press Return To Recipients email addresses or nicknames you have defined Multiple addresses and nicknames must be separated by commas For more information on nicknames see Using the Address Book on page 181 35 Saving a Message for Later Changes Eudora User Manuall From Sender s email address This is usually your incoming email account plus your real name You can use a return address other than your incoming mail account by entering the address in the Return address field of the Getting Started options See Getting Started on page 245 If you have multiple personalities set up you can select the appropriate person
276. hing messages against your search conditions As soon as the search begins the following occurs m The Search button changes to Stop m The Results pane is brought to the front of the Search window m Mailboxes and Results tabs are temporarily hidden and are replaced with the status message Searching where the blank is filled in with the name of the mailbox currently being searched Eudora dynamically runs through these names as the search progresses and they can change rapidly Note Eudora searches your selected folders and mailboxes in the order in which they appear in the Mailboxes pane and searches your messages in the order in which they appear in the mailboxes When Eudora encounters a message that matches the conditions of the search the following occurs m Message appears in the Results pane Counter at the lower left of the message summary list Similar to a mailbox size display is increased by one m Messages continue to be added to the bottom of the message list in the Results pane if they are successful matches and the counter continues to roll upward until the search is complete 163 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual 164 When the search is finished the following occurs m The Stop button changes back to Search m Mailboxes and Results tabs reappear m Search results checkbox appears next to the More button or with multiple conditions next to the More and Fewer butt
277. hoose the New command under the appropriate submenu of the Mailbox or Transfer menu The purpose of the Trash mailbox is to provide you a central location for storing your deleted IMAP messages similar to a POP Trash mailbox You can regulate your deleted mail in the Trash mailbox either emptying the Trash or retrieving some of the deleted messages before they are permanently removed from the IMAP server If this setting is deselected you will have to mark each message for deletion and then delete the message from the server See Deleting Messages on page 131 Eudora User Manual Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only Personality Extras settings IMAP server Settings Personality to Configure Personality Business More Checking Mail Mail Protocal POP IMAP Download Options M Minimal headers only Full message except attachments over 40 K id Full message with attachments k e Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server More Sending Mail Sasamane None J or Signature oa Standard Statistics Co More Sending Mail POP and IMAP Stationery None From the popup menu choose a default stationery file to use for this personality or choose None for no default stationery The selected stationery file is used when you open new messages for this personality except with the Redirect or Send Again commands under the Message menu The icon bar in the message window is set according to how the
278. ic Nickname Completion Sponsored and Paid modes only Using the Recipient History List Sponsored and Paid modes only Using Nicknames that were Not Created by Eudora Saving Your Entries to a File Using the Recipient List Including Nicknames on the Recipient List Using Directory Services What Are Directory Services Specifying Your Default Lookup Servers Looking Someone Up Keeping the Connection Open to Your Lookup Server for Live Queries Performing Turbo Lookups on Selected Text Addressing a Message from Your Query Results Making Address Book Entries Making Entries from the Current Selection 175 175 176 176 176 177 181 182 182 183 185 186 190 191 191 192 192 194 195 195 197 198 198 198 199 201 201 202 203 205 206 206 207 208 xi Finding and Using Lookup Servers from Around the World Using Menu Commands Apple Menu File Menu Edit Menu Text Submenu Spelling Submenu Sponsored and Paid modes only Mailbox Menu Message Menu Change Submenu Server Options Submenu Transfer Menu Special Menu Find Submenu Window Menu Help Menu Scripts Menu Sponsored and Paid Modes only Using Modifiers and Shortcuts Modifiers Modifiers Not Reflected in Eudora s Menus Modifiers That Show Up As New Commands on Eudora s Menus Shortcuts Setting Eudora Preferences Introduction Getting Started Checking Mail Sending Mail Checking Mail Account Server Information POP and IMAP
279. if you try to delete any incoming messages marked with the Unread status Try to delete queued mail on When this setting is on you are warned if you try to delete any messages that are queued in your Out box with the Queued or Timed Queue status Eudora User Manual Extra Warnings Try to delete any unsent messages on When this setting is on you are warned if you try to delete any messages in your Out box that are marked with the Send status Queueing and Sending Try to queue a message with no subject off If you turn this setting on you are warned if you try to send or queue a message that has an empty Subject field Try to queue a message with styled text off Sponsored or Paid mode only If you turn this setting on you are warned if you try to send or queue a message that contains styled text You can also use the Styled Text settings to set several options related to styled text Try to quit with messages queued to be sent on When this setting is on you are warned if you try to quit Eudora while you still have messages queued in your Out box with the Queued or Timed Queue status Try to send a message whose size is more than K 900 This setting is always on and its limited by the number you enter in the text entry box Enter a very large number to avoid getting the warning In any event you are warned if you try to send a message whose size is greater than the number you enter You must enter a
280. il Opens the Import Mail dialog box You can import mail address book and settings from Outlook Express Send Queued Sends all messages that are queued for delivery in your Out Messages box marked with a Q inthe Status column of the message summary Send Messages Displays the Mail Transfer Options dialog so that you can Specially send messages from any or all of your personalities with Option special transfer instructions for the server Check Mail Retrieves new mail from the incoming mail server associated with your Dominant personality email account Mail for alternate personalities is checked depending on your settings in the Personalities settings for each personality Check Mail Displays the Mail Transfer Options dialog so that you can Specially check mail for any or all of your personalities with special Option storage and transfer instructions for the server Page Setup Sets your printing options e g paper size and orientation Prints the currently open message or plain text file the currently selected message s in a mailbox window or other open windows in Eudora such as the Address Book Print Selection Print the selected text only Shift Print One Copy Print one copy of the currently open message or selected message summaries bypassing the Print dialog 213 Edit Menu 214 Choose this command Quit Quits exits the Eudora application Edit Menu This menu provides text
281. il Specially from the File menu The Mail Transfer Options dialog appears Mail Transfer Options dialog C Mall Transfer Options Transfer mail for the following Mail checking amp sending options personalities aw Dominant Retrieve new mail Business Send queued messages Family Friends Fun Legal duties Office Li Delete all messages that have been retrieved C Delete messages marked for deletion L Retrieve messages marked for retrieval School _ Delete all messages on server be sure L Fetch all message headers to In mailbox ane Coe 2 Set the options you want and click OK to continue checking for mail A description of the mail transfer options in this dialog are as follows Retrieve new mail Transfer your new mail from the incoming server to your computer Send queued messages Send all the queued messages marked Q in your Out mailbox Delete messages marked for deletion Delete the messages on the POP server that are marked Delete in Eudora either via the Trash icon in the incoming message window or the Delete from Server or Fetch amp Delete server action in the message summary This is for messages that were left on the server either with m the Leave on server for days option or the Skip messages over K option in the Checking Mail or the Personality Extras settings m or with the Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option in the Mail Transfer Options dialog
282. ilbox showing ESP function buttons Se fg i1655 Pla SSS New Message Open Folder Open Folder invite ESP Groups ESP Groups Update Others CSE Feat RC E EE Steve Dorner ef argo RSVP for the Business Plan workgroup Business Flan Gwen Hunt ley araro RSVP for the Business Plan workgroup Business Plan Steve Jeraer e208 Moobers io o o eate fer Fustaess Plan fustaess Piaa Svea Auntlep vera 8 3 Od Membership update for Bus taessa Flan Bus taessa Plaa Stewe Dorner 6 3 00 RSVP for the Business Flan workgroup CBusiness F lan zZ wj SvSKVOK J a H Sender sdorner sdornerl qualcomm com Date Thu 3 dug 2000 18 57 24 OSHE To Armand Rouleau sarouleauy gt From Stewe Dorner fdorner Subject RSVP for the Business Plan workgroup cBusiness Flan 155134r Please open the icon to add me to your membership list and introduce me to the rest of the Business Plan workgroup ravp 2 Following are the descriptions of the functions when you click the ESP buttons m New Message Opens a new composition window addressed to the group for you to type a message Open Folder Opens your shared folder in a new window m Invite Invites a new member or members to join the group See Inviting Members to Join Your Group on page 294 ESP Groups Opens the ESP Groups window Update Others Updates the files in other members shared folders General Reference Customizing the Main Toolbar Sponsored and
283. ile to a Message Image File and more You can also insert sounds e g QUALCOMM PureVoice files movies and other multimedia content Of course what your recipient sees or hears will depend on the receiving computer email software and any installed multimedia software To link a piece of text or a graphic to a URL do the following 1 Select and highlight the text or graphic 2 From the Edit menu choose Text then Link to URL or click the Link to URL limi on the composition window formatting toolbar 3 Inthe dialog that displays type the URL and click Create Link The text or graphic is linked and underlined Clicking on it takes you or the recipient immediately taken to the URL This command lets you link any piece of text or graphic to a URL For example your message can contain the text For more information on our products Click here To insert a URL in a message see Including a URL in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 45 Attaching a File to a Message Any Macintosh file can be attached and sent with a Eudora message An attachment accompanies the email message and does not appear within the message text Instead the name of the document and its icon appear automatically in the X Attachments field of the message header To attach a file to a current outgoing message do the following 1 From the Message menu choose Attach Document or press Command H A stan dard file dialog appears 2
284. iles are to reside for this filter Tip You can use this action to separate incoming attachments by personality You can move different attachments into different folders based on the personality that receives them Skip Rest This means skip the rest of the filters in the filters list after this one Stops filtering for the message the message Is not matched to the rest of the filters in the filters list The Last used field displays the date the filter was last used on a message This along with the dinosaur icon not used for 30 days helps you identify filters that are no longer useful and can be safely deleted Creating an Auto Reply Sponsored and Paid modes only You can create an email message that can be sent to people automatically when you are on vacation or away from your computer This message is called an auto reply You create an auto reply by using Eudora s stationery and filter functions Note Eudora will not redirect reply forward if the received message is Precedence bulk or Precedence list header This avoids a mail loop Also Eudora must be left running and the Save Password function must be active Before you create the auto reply make sure that the Check for mail every _ minutes the value you enter must be greater than 0 and Send on check options are turned on in the Checking Mail options dialog See Checking Mail on page 246 Also make sure you have entered your incoming mail se
285. in a secure location where there is no possible chance of someone else having access to it To save your password do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll the Settings category list and choose Checking Mail The Checking Mail settings dialog appear 3 Check the Save Password box and click OK Changing Your Password To change the password for your dominant account only do the following m From the Special menu choose Change Password and follow the instructions below For both your dominant account and for each selected personality you are prompted to enter your old password once and your new password twice Depending on the server you are using the password can be up to 30 characters but normally it is only 7 or 8 Note This works only if the incoming server is running a compatible password change server For information about these servers see Sources on page 316 When you choose a new password try not to use real words names dates familiar acro nyms etc Some servers require at least one number or symbol in your password and it s a good idea to include such items even if they are not required Using Signatures and Stationery Using a Signature A signature is a few lines of text that are automatically added to the end of an outgoing message when it is sent A signature can be whatever you want but it is mostly used to give contact information telephone address etc You use only
286. in the mailbox or open the message Also in an open message from the Message menu choose Change then Server Options submenus then choose Mark as Deleted 3 From the Message menu choose Delete or click the Delete toolbar button Also after selecting a message summary press the Delete key or hold down the mouse button on the Server Status column and choose Mark as Deleted from the popup menu The following indicates that an IMAP message has been marked for deletion m A check mark appears next to the Mark as Deleted command when the message is open or selected m A hollow diamond appears next to the Mark as Deleted option on the Server Status column popup for the selected message To Unmark a Message for Deletion If you mark an IMAP message for deletion and then change your mind you can unmark the message so that it won t be deleted from the IMAP server You must unmark the message before you perform an operation that removes all messages marked for deletion To unmark an IMAP message that is marked for deletion first open the IMAP mailbox or folder containing the message then do one of the following m Open the marked message and choose the Message menu then choose Mark as Deleted from the Change then Server Options submenus Eudora User Manual Automatically Deleting Attachments m Select the message summary for the marked message hold down the mouse button on the Server Status column and again choose Mark as Deleted fr
287. indow A reply is initiated using the selected stationery With the Personalities window open drag an open message by its Tow Truck or drag selected message summaries in a mailbox window onto a personality icon in the Personalities window A reply is initiated from that personality and the stationery stored with that personality is used in the reply Set up a filter that uses the Reply With filter action For more details see Filtering Messages on page 135 and Filter Actions on page 142 Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only To reply to a message with a particular stationery do the following 1 2 From the Message menu choose Reply With The Reply With submenu appears From the Reply With submenu choose the desired stationery A new message compo sition window appears The stationery header text is incorporated into the reply header text The stationery body text is inserted below the quoted body text from the original message You can edit and send this new message just as you would any other message Note Another way to reply using a particular stationery is to drag the message summary from the mailbox window and drop it on an icon in the open Stationery window A new reply message is created using that stationery and is composed as described above 109 Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery Soonsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual 110
288. indow signature file window or statio nery file window Contents of the Directory Services window results of a query or the servers list m Filters in the Filters window m Address Book entries Eudora automatically prints headers and footers on each page giving the window title page number and your return address The Print options are found on the File menu m lo print the current message or item choose Print m lo print just the selected text hold down the Shift key and choose Print Selection m lo print one copy and bypass the standard Print dialog quick print choose Print One Copy Putting Multiple Users on One Macintosh If you have a multiple user license for Eudora you can set up Eudora m lf you want more than one user on a single Macintosh m If you have multiple email accounts but you don t want to have alternate personalities set up and use the same set of mailboxes m f you want to store your mail in a folder other than your System or Documents Folder You need to quit and restart Eudora to switch users To have multiple users on one Macintosh for each user make a copy of the Eudora Folder that resides in the System or Documents Folder The copies can be named whatever the users want and put anywhere they want including on a floppy disk or network volume Each user can open Eudora by double clicking the Eudora Settings file within their assigned folder They can make changes to the Settings such as create n
289. indow appears and the selected text is entered in the Enter query field The query is sent to your default Ph or LDAP server and the results are returned in the results area of the Directory Services window Note The server queried for turbo lookups is the Ph or LDAP server entered in the Direc tory Services field of your Hosts settings dialog The Turbo Lookup feature is not available for Finger queries See Hosts on page 270 for more information Addressing a Message from Your Query Results After you have performed a Ph or LDAP query and have obtained the results in the Direc tory Services window you can now either open and address a new message to one of the records in the results or you can add the address es from one or more records to a new composition message already open Note After performing a Finger query you can only address open messages with your results and only via drag and drop as described later To open and address a new message based on your Ph or LDAP query results do the following 1 Make sure there are no outgoing messages already open 2 Perform the Ph or LDAP query in the Directory Services window 3 Choose a record from the results returned by the server 4 Atthe bottom of the Directory Services window click the To Cc or Bec button Eudora User Manual Making Address Book Entries A new outgoing message is opened and the email address in the selected record is entered in the recipient fie
290. indows 174 Option key option 267 or option 142 Orientation option 268 OT PPP and MacSLIP Settings 276 Other command Mailbox and Transfer menus 313 Out mailbox 134 outgoing message copies 57 Outgoing message window Formatting Toolbar 33 Align Center button 34 Align Left button 34 Align Right button 35 Bold button 34 Color popup 34 Completely Plain button 35 Font popup 34 Indent In button 35 Indent Out button 35 ltalics button 34 Size popup 34 Underline button 34 Unquote button 34 icon bar 32 keep copy icon 33 priority popup 32 quoted printable icon 32 Return Receipt icon 33 signature popup 32 word wrap icon 32 message body 36 message header 35 Bcc field 36 Cc field 36 Subject field 36 X Attachments field 36 title bar 31 Outgoing option 139 Outlook Express importing 24 Overlap POP3 commands for better performance option 82 248 271 p Paid mode 25 26 Password changing server source code for 317 entering 59 forgetting 59 remembering 59 Saving 60 Password dialog 59 Passwords changing 60 Passwords option 82 247 248 281 Pencil icon 92 96 Pers Name option 279 Personalities 69 create 71 deleting 73 modify 73 removing 73 personalities and stationery caution 77 assigning via filters 142 Personalities Settings 69 278 Personalities window 71 Personality Extras Settings 69 280 Personality field in Filters 141 Personality option 278 281 Personality popup 74 Personality submenu 74 Ph server sour
291. ine how often ESP checks each member s shared folder for updates and how the information in the shared folders is backed up 295 Configuring Group Change Notifications Eudora User Manuall 296 To configure shared folder settings for your group do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Inthe left column choose the Group name whose shared folders you want to set 3 Click the Settings tab The Settings dialog appears Settings dialog f Eudora Settings _ Notifications Advanced Shared Folder Check ef Check shared folder for changes every fio mi nutes _ Don t check when using battery Auto Backup When Other Members Make Changes wf Auto Backup Updated Documents ef Auto Backup Deleted Documents Store up to fi previous Versions 4 Check the Check shared folder for changes every _ minutes box and specify the time interval at which you want ESP to check the shared folder for group updates If this option is not checked ESP won t check the shared folder The system default is for ESP to check the shared folder every 10 minutes 5 Ifyou want ESP to automatically create a backup when other members update files in the shared folder check the Auto Backup Updated Documents box The box is checked by default 6 Ifyou want ESP to automatically back up deleted documents from the shared folder check the Auto Backup Deleted Documents box The box is checked by def
292. ing Today E The sender has requested notification that you have seen this Sender sjindala mnysa qualcamm cam Date Wed 10 Dec 1997 09 28 29 0800 To alangmytirm com From Sameer Jindal lt sjindaka ryaurtirm com gt subject Important Meeting Today Mime Yersion 1 0 If you sent yourself a copy of the message you will or will not see the notification request depending on whether the Prompt for receipts requested by self option is turned on or off in the Miscellaneous settings See Miscellaneous on page 276 To determine how Eudora sends you a copy of the message Eudora uses the me nick name You can create the me nickname in the Address Book see Using the Address Book on page 181 If you do not have a me nickname Eudora uses the contents of the Username Mail Host and Return address fields from the Getting Started settings If you receive a message with a request for notification of receipt you can click Notify Sender to send the notification or you can just ignore it If you ignore it nothing happens To remove the request without sending the notification hold down the Option key and click Notify Sender Note Return Receipt options may or may not work as described It all depends on your recipients email software program Eudora User Manual Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only Formatting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only You can use standard text editin
293. ing from a Personality Eudora User Manual 76 There are two ways to change the personality of a response The first is to use the method in Replying from a Personality or alternately to initiate the response and then change the personality using one of the three methods described in Changing the Personality of a New Message on page 74 Another way is to change the personality associated with the original message to which you are responding do the following 1 Open the message 2 From the Message menu choose Change then Personality The Personality submenu appears 3 From the Personality submenu choose the desired personality From then on all of your replies to that message are sent from the newly assigned person ality For example suppose you have two additional email personalities other than dominant One personality called Business that you use to respond to business matters and an other personality called Legal that you use to respond to legal matters By chance your Business personality receives a message that is better handled by your Legal personality If you initiate a normal reply the personality in the reply is Business Change it to Legal using one of the standard personality change methods e g Personality popup and now that response is sent from your Legal personality But if you go back to the original message you received as Business open it and change the associated personality to
294. ing on Eudora s menus The commands are organized by menu going left to right across the menu bar and are listed top to bottom down each menu The left column shows the modifier key s and the name of the unmodified command The middle column shows the new name of the modified command as it appears on the menu The right column shows the resulting action of the modified command Press this key and choose this command Displays this modified command en this happens Option Close Close All Closes all open Eudora windows Option Save Save All Saves all currently open outgoing messages in Eudora 239 Modifiers 240 Eudora User Manual Press this key Displays this modified command and choose this command Option Send Send Messages Sends messages with special instructions for the Queued Messages Specially server Option Check Mail Check Mail Checks mail for any or all personalities with special Specially storage and transfer instructions for the server Shift Print Print Selection Prints the current selection only Then this happens Edit Menu Shift Copy Copy Without Styles Copies the selected text but remove all style information Option Copy Copy amp Unwrap Copies the selected text but removes all carriage returns Shift Option Copy Copy Without Styles Copies the selected text but removes all style amp Unwrap information and carriage returns Shi
295. instruct Eudora to retrieve these settings Note If you get your settings from an ACAP server first make sure that you are connected to the Internet To enter ACAP settings do the following From the Special menu choose Settings In Settings category list scroll and choose Auto Configure The Auto Configure Settings dialog appears Eudora User Manual Opening and Configuring Eudora Auto Configure settings dialog fatting ss ACAP Server Configuration ACAP username O ACAP Fort 674 674is usual Internet Dialup Miscellaneous Fetch Configuration Personalities Fetch Settings Mow Personality Extras Auto Configure Statistics 3 Enter the following information in the Auto Configure settings dialog ACAP Username Enter your user name for the ACAP server ACAP Server Enter the name of the ACAP server that contains your settings ACAP Port Enter the port number for the ACAP server Port 674 is the default and is the usual port for ACAP servers 4 To instruct Eudora to get your account settings from the ACAP server click Fetch Settings Now A dialog appears asking you to enter your password Enter the pass word and click Configure Automatically 5 To save your settings click OK Hosts Settings Now that you have entered the name of your incoming server in the Mail Host field in the Getting Started settings dialog you may also need to enter the name of your outgoing mail server if
296. ionery To modify a stationery file do the following 1 2 From the Window menu choose Stationery The Stationery window appears Click the stationery icon you want to modify At the bottom of the Stationery window click the Edit button The stationery message window appears Note Instead of steps 2 and 3 above you can also hold down the Option key and double click the stationery icon Modify the stationery You can make changes to the headers and or message body as you desire Click the Save button Close the stationery message window Eudora User Manual Deleting Stationery Note To rename a stationery file click the name box for the stationery item in the open Stationery window After a short pause the name is highlighted for editing Type the new name and press Return Deleting Stationery To remove a stationery file do the following Note Eudora does not prompt you to confirm the removal of a stationery file 1 2 3 From the Window menu choose Stationery The Stationery window appears Click the icon for the stationery you want to delete At the bottom of the Stationery window click the Remove button or press the Delete key The stationery is removed Close the Stationery window Sending or Replying to a Message with a Particular Stationery To send a message with a particular stationery do the following 1 From the Message menu choose New Message With The New Message With subm
297. ious mailbox to the mailbox you selected Dragging Messages You can drag messages from one mailbox to another using the message summaries or the Tow Truck icon in an open message window To drag a message summary to another mailbox do the following 1 Select the message summary or Summaries 2 Place the cursor over the summary and hold down the mouse button The cross pointer will change to an arrow 3 Drag the summary into m Any open mailbox window or m Onto a main toolbar mailbox button you have created see Customizing the Main Toolbar Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 305 or m Onto a mailbox icon in the open Mailboxes window see Using the Mailboxes Window on page 121 When you release the mouse button the message is transferred Note You can drag a message summary to the Finder to create a new mailbox Do this if you want to back up or transfer your mailboxes Also if you drag a message Summary to a composition window the sender s address will be inserted into the recipient field in which you drop the summary To drag an open message to another mailbox do the following 1 Hold down the mouse button over the Tow Truck icon gm 2 Drag the message into Eudora User Manual Filtering Messages m Any open mailbox or m Onto a main toolbar mailbox button you have created or m Onto a mailbox icon in the open Mailboxes window When you release the mouse button the message is transferre
298. is called a message summary To select one or more message summaries use one of the following methods m lo choose one summary click it m To choose a range of consecutive summaries click the first summary in the range hold down the Shift key and click on the last summary in the range m lo choose non consecutive summaries hold down the Command key and click the Summaries one by one m To choose all the summaries that are from or to the same person hold down the Option key and click the person s name in a summary The summaries are grouped as well as selected You can perform this same function for any column except server status in the mailbox window for example size priority etc m To choose a summary that best matches the letters you type type the first few letters of a sender or recipient s name or the Subject if the mailbox is currently sorted by Subject Eudora User Manual Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Each message summary is divided into columns Status Priority Attachments Label Sender Recipient Date Size Server Status and Subject You can show or hide these columns using the Mailbox Display settings found in Settings from the Window menu A message s Status Priority Label and Server Status can be changed directly in the mailbox window To do this click the message summary column you want to change The pointer displays as the popup menu symbol E Hold down the mouse button and select
299. is can be almost anything you would do with Eudora including using modifier keys with the command When you are done the button is added to the toolbar and named appropriately If you change your mind before creating the button click Remove Button or Cancel in the dialog 305 Using Eudora Plug ins Eudora User Manual 306 You can also drag files from the Finder to the toolbar to add them as buttons and you can drag mailboxes from the Mailboxes window under the Window menu to the toolbar to add them as mailbox buttons You cannot drag mail folders to the toolbar at least from a POP account you can drag IMAP mail folders to the toolbar because they are also mailboxes To change what a button does do the following m While pressing the Command key click the toolbar button then choose the function as you would when creating a button or click Cancel if you change your mind To change the placement of a button on the toolbar do the following m While pressing the Command key drag the button to where you want it To remove a button from the toolbar do the following m While pressing the Command key drag the button to the Trash on your desktop Or press the Command key and click the button then click Remove Button in the dialog If you create a mailbox button in the toolbar you can drag messages to that toolbar button to transfer those messages to the associated mailbox Drag an open incoming message by its Tow Truck icon
300. is the Content Type header Content Type text plain charset iso 8859 1 A content type header is divided into three parts the content type the content subtype and the parameters In this case the content type is text meaning the message contains mostly legible text The content subtype is plain which means there aren t any formatting commands or anything like that embedded in the text Finally charset iso 8859 1 is a parameter in this case it identifies the character set the message uses The major content types are as follows text legible text image pictures and graphics audio sound video moving pictures message messages or pieces of messages multipart several different kinds of data in a single message application everything else Practical Issues There are really only two things you sometimes need to do with Eudora and MIME One is that it may occasionally be necessary to turn off quoted printable encoding Another is that you may want to know how to define mappings between MIME types and Macintosh types Turning Off Quoted Printable Eudora automatically uses quoted printable encoding if your mail or your plain text attach ments contain special characters If your recipients don t have MIME quoted printable can hurt more than it helps If that s the case just turn off the QP icon in the outgoing message icon bar when you are sending text files to those recipients Eudora User Manual Practical
301. k topmost so you can continue addressing the message or work in the Address Book Inserting Full Email Addresses rather than Nicknames Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual Inserting Full Email Addresses rather than Nicknames Sponsored and Paid modes only If the Expand nicknames immediately option is turned on in the Composing Mail settings dialog when you add a nickname to a recipient field using one of the above methods the nickname is automatically expanded into the full email address es it contains If the Expand nicknames immediately option is turned off you can still cause inserted nick names to be immediately expanded into their full email addresses by using one of the following methods of addressing the message m Hold down the Option key while clicking To Cc or Bec m Drag one or more selected entries to the To Cc or Bcc field m Hold down the Option key while double clicking one or more selected entries To field only Make Address Book Entry Command The Make Address Book Entry command is used to create entries in your Address Book and is especially helpful for making group entries You can use this command from anywhere in Eudora including open messages open mailbox windows the Address Book and the Directory Services window Also you can create Address Book entries anywhere in Eudora including open messages from the current selection by selecting the addresses you want then holding down t
302. k you can retrieve your mail for your IMAP account s using any of the following methods m Single Mailbox To check for new mail in a single IMAP mailbox 1 Open the mailbox either by double clicking on its icon in the Mailboxes window or by selecting it from the appropriate IMAP submenu under the Mailbox menu Choose This Mailbox under the submenu to open an IMAP folder as a mailbox or double click the folder s icon in the current mailboxes window IMAP folders can contain messages as well as mailboxes and other folders 2 Enter your password if prompted Eudora checks your mail for that mailbox resynchronizing the mailbox and updating it with new message headers from the IMAP server m Multiple Mailboxes To check your mail in multiple mailboxes even across IMAP accounts do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Mailboxes The Mailboxes window appears 2 Choose the desired mailboxes You can make selections from different IMAP accounts if you want 3 At the bottom of the Mailboxes window click Resync 4 Enter you password s if prompted Eudora opens all selected mailboxes and checks your mail for all of them resynchronizing them all and updating them with new message headers from the IMAP server s One or More IMAP Accounts To check for new mail in one or more IMAP accounts do the following Eudora User Manual Incoming Message Window 1 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities window a
303. k a Opens the stationery file for editing stationery item in Stationery window Option click a mailbox Compacts all mailboxes To compact the current mailbox only simply size display click the mailbox size display without using the Option key Option click acolumnin Selects and groups all messages sharing that message s value for that a message summary ina column for example all messages to or from that sender or sent on mailbox window that date or having the same subject including replies or the same priority or label Option drag Address Saves the entries as a text clipping with tab delimited entries To save Book entries to the Finder them in standard nickname format just do the drag without the Option key Click a mailbox column Sorts the messages in that mailbox by that column Use Option click header in a mailbox to sort in descending order or Shift click to add or remove the window column as an extra sort criterion see Shift Sort above Control Command Opens the folder on your computer that holds the attachment and click Attachment highlight the attachment Command click Opens or launches the attachment Same as a simple double click Attachment name icon or picture Command click URL Opens your web browser or other appropriate application and go to the URL same as a simple double click the URL Command click server Goes to that server to perform a query Same as a simple double c
304. l ESP is a Eudora feature that allows a group of people called a share group to collaborate and share a common set of files ESP automatically gives each member of the share group a copy of those files and when one of the members changes a file it brings all the other members copies up to date automatically ESP also makes it easy for the members of a share group to send email messages to each other Unlike other collaboration tools ESP uses only email to keep everyone in sync on the shared files so there s no need to maintain and administer a shared server ESP allows you to create and manage share groups within Eudora on both Mac and Windows platforms If you send and receive email through Eudora you can belong to an ESP share group When you join an ESP Group you designate a shared folder on your hard drive Eudora uses the shared folder to keep the most current copies of your group s documents together You and each member of your group have copies of the shared documents When you or a member of your group adds deletes or updates a document ESP auto matically adds deletes or updates all copies of the document in all of the members shared folder You can use ESP for projects at work and for family members at home to help them stay in touch For example you can create a share group by inviting members of your family to share their most current photos with each other When one member of the family adds a digitized photo to hi
305. l application can identify the item as a URL For example lt http www qualcomm com eudora gt The URL is automatically highlighted as an active URL in your message window The default highlighting is blue underlined text Clicking on the URL immediately takes the recipient to that web site or other location 45 46 Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manuall URL in an outgoing message d 2 a Fonte size caters BI 7 U To ralphpriziotiwy firm com From Daron Clifford lt DCliffordimy firm com gt Business Subject Eudora URL Cc Bec X Attachments Ralph here s the Eudora URL you requested www eudors com To insert a piece of text or a graphic in a message and link them to an URL see Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 42 Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora includes a built in spelling checker It can be used to check for misspellings in outgoing messages incoming messages text files and signature files The spelling checker includes a built in dictionary and also lets you create a custom user dictionary You can customize Eudora s spelling checker to do the following m Check your spelling automatically as you type or only when you request it manually m Ignore words containing initial capitals mixed capitals uppercase and lowercase char acters numbers and all capitals m Suggest alternat
306. lbox on that IMAP server You can empty the trash in one of three ways m By choosing Empty Trash from the Special menu empties your local POP Trash mailbox along with any remote IMAP Trash mailbox for any IMAP server you ve connected to recently m By pressing the Option key and choosing Empty All Trash Mailboxes from the Special menu empties both the local POP Trash mailbox and all IMAP Trash mailboxes you have created on the IMAP servers for your IMAP accounts m By pressing the Shift key and choosing Empty Local Trash Mailbox from the Special menu empties the local POP Trash mailbox only When you empty an IMAP Trash mailbox the messages in the mailbox are completely removed from both your computer the corresponding cache folder in the IMAP Folder and the IMAP server 129 Working with IMAP Mailboxes Eudora User Manual Note If the Empty Trash on Quit option is turned on in your Miscellaneous settings see Miscellaneous on page 276 when you quit Eudora your local POP Trash mailbox is emptied along with any remote IMAP Trash mailboxes for any IMAP account whose server you have been recently connected to That is the Empty Trash on Quit option and the Empty Trash command from the Special menu do the same thing 130 Organizing Your Messages Deleting Messages As a Safeguard against inadvertent deletions two steps are used to delete a message from your Macintosh first you put the message in the Trash t
307. lboxes and mail folders including all of them For complete details see Finding and Searching on page 149 Find submenu Find Find Again Enter Selection Search Search All Search Mailbox Search Mailfolder WAF HF Eudora User Manual Choose this command Find Again Enter Selection Search All Search Mailbox Search Mailfolder Window Menu Window Menu This happens Opens the Find dialog or make it active so that you can enter a text string and begin searching for that string in the currently open message window mailbox window or other searchable Eudora window Finds the next occurrence of the specified text string in the currently open searchable Eudora window Eudora wraps to the top of the window if it finds no occurrences in the remainder of the window Uses the selected text as the new Find string place this text in the Find field of the Find dialog whether that dialog is open and inactive or closed Lets you change find strings in the middle of a Find operation in the currently open window so that you can immediately look for new text without having to make the Find dialog active or even open it Also uses the selected text as the new default search string in currently open and subsequently opened Search windows subject to certain conditions Opens a new Search window to prepare for the search You set your search conditions and click the Search button to begin the search
308. ld corresponding to the button you clicked The real name if there is one is also entered If the record contains multiple addresses all of the addresses and their real names are entered To add an address from your Ph or LDAP query results to a message that is already open do the following 1 Make sure the message you want to address is active on top 2 From the Window menu choose Directory Services or press Command yY Or click the toolbar button or the window tab as discussed earlier 3 Perform the Ph or LDAP query 4 Choose arecord from the results returned by the server 5 Click the To Cc or Bcc button at the bottom of the window The email address in the selected record is added to the recipient field of the current message corresponding to the button you clicked The real name if any is also entered If the record contains multiple addresses all of them and their associated real names are entered in the recipient field Tip You can also drag a selected address from your query results Ph LDAP or Finger and drop it into any recipient field of an open new message window Note You cannot use the Jo Cc and Bcc buttons with Finger query results Making Address Book Entries After you have performed a Ph or LDAP query and have obtained the results in the Direc tory Services window you can make a new address book entry from your query results Ph or LDAP only To add a new address book entry based
309. le in your Documentation Folder under your System or Documents Folder Using Finger enter your query in the form name domain If you leave out the domain part Eudora supplies the sign followed by the name of your Finger server as specified in the Finger field of the Hosts settings or as specified in the SMTP field if the Finger field is blank So if your Finger server name is of the form xxx and you enter a query of name Eudora converts the query to name xxx 3 Fora Ph or LDAP lookup click Lookup For a Finger lookup click Finger The query is sent to your Ph LDAP or Finger server and the results returned by the server appear in the lower section of the window the large area under the Enter query field Scroll bars are provided to let you scroll through long results Note To stop a query at any time press the Escape key Esc or press Command period Results of an LDAP query from a public server 0 SSS LDR steve jobs SSS pH cap Address Book 7 2g Filters ko Directory Services T Enter query LDAP server is ldap fourd 1 com Number of matches 28 c Us mail STEVEGHEST COM givenname Steve an Jobs ch Steve Jobs c US mail SJobstex t com givenname Steve ani Jobs ch Steve Jobs mail Kall Tuborg rocketmail com givenname Steve en Jobs cn Steve Jobs Note Results may vary from server to server even within the same protocol e g LDAP You can use the tab key to cycle th
310. le information removed Turn on the Ask me each time setting default is off if you want to be warned when you try to 265 Moving Around 266 Eudora User Manual send or queue a message with styled text When the alert appears you can choose Both the default for plain and styled together or Plain Only or Styled Only If you select Plain Only the style information is not sent with the message When receiving styles pay attention to Bold Italic Underline Font Size Color Left right center Margins Excerpts lf any of these settings are on all are on by default that style appears in your incoming messages and in the message preview pane if the sender allows it Excerpts refers to excerpt bars included at the left of quoted text Formatting Toolbar Show formatting toolbar on lf you turn this setting on the formatting toolbar appears in new message windows This toolbar lets you easily format text styles in new messages If this is off the formatting toolbar is hidden in new message windows You can turn this toolbar on and off in the current message by clicking the formatting toolbar icon on the icon bar This setting also appears in the Fonts amp Display settings dialog Moving Around The Moving Around settings determine how you open messages and switch fields in Eudora To display the Moving Around settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Mo
311. lect and highlight the text you want to wrap 2 From the Edit menu choose Wrap Selection 41 Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manuall 42 m To unwrap text select the text you want then hold down the Option key and from the Edit menu choose Unwrap Selection m To copy wrapped text without taking the carriage returns hold down the Option key and from the Edit menu choose Copy amp Unwrap m Oo copy wrapped and styled text without taking the carriage returns or styles hold down the Shift and Option keys and from the Edit menu choose Copy Without Styles amp Unwrap Jo move text around in your messages or text files or to move text from other appli cation windows into your Eudora windows use Copy and Paste or the Macintosh standard Drag and Drop functions Note that the Require control key for text message dragging option in the Miscellaneous settings lets you restrict drag and drop operations to the use of the Control key Also note that the drag and drop options also apply to graphics inserted in messages by using the Insert Graphic command from the Text submenu from the Edit menu Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only You can insert pictures and horizontal rules into messages and you can create hyperlinks to Uniform Resource Locators URL out of selected pieces of text or selected graphics URLs are addresses that display Internet locations such a
312. lick URL in servers list in Directory Services window 238 Eudora User Manual Modifiers Press this key and do this task This happens Command click the title Opens or highlights the mailbox or folder containing that item bar of an open message or mailbox window Command click Adds a new button to the main toolbar between two toolbar buttons Command drag a Moves a button on the main toolbar Drops the button between two toolbar button elsewhere other buttons or at either end of the toolbar on the toolbar Command drag a Removes the button from the main toolbar toolbar button to the Trash on the Finder Command click a Changes the function of that main toolbar button toolbar button Shift click an item In many Eudora windows lets you select multiple items in sequence Click the first item in the sequence then Shift click the last item The whole group is selected Command click an item In many Eudora windows lets you make nonconsecutive selections and add or subtract an item from a group selection selects or deselects the item nonconsecutively Command Control Reverts all but your basic Eudora settings to their default values The Option Shift Settings command is under the Special menu Settings Modifiers That Show Up As New Commands on Eudora s Menus The table below lists all those modifiers that result in new commands modified command names appear
313. list make additional changes for that personality and click OK Note If you want to change other settings or use a separate set of mailboxes for a personality see Putting Multiple Users on One Macintosh on page 310 To change the name of a personality do the following 1 Click the personality name text in the Personalities window After a brief pause the name is highlighted in the edit box 2 Type the new name and press Return Deleting a Personality Note You cannot delete or rename your Dominant personality To delete a personality do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities window appears 2 Click the personality icon to highlight the personality you wish to delete You can select multiple personalities for deletion if desired 3 Click Remove or press the Delete key A dialog appears asking you if you really want to delete the personality A separate dialog appears for each personality you chose to delete 4 To delete the personality click OK or if you change your mind click Cancel Important Deletion of a personality cannot be undone When you delete a personality all messages associated with that personality both incoming and outgoing are assigned to your Dominant personality However if you recreate a personality with the identical personality name those messages will be reassigned to the new personality Creating a New Message from the Personality Window Note You
314. lity this option is checked by default Real name Enter the real name assigned to this personality generally a first and last name The text you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this personality and identifies the source to your recipients It appears before your return address in the message header SMTP Server Enter the name of the outgoing mail server for this personality Outgoing messages you send are routed through this server If the mail host selected by this personality s incoming mail account also runs on an SMTP server you can leave this field blank Return Address lf this address is different from the personality s incoming mail account enter the return email address used in outgoing messages and replies for this personality The address you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this personality And when a recipient replies to a message from this personality the reply is sent to this address If you do not enter an address in this field Eudora uses the personality s incoming mail account as the return address Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form loginname incomingmailserver For example suppose your incoming mail account is rclark worldmail myfirm com but your return address is slightly different rclark myfirm com You would then enter rclark myfirm comin this field If you do enter an address in this field first test the a
315. lk or Precedence list header This avoids a mail loop Redirect To Sponsored and Paid modes only Redirects messages to the specified email address es Redirected messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages Reply With Replies to messages with the selected stationery message Replies are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages Tip You can use this action to reply to specific senders with stationery telling them that you are on vacation I m out till the 10th I ll reply to your message when get back For more details see Creating an Auto Reply Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 144 Server Options Sponsored and Paid modes only Sets the message s server action to Fetch and or Delete See Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 81 Copy To Copies messages to the selected mailbox Transfer To Transfers messages to the selected mailbox 143 Creating an Auto Reply Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual 144 Move Attachments When a message is received that matches the filter criteria it places any attachments received with that message into a folder you specify rather than placing them in the default Attachment Folder as set in the Attachments settings see Attachments on page 255 A standard folder dialog appears that lets you choose where the attachment f
316. ll Checking Attachments C Minimal headers anly Full message except attachments over K d Full message with attachments 3 Inthe Server Configuration field choose IMAP 4 Fill inthe rest of the fields of this dialog as required Following are the descriptions of the IMAP options 88 Eudora User Manual Creating an IMAP Account Location Prefix This tells Eudora where to look for your mail on the incoming IMAP mail server Normally you enter a folder location representing the pathway to your mail boxes An example mailbox location prefix is usr mail lf you are not sure what to enter in this field ask your email administrator or your ISP Save password If this is on your password is remembered even if you quit and restart Eudora You won t be prompted to enter it Use background threading If this is on then when you check mail either or automat ically or manually Eudora checks your mail in the background so that you can perform other functions at the same time such as composing messages If this is off then when a mail check is initiated you must wait until Eudora finishes checking your mail before you can perform another function See also the Use separate thread for sending option in the Sending Mail settings dialog which lets you perform other func tions while Eudora sends mail in the background See Sending Mail on page 250 Send on check If this is on any messages queued in your Out mailbo
317. ll say quote read that portion of the message in a higher pitch and say unquote when finished Saving a Message to a File You can save one or more incoming messages to a separate text file on your computer by doing the following 1 In an opened message or a selected message summary choose Save As from the File menu The Save As dialog appears 2 Select the folder where you wish to file the messages and click Open Printing a Message To print the current message do the following m n an opened message or a selected message summary from the File menu choose Print to print one to several copies or choose Print One Copy to print one copy only Eudora automatically prints headers and footers on each page giving the message title page number and your return address Viewing IMAP Messages By default when Eudora checks your mail for your IMAP account it retrieves the Minimal headers for any new incoming message That means it does not retrieve the full message and it does not retrieve any attachments included with the message However the messages and attachments not retrieved remain on the IMAP server To view a new incoming IMAP message do one of the following m Open the message from the mailbox window in which it arrived and double click the message summary m Select the summary and press Return m Select the message summary and view the message in the preview pane The message window opens but only
318. llowing m Click once on the signature name text in the Signatures window After a brief pause the name is highlighted in the edit box Type the new name and press Return 62 Eudora User Manual Deleting a Signature Deleting a Signature To delete a signature do the following Note Eudora does not prompt you to confirm the removal of a signature 1 2 3 From the Window menu choose Signatures The Signatures window appears Click the signature icon you want to delete At the bottom of the Signatures window click the Remove button or press the Delete key The signature is deleted Including a Signature in Your Message To include a signature in an outgoing message do the following From the Signature popup on the icon bar in the composition window choose the desired signature Setting the signature for a particular message No Recipient No Subject oY Standard jh Alternate omerg lt rmoantgomerye myt irm com Business Rk Business Family JR Fun 6 Legal amp School To include a particular signature in all of your outgoing messages do the following 1 2 From the Special menu choose Settings Scroll the Settings category icons and choose Composing Mail The Composing Mail settings dialog appears In the Signature field choose a signature from the popup This signature is now linked to your dominant personality To link a signature to an alternate personality see Li
319. llowing 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Attachments icon The Attachments settings dialog appears 255 Attachments 256 Eudora User Manual Attachments settings Settings Sending Attachments Encoding method AppleDouble MIME Cd Applesingle W BinHex Uuencode data fork Q Always include Macintosh information Spell Checking cf Attachments Receiving Attachments Attachment Folder attachments Replying TEXT files belong to 2 TeachText _ Trash attachments with messages ef Receive MIME digests as attachments Fonts amp Display Date Display Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Sending Attachments Encoding method BinHex This specifies what encoding method to use for attached documents sent with outgoing mail The options are AppleDouble AppleSingle BinHex and Uuencode To change the method for just the current message use the Attachment Type popup in the outgoing message window For more details see Attaching a File to a Message on page 43 Always include Macintosh information off lIf you turn this setting on Macintosh resources and types are included in attachments if they are basic MIME types It may be advisable to turn this off when sending attachments to non Macintosh users Receiving Attachments Attachment Folder blank This setting lets you specify the folder in
320. lt setting is turned on in the Mailbox Display settings then at the bottom of every mailbox window just below the message summary list a Message preview pane appears The message preview pane shows the headers and body of the currently selected message in the message summary list The default preview pane is 12 lines high but this height can be resized up or down as described further below If the message currently being previewed is short enough you will see the full message in the preview pane headers and body If the full message will not fit in the preview pane Eudora normally scrolls the headers up and out of view so the preview begins with the first line of the message body Scroll bars appear so that you can scroll up to view the headers or down to view a long message body Only one message can be previewed at a time if multiple message summaries are selected in the mailbox window the preview pane is blank To toggle the keyboard focus from the message summary list to the message preview pane and back again press the Tab key Or click in the preview pane to put the focus there Note If the Mark read if clicked in or tabbed to or scrolled setting is turned on in the Mailbox Display settings any of these actions will change the status of an unread message to read blank When keyboard focus is in the preview pane Eudora treats the preview pane like an open incoming message window Thus you can do the following from th
321. lters See Filtering Messages on page 135 To assign a label to an existing message do the following 1 Choose the message or range of messages in the message summaries you want to label 2 From the Message menu choose Change then Label The Label submenu appears 3 Choose the label you want for this message When a message summary Is assigned a label the entire summary text only changes color to match the label color Note There are two kinds of labels Finder and Eudora Finder label colors and titles are assigned in the Macintosh Preferences dialog from the Edit menu in the Finder or in the Macintosh Label control panel Eudora label colors and titles are assigned using the Eudora Labels settings See Eudora Labels on page 264 Sender Recipient Column This Sender Recipient column shows the sender of the message for incoming messages or the intended recipients for outgoing messages To select all the message summaries from a particular sender or recipient do the following m Hold down the Option key and click the name of one of the message summaries from that person The summaries are grouped as well as selected To ungroup them perform a sort opera tion e g click the Date column heading Note Bugs in some incoming servers mail transport systems cause Eudora to display the sender of incoming messages as The reason is that the required From header is missing If you encounter such a
322. lters 141 APOP option 82 247 248 281 appears option 141 Apple Color dialog 264 AppleDouble 44 AppleDouble encoding 44 AppleDouble option 256 AppleSingle encoding 44 AppleSingle option 256 arrow in the Status column diagonal Redirected 113 left Replied 113 right Forwarded 113 Arrow these modifiers to switch messages option 267 As normal user notification 143 ASCII MIME 321 Ask me each time option 39 265 Attach Document command 43 45 Attachment Folder 133 Attachment Folder option 95 256 Attachment plug ins 43 Attachment Type popup 44 Attachments and UUCP 319 attaching files to outgoing mail 43 Attachment Folder changing 95 Attachments Folder 93 automatically deleting 133 333 copying 94 decoding 45 detaching from a message 44 displaying graphics attachments inline 94 dragging to attach 43 encoding 44 moving 94 moving via filters 144 opening 93 receiving 93 Attachments column 114 Attachments Folder 93 311 Attachments option 262 Attachments Settings 253 Attention sound option 86 269 Authentication option 82 247 248 281 Authentication SMTP 56 Auto Configure Settings 284 285 Auto Configure settings 284 Auto Configure Settings Automatic Configuration 20 Automatically as you type option 254 Automatically download HTML graphics option 98 260 Automatically Fcc to original mailbox option 251 Auto reply 144 B Background color option 259 background sending 251 background sending and receiving 89
323. ly 113 Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Eudora User Manual 114 y Message has been sent outgoing messages only Message was transferred from the Out mailbox before being sent Message cannot be sent because of an error Usually the error is in the recipient s email address Message is currently being sent Priority Column The priority column displays the message priority You can use the popup to set a partic ular priority or to raise or lower the priority Highest priority x High priority lt blank gt Normal priority Low priority Lowest priority Raise Raise the priority one level Lower Lower the priority one level For more information on message priorities see Setting the Message Priority on page 37 Attachments Column The Attachments column displays the attachment icon if a message has attached documents If the message does have attached documents use the Attachment column popup to see the file names of the attached documents and also to open the attachments Hold down the mouse button on the Attachment column of the message summary and either view the attachments on the popup or select one of the attachments to open Eudora User Manual Understanding the Components of a Mailbox Label Column This Label column displays the message label You can assign labels to incoming messages either manually by selected the label from the popup or automatically using fi
324. mailbox that contains the message returned by the search The Mailbox column has an associated popup menu To see this popup menu do the following 1 Click to select a message summary in the Results pane 2 Press and hold down the mouse button on the Mailbox column of that summary A popup menu appears showing the list of containing folders for the named mailbox Selecting one of the folders opens the Mailboxes window and highlights that folder in the window It also includes the mailbox itself By selecting it you open the window for that mailbox The message summary list is similar to the lists you see in regular mailbox windows except that in the Results pane the list often contains messages from multiple mailboxes rather than just one To sort the results list by Mailbox just click the Mailbox column heading as you would other headings Eudora sorts the messages alphabetically 165 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual 166 Note Keep in mind that any sorting you do in the results list will not sort the messages back in their home mailboxes The results list sort is independent of any current sort condi tions in original mailboxes You can do just about anything in the Results pane message list that you can do in any mailbox window summary list with few exceptions as noted later in this section The numeric display at the bottom left of the message summary list reflects the number of messages that
325. mation about your computer at the insertion point in the message body of an open composition message This is useful for including your system configuration when you communicate with the Eudora Technical Support Group about a problem you are having or when you send us information on a problem found in the software so that in either case we can determine what went wrong Sponsored and Paid Modes only A Scripts menu can be displayed on Eudora s menu bar if you have AppleScripts for Eudora You can add new AppleScripts to this menu You can delete AppleScripts as well You can create toolbar icons for the Script menu options the same way you create icons in Eudora To display Eudora s Script menu do the following 1 In the Finder create a new folder and name it Scripts 2 Move the new folder in the Eudora Stuff folder found in Eudora Application Folder If you have any AppleScripts for Eudora move them to this folder 3 Quit and restart Eudora 4 From the menu bar choose Scripts The Scripts menu appears showing the Apple Scripts you have in the newly created Scripts folder Scripts menu Scripts Open Scripts Folder Dictionary List Settings Open Sender s Home Page Photo Phind Thesaurus 235 Scripts Menu Sponsored and Paid Modes only Eudora User Manual To add or delete AppleScripts to the Scripts menu do the following 1 Choose Open Scripts Folder The Scripts folder appears S
326. minant From the popup menu choose the personality you want to enter settings for To set the remaining settings in this dialog for a personality just make sure that personality is selected in the popup Most of the settings for the Dominant personality are also reflected in the Checking Mail and Composing Mail settings categories If you change those settings here they are changed in the other Settings categories in which they appear More Checking Mail POP Mail Protocol POP Your selection in this field determines whether some of the other fields in this Settings dialog appear You should select the setting that corresponds to the protocol used by your incoming mail server for this personality See Checking Mail on page 246 for more details Authentication Passwords Specify which POP authentication technology to use for this personality Passwords Kerberos or APOP Ask your email administrator which one to specify for this personality Skip messages over K off 40 If you turn this setting on and a number is entered in the field incoming messages for this personality over the specified size are retrieved only in part These messages include the first few lines along with a statement that says the message Is not complete This can be useful if you have a slow connection Leave on server for days off blank If you turn this setting on and a number is entered in the field Eudora copies incoming messages for
327. ming updates Hotifications _J Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO the user s shared folder vy Ask before processing any Updates OUTGOING FROM the user s shared folder C Prefer that user does not change role displays warning tare x 5 You can determine which tasks each invitee to your group can do In the nitial Role area choose of the following roles 294 Eudora User Manual Configuring Shared Folder Settings m No Preference Full Member user sends and receives updates This allows the person you invite to receive and send files for the group either automatically or manually Broadcasting Member user only sends updates ignores any incoming updates This allows the person you invite to send files only to the group either automatically or manually Incoming files are ignored m Receiving Member user never sends updates but processes incoming updates This allows the person you invite to receive files only from the group either auto matically or manually Any changes you make to the shared folder are ignored The system default is No Preference 6 Ifyou want ESP to notify the person you invite when updates are coming into your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates INCOMING TO my shared folder box This box is checked by default 7 If you want ESP to notify the person you invite when updates are going out of your shared folder check the Ask before processing any updates OUTGO
328. mit edu and begin in the pub kerberos subdirectory Mail Transport Eudora uses the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP to transfer your outgoing mail to your SMTP server which in turn uses SMTP to send your mail to your recipients Mail from your recipients arrives in your incoming Post Office Protocol POP or Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP mail server where it waits for Eudora to retrieve it The mail Eudora sends and receives is constructed in accordance with RFC 822 and RFC 2045 MIME Eudora mail transport overview POP similar for IMAP POP Check Mail Your Macintosh POP SMTP Server SMTP Send Queued Messages The World at Large 317 Mail Transport 318 Eudora User Manual Outgoing Mail When you send an email message to someone Eudora uses SMTP to send the mail to your local SMTP server computer That computer then sends the mail to your addressee s computer also usually by means of the SMTP protocol Why doesn t Eudora talk directly to your addressee s computer First it would take a lot longer for your mail to leave your computer because your computer would have to call up each addressee s computer and deliver your mail Secondly some computers are hard to find it s much better to let another computer hunt for your addressee than to make your computer do it Finally sometimes your addressee s computer won t be available when you want to send mail The SM
329. mmand 48 spell checking outgoing messages as they are sent or queued 48 turn on manually 47 Check spelling option 254 checking mail and sending queued messages 55 from multiple Macintoshes 81 Checking Mail Settings 246 Check for mail every minutes option 58 75 checking your spelling 46 Index checkmark in the Status column Sent 57 114 Chili pepper icons 50 Choose a Word Services application dialog 309 Choosing a mode 25 Clear command 44 clock icon in the Status column Timed Queue 54 113 Close messages with mailbox option 276 Closing Eudora 27 Closing Tabbed Windows 175 Color option 266 Color popup 34 Color text options 40 Colors options 259 Command key option 267 Command click on title bar 31 Compact all mailboxes 118 one mailbox 118 Completely Plain button 35 Completely Plain option 40 Composing Mail Settings 252 Composition window 31 Configured server 209 Configuring Eudora 18 contains option or does not contain option 141 Control key option 267 Control key and drag and drop 42 copies of outgoing messages 57 Copy amp Unwrap command 42 Copy blind with Bcc field 36 with Name field in Address Book 184 Copy command 113 Copy original s priority to reply option 38 258 Copy To filter action 57 86 143 Copy Without Styles amp Unwrap command 42 Copying a message to a mailbox 36 134 Copying message summaries 113 copying messages via filters 143 Correct but slow international sorting option 277 CRA
330. n m Hold down the mouse button and drag to select a group 122 Eudora User Manual Using the Mailboxes Window m Press Command A to select all items in the Mailboxes window except the top level Eudora Folder Also you can drag mailboxes but not mail folders from the Mailboxes window to the main toolbar to add them as toolbar buttons Creating a New Mailbox or Mail Folder To create a new mailbox or mail folder in the Mailboxes window do the following 1 At the bottom of the Mailboxes window click the New Mailbox or New Folder button An untitled mailbox or mail folder is created and placed in one of the following locations m Ifa folder is selected the item is placed in that folder m f a mailbox is selected the item is placed in the folder containing that mailbox m f nothing is selected the new folder or mailbox is created root level of the mail folder within the Eudora Folder See Eudora Folders on page 311 for details 2 Type the new name into the name box 3 Press Return or Enter or click outside the name box If you like drag the new mailbox or folder into another folder The new mailbox or folder is added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus Renaming a Mailbox or Mail Folder To rename a mailbox or mail folder do the following 1 Click the name for the item After a short pause the name is highlighted for editing 2 Type in the new name and press Return or Enter or click outside the name box
331. n Suggestion for new feature International Bi Friday Daily Manna from the Net for Monday July 24 dawid Friday Fwd Daily Manna from the Het for Monday July 24 Haween Goel Friday Heed Location of any AMC Cinema Theater and Pacific Cin dawid Friday low rating text dawid Friday two chilies dawid Friday low high Matthew Treadwell 12 08 PMH 0700 WTE a couple tickets b rorisrkizok 4 Also by turning on an option in the MoodWatch settings you can have MoodWatch scan and display chili peppers on all of your stored mail See MoodWatch on page 274 for more information 51 Using MoodWatch for Incoming Messages 52 Eudora User Manuall Sending Messages and Checking Mail Sending or Queuing a Message After you compose a message you can send it immediately or put it in a queue to be sent later or at a specified time Sending a Message Immediately If you want to send your messages immediately instead of putting them in a queue to send later then be sure the mmediate send option is turned on in the Sending Mail settings dialog For more information see Sending Mail on page 250 To send the current message do the following From the Message menu choose Send Immediately or click or press Command E If you have the Immediate send option turned on but want to put the current message in the queue hold down the Option key and click Send The Change Queuing dialog appears and you can set detailed in
332. n Command with Search 156 setting Up the Search Conditions 157 Using the Target Popup 158 Using the Comparison Popup 161 Using the Value Fields 162 Using the Mailboxes Pane 162 Starting and Stopping the Search 163 Working with the Search Results in the Results Pane 165 Performing an Additional Search on the Search Results 167 Saving a Search Results Window 168 Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only 168 Managing Windows in Eudora 171 Normal Windows 171 Tabbed Windows 171 Anatomy of a Tabbed Window 172 Default Tabbed Windows in Eudora 173 Reorganizing Tabbed Windows 173 Opening and Activating Tabbed Windows 174 Creating a New Tabbed Window 174 Contents Closing Tabbed Windows Link History Sponsored or Paid mode only Statistics Window Sponsored and Paid Modes only Displaying the Statistics Window Printing the Statistics Report Task Progress Window Using the Address Book Printing Your Address Book Creating an Address Book within Eudoras Address Book Sponsored and Paid modes only Adding a Person to the Address Book Adding a Group to the Address Book Adding Entry Information Changing Moving Saving and Updating Entries Deleting Entries Addressing a Message from the Address Book Inserting Full Email Addresses rather than Nicknames Sponsored and Paid modes only Make Address Book Entry Command Creating a Group from the Address Book Finish Address Book Entry Command Sponsored and Paid modes only Using Automat
333. n IMAP account check for mail etc For more information on IMAP accounts see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 To create an IMAP personality as an alternate personality do the following 1 2 From the Special menu choose Settings Scroll through the Settings category list and choose Personalities The Personalities settings dialog appears Click the New button and type a name for the new personality in the Personality Name field e g My IMAP Mail Fill in the remaining fields as required For field descriptions see Creating a New Personality on page 71 Scroll through the Settings category list and choose Personality Extras The Person ality Extras settings dialog appears Personality Extras settings dialog showing IMAP options SS fattings Personality to Configure Personality Busi ness Internet Dialup More Checking Mail Mail Protacal Cad POP MAP Download Options Fae Miscellaneous fl W Minimal headers only Full message except attachments overa K gt Full message with attachments e Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server Fersonalities l k Ren Personality Extras MED More Sending Mail 6 it fl Stationery Auto Configure or Signature AY Standard Er Domain to Add Statistics i 6 With the new personality selected in the Personality popup choose IMAP in the Server Configuration field
334. n Your Group To be fully functional your group must contain members in addition to yourself Once you invite Someone you can determine at what level a role they will play within the share group You can invite members to the group who can receive only the group messages To invite ESP users to join your group do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Inthe left column choose the Share Group name to which you want to invite members 3 Click the User tab The User dialog appears 4 Click Invite The Share Group Role Settings dialog appears Note To add a user to receive the group s messages only press the Option key while clicking Invite The Advanced Add dialog box appears where you can enter the person s name and email address The user s name and email address is stored in your Users list but ESP doesn t send an invitation This user receives only email messages that have the group s shared documents as attachments Share Group Role Settings dialog Share Group Role Settings Choose the initial role and settings for the invitee s After choosing OK optionally edit the body of the invitation and send it to the person or people whom you wish to invite Initial Role W No preference cd Full Member user sends and receives updates d Broadcasting Member user only sends updates ignores any incoming updates C Receiving Member user never sends updates but processes inco
335. n page 69 or Checking for Incoming Mail Eudora User Manual 58 Note When you check mail either automatically or manually the progress window shows the name of the personality for which mail is currently being checked You can also control how your mail is transferred from the server and what happens to it on the server For details see Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 81 Note If you are using IMAP see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for more details on how to check mail from an IMAP server Checking for Mail Automatically To set up Eudora to automatically check your incoming account s and transfer new mail do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll the Settings category list and choose Checking Mail The Checking Mail settings dialog appears 3 Inthe Checking Mail settings dialog turn on the Check for mail every minutes option and enter the number of minutes that you want between mail checks This controls your dominant account If you are using multiple personalities see Checking for Mail Automatically on page 75 Note Fifteen minutes is a good minimum interval because checking mail more often puts an unnecessary load on your incoming mail server If the text field is empty or is set to 0 mail cannot be automatically checked If automatic checking is set the Check Mail command from the File menu shows you the next scheduled time for
336. n page 76 Domain to Add Enier the domain name you want Eudora to automatically add to an unqualified name addressed in messages sent from this personality An unqualified name is a name that doesn t have an at sign sign followed by a domain name This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain Also different personalities can be used to send messages to different domains For example you can use one personality to send work related messages to the domain myfirm com and another personality to send personal messages to the domain in your home email address or to your school account for example myschool edu 8 To save your changes and close the Settings dialog click OK In the Personalities window you will now see the new personality listed Also your domi nant personality appears in this window by default whether you selected POP or IMAP as its server configuration In the Mailboxes window you will see the new IMAP personality listed as a root mail folder This IMAP folder s name displays under the Mailbox and Transfer menus with its own submenu Note You can also create an IMAP personality via the Personalities Window from the Window menu 19 Creating an IMAP Personality 80 Eudora User Manual Receiving Messages Managing Your Mail on the POP Server During a mail check your incoming messages are transferred from your POP account on the incoming s
337. n plain text format which many applications can read If you are interested in securing your Eudora messages on your Macintosh you may want to consider a disk driver that can encrypt hard disk data If you need to enter a password the Password dialog appears Type in your password and click OK If you make a mistake before clicking OK simply backspace and re enter the password correctly Entering your password Password Please enter the rmontomeryamytirm com password Password Note Your incoming account password is case sensitive so the uppercase and lower case characters must be typed in using the exact case Be sure the Caps Lock key is off If your password is rejected an error message appears indicating that you have entered the wrong password To redisplay the Password dialog do the following From the Special menu choose Change Password As long as Eudora is running it remembers all of your passwords If you do not want it to remember if for example you are away from your Macintosh do the following m From the Special menu choose Forget Password The next time you check mail for any account you are prompted for your password again 59 Using Your Password Eudora User Manual 60 You can also make Eudora remember all of your passwords from one session to the next which means you never have to enter passwords again even if you quit and restart Eudora You want to do this only if your Macintosh is
338. n the Mailboxes window 123 creating using Mailbox menu 121 displaying columns 117 dragging to main toolbar to create buttons 123 Make it a folder option 121 message summaries 112 moving in the Mailboxes window 123 New command 121 opening 111 opening other 111 removing in the Mailboxes window 124 renaming in the Mailboxes window 123 resizing columns 117 size display 117 sorting messages in 145 space messages require 117 space wasted 117 transferring messages among 133 Mailboxes window 121 Main Toolbar 305 main toolbar settings 261 Make Address Book Entry command 192 from a mailbox 192 from selection 208 from the Address Book 208 Make Address Book Entry From Selection com mand 192 208 Make Filter Dialog 136 Make Filter dialog 136 Make Filter dialog buttons 138 Make it a Folder option 121 Make Label filter action 142 265 Make Personality filter action 142 Make Priority filter action 142 Make Status filter action 142 Make Subject filter action 143 Managing mail on the server Delete from Server action 116 Deleted on IMAP Server action 117 Do Nothing server action 116 Fetch amp Delete server action 116 Fetch from Server action 116 Fetch icon 84 Fetch server action 84 Mail Transfer Options dialog 85 Skip messages over K option 84 Trash icon 84 managing your mail on the POP server 81 Manual option 139 Map function keys to buttons option 268 Mapping between MIME and Mac types 323 Margins bullets 40 indents 40 normal 40 M
339. n you want in your filter or choose one or more message summaries in a mailbox 2 From the Special menu choose Make Filter The Make Filter dialog appears Make Filter dialog Make Filter Match Ej Incoming _ utgoing Ej Manual 2 From contains Catherine Prizia Q any Recipient contains Prinoe ei Subject contains Macintosh Eudora Action This mailbox will be created in Pail Folder D Transfer to existing None Chosen gt gt CA Delete Message transfer to Trash Add Details Create Filter 3 Choose a Match condition see the following topic 4 Choose an Action described later in this section 5 When finished click Create Filter Match Conditions The Match condition area of the dialog helps you set up the criteria that will determine whether or not a particular message will get acted on by this filter Eudora User Manual Filtering Messages You can specify what type of messages you are interested in filtering incoming or outgoing You can also specify a manual filter You can combine any of the three types of filters Incoming Outgoing and Manual Note If you create the filter using messages in your Out box Eudora automatically checks if the Outgoing and Manual checkboxes are selected If you create the filter using messages in any other mailbox besides Out Eudora automatically checks if the Incoming and Manual checkboxes are selected a Incoming Select Incoming for this fil
340. nalities from the Personalities window using the Check Mail button Note To turn off all mail checking settings for the selected personality turn off both the Check for mail every minutes setting and the Check mail on manual checks setting 2 9 Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only 280 Eudora User Manual Sending Mail Real name blank Enter the real name you wish to assign to this personality generally a first and last name This name is used in the From field of all outgoing mail for this personality SMTP Server blank Enter the name of the outgoing SMTP mail server for this personality If the Mail Host you enter above also runs an SMTP server you can leave this field blank Return address blank The return email address used in outgoing messages and recipients replies for this personality if this address is different from the personality s incoming mail account username mailhost Send mail whenever sends are done on If you turn this setting on queued mail for this personality is sent whenever Eudora sends queued mail If this setting is off queued mail for this personality is not sent when Eudora sends queued messages and you must send such mail manually Allow Authentication on If this setting is checked Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt
341. nd opens the Find window to search for a text string in the current message Searches for messages in mailboxes and folders Find Again in the current message Attach Document attach a file to a message Eudora User Manual Shortcuts Press these keys This happens Command Makes the selected text italic Command J Filter Messages execute manual filters on the selected messages Command K Make Address Book Entry make nickname Command L Address Book open it Command M Check Mail Command N New Message open one Command O Open open file Command P Print Command Q Quit Eudora Command R Reply Command S Save Command T Make the selected text plain Command U Make the selected text underlined Command V Paste Command W Close close the window or message Command X Cut Command Y Directory Services open the window Command Z Undo Redo Command Option Moves toolbar click Toolbar Arrows Moves from one message to another in a mailbox depends on your Moving Around settings Command Arrows Moves from one file to another in the Address Book Return or Enter Selects the outlined button in any dialog alert or window or open the selected message s Spacebar Opens a selected message summary or scroll its preview down through the message preview pane or close the current open message For long open messages scroll the message down one page
342. nd Searching features In Eudora performing a Find operation means searching for a word a phrase or any other string of text in an open message window or other single window that is currently on top To perform a Find you use the Find commands under the Find submenu from the Special menu You also optionally use the Find dialog Performing a Search operation means searching through some or all of your mailboxes and mail folders for messages that satisfy a certain search criteria The result is one or more messages containing the information you are looking for or having certain charac teristics you are looking for Such as being sent later than a certain date To perform a Search you use the Search commands under the Find submenu from the Special menu and you use a Search window Special menu displaying the Find submenu Special Filter Messaqes a6 J Wake Address Book Entry K Mlake Filter Find Find Find Again 0 Enter Selection Settings Plug in Settings Search Search All Search Search Mailbox WEF Change Password Forget Password Empty Trash search Mailfolder lt 43F Finding Text in the Current Window Using the commands found under the Find submenu you can find a word or a string of text in any of the following windows provided that window is currently open and on top m Message window incoming or outgoing m Text document window mw Signature file window
343. nd give each of them from one to five instructions on what to do with your mail that fits a certain set of criteria based on informa tion in the header of the message and the message body 135 Filtering Messages 136 Eudora User Manual Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Command The simplest filters are those that transfer incoming messages to a particular mailbox based on the sender of the message or one or more of the recipients For example each time you check your mail you may want to have Eudora take all of the incoming messages it receives from your friend Joe and automatically transfer them into a mailbox you have called Mail from Joe To get Eudora to do this you set up a simple filter If you are not familiar with filters the Make Filter command provides an easy way to learn how to use filters Once you get comfortable with the simple filters created this way you can go on to make more complex powerful filters using the Filters window Professional filter creators will find that the Make Filter command provides a rapid convenient method for making a simple transfer filter Also the Make Filter command is good to use when you want to eliminate unsolicited email messages SPAM Just create a simple filter that will move all messages from this person or address right into the trash mailbox To open the Make Filter dialog do the following 1 Open an incoming or outgoing message containing the informatio
344. nd maintain groups whose members share files Esoteric Settings a plug in file that adds extra settings dialogs to the Eudora Settings To gain access to these settings choose Settings from the Special menu Scroll to the end of the icon categories to display the esoteric settings Important Esoteric Settings should be used by advanced Eudora users only m Forward934 a plug in file that makes Eudora do RFC 934 style forwarding In short when you forward a message with this plug in installed Eudora sets the forwarded message off from the rest of your text by inserting lines at the beginning and end of the forwarded message rather than quoting the individual lines of the message or adding excerpt bars on the left Without the plug in installed you can hold down the Option key to suppress quotes in the forwarded message but you have to insert the separation lines yourself Kerberos Settings a plug in file that adds the settings necessary for using Kerberos with Eudora Consult your Kerberos administrator before using this file m Synch I O a plug in file that turns on synchronous I O which can improve compati bility with problem extensions and disk drivers Toshiba a plug in file for use with a certain model of Toshiba PowerBook hard drive to prevent the drive from corrupting Eudora mailboxes Documentation The Documentation folder contains the following files Note All PDF files can be viewed with Adobe Acrobat Reade
345. nection your dialup software will automatically dial your ISP and establish a connec tion This connection remains open until you close it or a timeout period elapses The settings below modify this behavior To display the Internet Dialup settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Internet Dialup icon The Internet Dialup settings dialog appears Internet Dialup settings ab Getting Attention Extra Warnings Mood Watch m x Jo Internet Dialup Miscellaneous Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Settings Internet Dialup E Don t check mail automatically if my Internet dialup software isn t already connected Disconnect my Internet dialup software after checking mail if Eudora connected it These settings only work if you are using Apple s OT PPP Apple s Remote Access or MacSLIP by Hyde Park Software cancer ox _J 2 5 Miscellaneous 2 6 Eudora User Manual Don t check mail automatically if my Internet dialup software isn t already connected off If you turn this setting on Eudora does not check mail automatically unless your Internet dialup software has already connected this avoids unnecessary connections to your ISP Disconnect my Internet dialup software after checking mail If Eudora connected it onJ When this setting is on your Internet dialup software disconnects a
346. nformation Mail Host outgoing mfi r mm com Mail Frotocol cad POP MAF Location prefix ef Save password Connection Sending Mail ef Check for mail every minutes _ Don t auto check when using battery ef Use background threading Composing Mail ef Send on check Download Options Minimal headers only Full message except attachments over ja0 K Full message with attachments Spell Checking Attachments IMAP only Location Prefix blank This tells Eudora where to look for your mail on the incoming IMAP mail server Normally you enter a folder location representing the pathway to your mailboxes An example mailbox location prefix is usr mail If you are not sure what to enter in this field ask your email administrator or your ISP Download Options IMAP only When you check mail for your IMAP account these options you can only choose one tell Eudora how much of each incoming message to retrieve from the IMAP server to your computer You can retrieve just the essential headers or alternately the entire message and any attachments under a specified size Minimal headers only on If this setting is on only a limited set of message headers and nothing else is retrieved for each incoming IMAP message The remaining headers the message body and any attachments are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later The headers tell yo
347. nk you Robert Note If you press the Command key and click the title area in the title bar a popup menu appears that lets you select the mailbox or mail folder containing the message Selecting the mailbox opens that mailbox selecting a folder opens the Mailboxes window and high lights that folder 91 Incoming Message Window Eudora User Manual 92 Title Bar The title bar provides information about the message including the name of the sender the time and date the message was sent and the message subject Icon Bar The icon bar is a row of objects displayed just under the title bar Click an icon to turn it on or off or select an item from a popup icon s menu Priority Popup Click the Priority button to display a popup where you can indicate if a message is of higher or lower priority than a normal message Most incoming messages have a normal priority blank box For details see Setting the Message Priority on page 37 Pencil Click the Pencil icon button to edit text in the body of a received message ELAH BLAH BLAH BLAH Click the BLAH BLAH BLAH icon button to see all message headers including HTML marking tags Fixed Width Click the Fixed Width icon button to convert the message text to the fixed width font selected in the Fixed Width Font popup of your Fonts amp Display settings See Fonts amp Display on page 258 This lets you view aligned text such as columns and tables more easil
348. nking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality on page 76 For either dominant or alternate personalities you can change the signature for a partic ular message by selecting a different signature or None from the Signature popup on the icon bar of the composition window If you want to be able to see your signature in the outgoing message before you send it do the following 1 2 From the Window menu choose Signatures The Signatures window appears In the Signatures window drag the signature item to the open composition window dropping it at your desired position in the message The signature text appears at that position 63 Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual 64 This is equivalent to cutting and pasting from the signature file You can drag more than one signature at a time However be sure to set the Signature popup on the composi tion window icon bar to None for that message so that no other signatures are sent with the message these won t be visible to you but they will be visible to your recipi ents Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only Stationery files are templates for outgoing messages If you find yourself repeatedly sending the same message save the message as a Stationery file and send it whenever you need to by using the New Message With or the Reply With commands This way you don t have to copy and paste text into a message you can just
349. ns in an outgoing message 50 icons in an outgoing message 33 in incoming messages 51 in outgoing messages 50 MoodWatch column 116 Move Attachments filter action 96 144 Moving Around Settings 276 Multiple accounts in Eudora 69 Multiple accounts on one Macintosh 310 Multiple personalities 57 69 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension MIME 321 Multi tasking 178 multi threading 89 248 251 N Name field 188 Names only option 268 Never make suggestions option 255 New command 121 New mail sound option 86 269 New Mailbox dialog 121 135 New Message To submenu 199 New Message With submenu 64 New Tabbed Window 174 Next message if unread option 267 Next message option 267 Next Time Queued Messages are Sent option in Change Queueing dialog 54 Next unread message option 267 Nickname auto completion option 252 Nicknames me 38 adding to the Quick Recipient List 199 None filter action 142 Nothing option 267 Notify Sender button 38 return a receipt 38 Notify User filter action 143 Nuke command 131 Numbers option 255 O Offline never check 178 Offline no connections option 246 Old Log file 312 On or after option in Change Queueing dialog 54 Index Only when requested option 254 Open Eudora 18 Open filter action 143 Open in Browser command 97 Open incoming message with error option 270 Open mailbox new mail only option 86 269 Open Selection command 87 Opening messages or mailboxes via filters 143 Opening tabbed w
350. ns to the Internet Mail standards that supports the inclusion of multi part and multimedia files such as sound and video in e mail messages Network A group of connected computers that can communicate with one another Networks enable computers to share files and resources and exchange messages Glossary Ph Ph Phone book is a protocol providing an online fully indexed fast access white pages directory service developed and freely distributed by the Computer and Communications Services Office at the University of Illinois at Urbana POPS Post Office Protocol 3 A protocol that provides a simple standardized way for users to access mailboxes and download messages to their computers This is also called the Incoming server Postmaster A special type of user responsible for maintaining the mail delivery system for a particular group of computers A postmaster is responsible for following up on queries from users and other postmasiers Internet standards require that the postmaster account be valid at every domain RFC Request For Comments In the Internet community RFCs are a numbered sequence of documents generally describing protocols for Internet communication An Internet standard protocol is also give a STD number in addition to an RFC number Only RFCs with a STD number are standards of the IETF Some RFCs are historical or experi mental and are not standards Others have not yet reached standard status Still others provide
351. ns to turn on Balloon Help then point to Hide Balloons an item on your screen to display a help balloon containing help information on that item Select Hide Balloons to turn off Balloon Help If you have an extended keyboard with a Help key you can press that key to turn Balloon Help on and off About This This online help topic displays a description of the new Release features in this latest release of Eudora and may also contain descriptions of the newest features in the most recent major release of Eudora Online Help Selects one of these items to obtain help on that topic Topics 234 Eudora User Manual Command PureVoice Help Payment and Registration Insert System Configuration Scripts Menu Scripts Menu Sponsored and Paid Modes only Description Displays help information for using the QUALCOMM PureVoice Player Recorder plug in and application for recording sending receiving and playing voice messages with your email This help topic only appears if when you installed this version of Eudora or selected earlier versions you chose an installation option that also installed PureVoice If you installed PureVoice it is available from the Attach submenu from the Message menu when a new composition message Is open Displays the Payment and Registration window where you can change to another Eudora operating mode Sponsored Paid or Light You can also register your copy of Eudora Inserts infor
352. nsfer menus choose New Or click New Mailbox or New Folder buttons at the bottom of the Mailboxes window The Mail boxes window is found under the Window menu When you create new IMAP mailboxes and folders these items are added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus and to the folder structure in the Mailboxes window See the following example of IMAP mailboxes and folders Example of IMAP Mailbox and Folder structure Mailboxes a Mew England States a Massechinet ts EA Western States Ge California E Oregon g Washington For more information on these mailbox and folder creation methods see Working with Mailboxes on page 111 Following is information about IMAP mailbox and folder manage ment m f an IMAP folder is selected in the Mailboxes window when you click the New Mailbox or New Folder button Eudora creates the new mailbox or folder inside the selected folder Eudora User Manual Working with IMAP Mailboxes mw When you create a new IMAP mailbox or folder the mailbox list is refreshed for that IMAP account and is updated in the Mailboxes window and on the Mailbox and Transfer menus See Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders on page 128 Note You can drag mailboxes and folders into other folders within the same IMAP account but you cannot drag IMAP mailboxes and folders into a folder in a different IMAP account m Renaming IMAP mailboxes and folders is the same as POP See Renaming a
353. nsfers the current message s to a mailbox that is not stored in your Eudora Folder within your System or Documents Folder and adds an alias for that mailbox to the Transfer and Mailbox menus This alias is deleted when you quit Eudora Note If you select Other from a folder submenu POP only then the mailbox alias is stored in that folder and is not deleted when you quit Eudora it remains there until you actively delete it Transfers the current message s to the selected mailbox that you have created Transfers the current message s to the selected mailbox stored in the folder or subfolder you have created Or select New or POP only Other as described above Transfers the current message s to the selected IMAP mailbox or select New as described above See Mailbox Menu on page 219 for more details and see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for the rules governing IMAP to IMAP and POP to IMAP as well as IMAP to POP transfers Special Menu This menu lets you perform a variety of maintenance and other special tasks in Eudora Special menu Special Filter Messages do Make Address Book Entry 4K Make Filter Find Sort Settings Plug in Settings Change Password Forget Password Empty Trash ESP Groups 22 Special Menu 228 Choose this command Filter Messages Make Address Book Entry Make Address Book Entry From Selection S
354. nt to Save or Discard your changes To edit the subject of an incoming message do the following 1 Open the message you can leave the Pencil button off and edit the subject in the icon bar not the subject in the message header 2 When finished click somewhere else in the message or close it The new subject appears in the message summary The contents of the Subject field of the message header remain unchanged Note If you reply to the message the original subject is used for the reply not your changed subject This lets you put information useful to you in the summary while trans mitting the original subject to your sender Eudora User Manual Using Active URLs Editing the subject of an incoming message OD z Bea Potter 10 46 AM 7 17 98 Fascinating 5 H H ELAH Fermat s Theorem Fascinating O Mime Yersion 1 4 a a Sender bpotterfwabbi ts Date Fri 17 Jul 1998 10 43 5970H To presnick sjanoff abird jdboyd From Beg Potter bpotter Subject Fascinating Using Active URLs Any string of text that Eudora recognizes as a URL Uniform Resource Locator that begins with http ftp gopher Ph Finger etc is active Active URLs are normally high lighted in blue text and underlined To open a World Wide Web location transfer a file do a gopher search use the Finger tool etc do the following m Press the Command key and click the URL or just double click the URL To specify what Intern
355. nto a different mailbox Just hold the mouse button down on the tow truck and drag it to an open mailbox window to a mailbox button on the main toolbar or to a mailbox icon in the Mailboxes window Message Body The message contains header information text any inserted graphics or audio files and any attachments sent with the message Attachments can be opened from within the message window or the preview pane by double clicking on the attachment icon name or picture or by holding down the Command key and single clicking on the item For more details on viewing and opening attachments see Receiving Attachments on page 93 You can specify what kind of text styles you want or don t want displayed in incoming messages Under the When receiving styles pay attention to option in the Styled Text settings just turn off the option for a style that you don t want to receive for example bold text All of the possible styles are on by default See Styled Text on page 265 Receiving Attachments Unless you have specified a particular folder for your incoming attachments see Speci fying an Attachment Folder on page 95 they are automatically decoded and saved in the Attachments Folder in your Eudora Folder located in your System or Documents Folder If you receive multiple attachments with the same name a number is added to the end of each duplicate name in the order the files are received Attachments appear in the
356. nts from a transmitted web page These compo nents or parts when retrieved are stored in your Parts folder in the Eudora Folder m Eudora does not retrieve any attachment files included with the message Instead Eudora displays each attachment in the message or preview pane by its icon and name pair with a small down arrow l called the Fetch arrow displayed next to the icon To retrieve an attachment that has a Fetch arrow click the Fetch arrow The attachment is retrieved and stored in your Attachment Folder or whatever folder you have designated to receive attachments Once the attachment is retrieved the Fetch arrow disappears for that attachment in the message window or preview pane and the attachment appears either as an icon and name pair or as a picture in the message if a graphics file and the proper settings are turned on Also once the attachment is retrieved it is now on your computer and you can treat it as you would treat an attachment retrieved from a POP server For more details on working with incoming attachments see Receiving Attachments on page 93 101 Viewing IMAP Messages Eudora User Manual 102 Full Message Except Attachments Over K If Full message except attachments over Kis turned on in the Download Options field for your IMAP personality and if you have entered a number in the text entry field the following occurs when retrieving messages m The full message is retrieve
357. nu In all of these cases when the message is sent a copy of the message is put in the spec ified mailbox with a checkmark w in the Status column indicating that the message has been sent If none of these options are used a copy of the outgoing message is put into the Trash mailbox after the message has been sent Note You can also set up a filter to save copies of outgoing messages in particular mail boxes based on information contained in the message See the Copy To action under Filter Actions on page 142 Checking for Incoming Mail There are two ways to check your incoming server and transfer mail to your Macintosh automatically and manually These are described later The incoming server is where your mail is received and stored until it is transferred by Eudora to your Macintosh You can use several different mail accounts with Eudora Your main account or dominant personality is specified in the Getting Started settings dialog Additional mail accounts or multiple personalities are specified in the Personalities settings dialog with additional options in the Personality Extras settings dialog For more information on the Personalities setting dialogs see Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 278 and Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 To set up and manage personalities see Using Multiple Personalities Sponsored and Paid modes only o
358. nu or press Command G Eudora looks for the next occurrence of the specified text in the currently open window If a match is found the text is highlighted and the window is scrolled to that selection if neces sary If no match is found the not found alert appears You can keep choosing Find Again or pressing Command G to find additional occur rences of the text in the current window or mailbox When Eudora reaches the end of the window or mailbox it will wrap to the beginning of the window to continue looking for the text You can also keep looking for additional occurrences of the text in the current window by repeatedly clicking the Find button in the open Find dialog Note When you close the Find dialog its contents are saved until you quit Eudora Changing the Find String to the Selected Text Enter Selection You can change the text you re looking for without opening the Find dialog or bringing it to the front Just do the following 1 In any open Eudora window select the text you want to use for your Find operation 2 From the Special menu choose Find then Enter Selection or press the Command shortcut The selected text is entered into the Find field of the Find dialog replacing any text that is already there This operation is performed whether the Find dialog is currently closed or open 3 If the window in which you want to find the text is not already the on the top window bring it to the front now or open
359. number between 0 and 1000000 one million If you try to make the text field blank Eudora inserts the default of 900 Other Set a changed message back to read only on When this setting is on you are warned if after editing an incoming message with the Pencil icon you try to make the message uneditable by either clicking the Pencil icon again or closing the message without first saving your changes Empty the Trash mailbox on when this setting is on you are warned if you try to empty the Trash mailbox via the Empty Trash command from the Special menu or its vari ants Once messages are deleted from the Trash they are completely gone If you turn on this setting and you also turn on the Empty Trash on Quit setting in the Miscellaneous settings you will be warned every time you try to quit Eudora while messages are in the Trash mailbox Try something that requires too much memory on When this setting is on you are warned if you try to do something that might take more memory than you have available Try to follow an ad s link while offline When this setting is on you are warned if you try to display an ad s web site when you are not connected to a server 2 3 MoodWatch Eudora User Manual MoodWatch In the MoodWatch settings dialog you can determine at what level you wish your messages to be monitored before a warning appears telling you that perhaps your message content may be offensive to your recipient
360. ny group actions box The box is checked by default ESP logs all incoming and outgoing shared folder changes in the a log file located in a subfolder of the Eudora folder If you chose Custom Member as your role you must click the Advanced tab to display the Advanced dialog to configure your role settings In this dialog you are required to make various decisions about how you want ESP to handle modifications to the shared folder It also enables you to choose how ESP should track group membership Advanced dialog Users Eudora y Settings y Notifications Advanced Shared Folder Actions Custom Member Incoming Outgoing Log New Items Ask first Ask first by Updated Items Ask first z Ask first Deleted Items Ask first Ask first Set Shared Secret In the Shared Folder Actions Custom Member area do the following m Determine which type of incoming or outgoing items New Items Updated Items or Deleted Items you want ESP to handle m From the popup lists choose one of the following Tohave ESP notify you before specific files in the shared folder are added updated or deleted choose Ask first Eudora User Manual Maintaining Group Members To have ESP modify specific files in the share folder automatically choose Do file updates To have Eudora ignore proposed updates to specific files in the shared folder auto matically choose
361. obclark janedoe inthe text box Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people Regular expressions generally lets you use wildcard characters such as the asterisk and question mark For more information on how regular expression commands are used and how you may enter text in the text field for this comparison value point your web browser to lt http sansecus usc es unixpages concepts_regrexp h Tans See Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 168 Using the Value Fields For any selection from the target popup that presents a text entry field you may enter any string of alphanumeric characters in the text field Some targets such as Age will result in a meaningful search only if you enter a numeric value in the text field When using the matches regexp value on the comparison popup note that some charac ters may take on special meaning when you enter them in the text field These include for example the asterisk and the question mark which serve as wildcards See the description of the matches regexp comparison value in the previous section Using the Mailboxes Pane Click the Mailboxes tab to bring the Mailboxes pane to the front of the Search window In the Mailboxes pane select the mailboxes and folders you want to search through if your desired mailboxes are not already selected automatically Standard selection methods apply in this pane
362. ocess then activates the full featured desktop email client without advertising Light mode This is an upgrade to the freeware version formerly Known as Eudora Light It includes fewer features than the other modes and a sponsor image or logo but no advertising Choosing an Operating Mode and Registering Eudora If you bought Eudora from a retail store or from a web site Eudora installs in Paid mode However if you would like to change the operating mode for example to Sponsored mode you can do so right in the Eudora program Remember to request a refund from QUAL COMM See the Eudora Quick Start Guide for refund information To change the Eudora operating mode after you install Eudora do the following 1 From the Help menu choose Payment amp Registration The Payment and Registration window appears Payment and Registration Window Payment amp Registration Which Eudora is right for you wf yf zy zy y Sponsored Mode Paid Mode Light Mode free with ads costs money no adaj free fewer features Keeping Current Register with Us Protile Find the Latest Update to Eudora Your Registration Code eno registration names 4 cno registration code ENA Enter your Code hb Go to the Eudora web site for more information 25 Choosing an Operating Mode and Registering Eudora Eudora User Manual 26 2 3 In the Which Eudora is right for you section m Jo use Eudora in sponsored mode cli
363. ollowing 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Replying icon The Replying settings dialog appears Replying settings Attachments Replying Fonts amp Display Mailbox Display Date Display Settings Reply to All By default use option key for sender only When option key is down Address Handling for Reply to All LI Include yourself Put original To recipients in Ce field nat To field _ Treat lists specially Reply to All will go to the mailing list Reply to the original sender Will not wark with all mailing lists Priority Handling ae a f Copy original s priority to reply Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Reply to all This setting specifies under what circumstances a reply goes to everyone in the original message By default use options key for sender only If this setting is turned on the Reply To All command appears under the Message menu and a normal reply is addressed to all the recipients of the original message Hold down the Option key to create a reply to just the sender When option key is down lf this setting is turned on the Reply command appears under the Message menu and a normal reply is addressed only to the sender of the orig inal message In this case you can hold down the Option key to create a reply addressed to the sender and all the recipients of the original message 25
364. ollowing address field Eudora enters the email address as it appears in the message You can change the email address if you like If you choose multiple message summaries in the mailbox window addresses are taken from each message and all are put in the new eniry If the open or selected message is an outgoing message the new entry will include all of the addresses in the To Cc and Bcc fields If the open or selected message is an incoming message the new entry will include the address in the From field If you have more than one address book in the In the Address Book popup choose the address book in which you want to place this nickname You cannot make a new address book using the Make Address Book Entry command If you want to put the nickname on your Recipient List check the Quick Recipient box To open the Address Book to add more information click Add Details When finished click Create Nickname The new entry is now in your address book Note If your new nickname has the same name as an existing nickname a prompt appears asking if you want to add the address es to the existing nickname or replace the existing nickname with the new address es Creating a Group from the Address Book Eudora User Manual When you use the Make Address Book Entry command in an open message or mailbox window Eudora uses your current Replying settings If the Reply to all By default setting is turned on or if it is not and y
365. om the popup menu The check mark next to the Mark as Deleted command is removed for the open or selected message and the hollow diamond next to the Mark as Deleted option on the Server Status column popup is also removed for the selected message To Remove All Messages Marked for Deletion To remove all messages marked for deletion in a particular IMAP mailbox open the mailbox and then do one of the following m Inthe message summary list click the mailbox size display button savz76K 15K m Press the Option key and from the Special menu choose Remove Deleted Messages normally the Empty Trash commana When you do either of the above actions all messages marked for deletion in that mailbox are permanently removed from the mailbox They are completely removed both from the IMAP server and from your computer Caution Once you remove marked messages using the above methods these messages are completely gone and cannot be recovered Automatically Deleting Attachments When you delete messages you can have their attachments automatically deleted as well You need to turn an option on in the Attachments settings dialog 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the category icons and choose Attachments 3 Inthe Attachments settings dialog turn on the Trash attachments with messages option Be sure the attachments are still in the Attachment Folder or the folder you have specified for attachments If you have
366. oming IMAP message can be retrieved at the following times m When you check your IMAP mail and the message first comes in Eudora User Manual Viewing IMAP Messages m When you open the message or perform some other action that retrieves it m When you manually retrieve the attachment Note The factor that determines what happens during mail retrieval is your selection for Download Options in the IMAP settings under the Checking Mail settings for your domi nant personality and the Personality Extras settings for any of your IMAP personalities The Download Options settings are available only when the Server Configuration field in those dialogs is set to IMAP for the relevant personality The three choices for Download Options are the following a Minimal headers only m Full message except attachments over K m Full message with attachments You can have only one of these options turned on at a time Following is each Download Options option is described Minimal Headers Only If the Minimal Headers Only option is turned on in the Download Options field for your IMAP personality the following occurs when retrieving messages m Eudora retrieves the full message including all headers and the entire message body m Eudora retrieves all of the message s inline components which include graphic files displayed in the message inserted hypertext links inserted horizontal rules and for example any internal HTML compone
367. on your Ph or LDAP query results do the following 1 Perform the Ph or LDAP query in the Directory Services window 2 Choose arecord from the results returned by the server 3 From the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry The New Nickname dialog appears 4 Enter a nickname and other information for this entry For more information on entering nicknames in the address book see Adding a Person to the Address Book on page 183 You can also highlight one or more addresses in the results Just hold down the Shift key and choose Make Address Book Entry from the Special menu Note The Make Address Book Entry command is not available for use with Finger query results 207 Finding and Using Lookup Servers from Around the World Eudora User Manual 208 Making Entries from the Current Selection To make entries from the current selection do the following 1 From anywhere in Eudora including an open message highlight the addresses you want 2 Hold down the Shift key and from the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry From Selection The New Nickname dialog appears 3 Enter the nickname and other information for this entry The new entry s Address es field will include all of the addresses that you selected Finding and Using Lookup Servers from Around the World Although you have entered directory servers in your Host settings you can also access many servers on the Internet through Eudora Some Ph and LDA
368. onality onto the composition window In any of these methods the information in the From field of the composition window changes to reflect the new personality This generally consists of the real name and the return email address for that personality These methods also provide a way to create a new outgoing message from any of your non dominant personalities Simply open a new message for your Dominant personality using one of the standard methods for example by clicking the New Message button on the toolbar then change the personality to your desired account using one of the person ality change methods above For information on how to change the personality associated with an incoming message see Replying from a Personality on page 75 Note The Personality submenu and the From field Personality popup are available only when you have multiple personalities set up 74 Eudora User Manual Checking Mail for Your Personalities Checking Mail for Your Personalities To check mail for one or more of your personalities do the following 1 2 3 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities Window appears Select the personalities for which you want to check mail Click the Check Mail button at the bottom of the Personalities window Eudora checks your mail for all of your selected personalities Checking for Mail Automatically To set up Eudora to automatically check your incoming acc
369. one of the attachments to open it For more details see the Working with Mailboxes on page 111 Viewing Graphics Attachments as Pictures in the Message To view graphics attachments as pictures in the message rather than as name and icon pairs turn on the Display graphics in messages option in the Fonts amp Display settings See Fonts amp Display on page 258 Displaying a graphics attachment as a picture in the message Alan Bird Tuesday A graphic Ly CA1 EA oender abird strange Mime Wersion 1 0 Date Tue 9 Dec 1997 17 08 36 0800 To Armand Armand Ricemytirm com From Alan Bird lt AlanBeyourtirm corm gt Subject A graphic This is an example of an inline graphic EUDORA Eudora lets you view any graphics attachment in PICT QuickDraw Picture format or if QuickTime version 3 or later is installed on your computer any format QuickTime supports can be displayed for example JFIF JPEG GIF TIFF PNG BMP Windows Bitmap MacPaint Photoshop QuickDraw GX Picture QuickTime Image File Silicon Graphics Image File and Targa Image File as well as movies sounds other multimedia content and more Eudora User Manual Specifying an Attachment Folder If the criteria above are not met or if the attachment file is too large for the available memory the graphics attachment appears in the message as a name and icon pair Also you can send and receive animated GIF images However to view the animation you
370. ons and the Match all Match any popup To stop a search at any time do the following m Inthe Search window click Stop or if the Search window is currently on top press Escape Esc or Command period The search stops and any results appear in the Results pane The button behavior is the same as described above as if the search had completed You can also stop a search using any of the above methods when a desired result appears in the Results pane Closing the Search window terminates the search without preserving your results Note For optimum search speed keep the Search window on top until the search is completed Searches run in the background tend to be a bit slower To perform multiple searches do the following 1 Begin one search 2 From the Special menu choose Find The Find submenu appears 3 From the Find submenu choose Search or press Command F Another Search window appears 4 Set up the second search in the new Search window and begin the second search Continue with additional searches if you like Eudora can perform all of these searches in tandem You can also start a search and then move to other tasks and Eudora will perform the search in the background Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Working with the Search Results in the Results Pane The following shows a sample Results pane in a Search window after a simple search Search window showing sample search
371. ont until you turn off the Fixed Width button or close the message 32 7 Troubleshooting Eudora User Manual Symptom Corrective Action You receive the following Your Mail Host incoming server name in the Getting message Started Settings found in Settings under the Special menu is probably misspelled Check with your ISP or email administrator for the correct spelling Domain name does not exist Any kind of TCP IP errors Check with your ISP or email administrator to make sure your TCP IP addresses are correct and entered in the proper fields 328 Glossary Alias In Eudora it s another name or nickname for an existing user s address On a Mac it s a file that is a link or pointer to some other file APOP Authenticated Post Office Protocol is an MD5 based login command that does not send passwords in clear text over the network Body The part of an e mail message that contains the main text of the message The body can contain text graphics sound and video clips Browser A World Wide Web client that uses HTTP to read and display HTML documents Client A computer or software program that accesses resources over the Internet It is also an application that requests a server to perform a function In the Internet mail envi ronment the term client indicates a mail user agent for example Eudora Pro Custom domain An Internet Mail component that is configured with special routing infor
372. oose Address Book or press Command L Or if the Address Book is in an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab In the Address Book choose which address book if more than one is set up in which Entering a new address book entry Address Book Address Book Filters te Directory Services Link History View By Nickname Nickname untitled nickname J Recipient List gt amp Eudora Nicknames 7 Family e a Full Name O E Mom E Sis First Name Last Name Uncle Joe F P untitled nickname This nickname will expand to the following address es b gt amp History List b Work address book G New Nickname E New Address Book Co C eo 3 In the highlighted text field type the nickname next to the nickname icon J OR type the nickname in the Nickname text field on the right side of the window The nickname entry appears in the list and you can now add information for this entry Note A nickname entered here should be the name you wish to type in a header field To Cc Bcc when composing an email message For example although your Dad s name is John Smith you can enter Dad as the nickname So when you address a message you can just enter Dad in the header field 4 When finished click anywhere or press Enter and the nickname appears in the list 5 Click the Personal tab The Personal dialog appears 183 Adding a Person to the Address Book Eudora User Manual
373. open a pre written message and edit it as necessary Settings stored in stationery files override most other settings For example the signature that was set when the stationery file was saved overrides any default signature you select in the Settings dialog You can however use the icons on the icon bar of the new message composition window to override any settings stored with the stationery You must keep your stationery files in the Stationery Folder located in your Eudora Folder found under the System or Documents Folder Then you can gain access to these files from the Stationery window the New Message With and Reply With submenus and the Stationery popups in the Composing Mail and Personality Extras settings Stationery Window Stationery files are created and managed from the Stationery window You can also open a new stationery message from the Stationery window To open the Stationery window do the following m From the Window menu choose Stationery Or if the Stationery window is in a visible tabbed window click its tab Sample Stationery window Eq New EE Remove Ee Edit Eudora User Manual Creating New Stationery The Stationery window displays a single column list of your stationery files Note You can select only one stationery at a time in the list you cannot select multiple stationery At the bottom of the Stationery window are icon buttons that you can use to add New delete Remove or
374. option turned on Usually administrators do not like to keep too much mail on the server because of space concerns m Keeping a lot of mail on the server may slow down the mail checking process m If you check mail from several computers at different times you can end up reading your messages two or more times However if you delete mail from your Trash folder the message is deleted on the server if the option to do so is on Eudora has an option that allows you to leave your email messages on the server for a specified number of days To transfer all of your new messages from the incoming server to Eudora and also leave copies of those messages on the server do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings categories and choose Checking Mail The Checking Mail settings dialog appears 3 Inthe Checking Mail settings dialog turn on the Leave on server for days option and enter the maximum number of days that copies of your email messages should be kept on the server This number is determined by the time it takes for you to check mail from all of your computers If this number is too small copies of your mail will not be delivered to all of your computers Important Make sure the settings in step 3 are identical on all of the computers from which you will be receiving your mail If you don t one computer will delete the mail from the server before you can receive it at another computer
375. or more details see the last entry in this table and also see Checking Your Spelling Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 46 Add Word Add AppleEvent aware word processing functions to the Service Edit menu Text Submenu The Text submenu under the Edit menu lets you apply text styles to selected text and the insertion point in composition messages text files signature files and stationery files Text submenu Plain Bold ffafic Underline Quote Unquote Riargins Color Font size Insert Horizontal Rule Insert Graphic Link to WAL 216 Eudora User Manual Choose this command Plain Bold Italic Underline Completely Plain Option Quote Unquote Left Center Right Insert Horizontal Rule Insert Graphic Edit Menu This happens Applies the selected style to the selected text or to text typed beginning at the insertion point Removes all style information from the selected text or the insertion point and returns it to plain text in the default font and size Sponsored and Paid modes only Quote Adds one level of quoting excerpt bars or sidebars to the selected text or paragraph or to the paragraph containing the insertion point Unquote Removes one level of quoting Sponsored and Paid modes only Aligns the paragraph s containing the selected text or the insertion point to the left margin the center or the right margin Sponsored and Paid mode
376. ore information Cc Eudora looks through all text in the Cc field of the message header even if it extends beyond one line or includes hundreds of addresses Eudora looks through all text in the Bcc field of the message header works for outgoing messages only even if it extends beyond one line or includes hundreds of addresses This includes Fcc folder carbon copy text which is generated when you select a mailbox from the Fcc menu normally the Transfer menu while the cursor is in the Bcc field of the open outgoing message composition window Any Eudora looks through all text in all of the recipient fields of the message Recipient header To Cc and Bcc as described above Using the Comparison Popup The values on the comparison popup may change depending on your selection in the target popup The following values on the default comparison popup when the Anywhere target is selected are described Where the values for this popup change for a particular target those values are described in the corresponding target description in the previous section The is and is not values however generally mean the same thing on those popups as well The comparison popup changes for all targets in the middle section of the target popup except Summary Comparison Conditions to match contains The target must contain some specified text in order to be a match contains The target must contain the specified text as a se
377. ou hold down the Option key when selecting Make Address Book Entry the new entry will include all of the recipients of the message plus the sender However if the Include yourself setting is turned off and the current message is an incoming message your address is not included in the new entry Creating a Group from the Address Book You can take several of your existing nicknames and group them together under one composite nickname For example you can quickly combine your Family Friends and School nicknames under a composite nickname called Everybody The Everybody entry contains the nicknames Family Friends and School rather than their expanded email addresses However if you address a new outgoing message to Everybody it will be sent to all of the email addresses contained in the Family Friends and School entries To make entries from the Address Book do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Address Book Or if the Address Book is in a group of tabbed windows click its tab The Address Book window appears 2 Choose several different entries in the entry list hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence or the Command key to make nonsequential selections 3 From the Special menu choose Make Address Book Entry The Make Address Book Entry dialog appears Make Address Book Entry SS Make Address Book Entry Group Information Hickname untitled nickname Group Name Cid This nickname will
378. ount s and transfer new mail for a particular personality do the following 1 2 From the Special menu choose Settings Scroll the Settings category list and choose Personalities The Personalities settings dialog appears In the Personalities settings dialog choose the desired personality in the Personality Popup Turn on the Check for mail every minutes option and enter the number of minutes that you want between mail checks for that personality Note Fifteen minutes is a good minimum interval because checking mail more often puts an unnecessary load on your incoming mail server If the text field is empty or is set to 0 mail is not automatically checked Replying from a Personality To easily reply to a message from a particular personality do the following 1 2 3 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities Window appears Select or open the message you wish to reply to Drag the selected message summary or drag the open message by the Tow Truck icon we into the Personalities window and drop it on the desired personality item A new reply message is created with the address of the selected personality Replies and Personalities When you respond to a message Eudora assigns your response the same personality under which it received the message For example if your Business personality receives a message your replies to that message are sent from your Business personality 19 Reply
379. outgoing messages by default do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll through the Settings category icons and choose Styled Text 3 Inthe Styled Text dialog turn the Show formatting toolbar option on or off Note You can t apply text styles to text you type in the header fields 33 Using the Composition Window 34 Eudora User Manuall Font related popups and buttons generally apply styles to any text you have selected in the message body or to text typed from the insertion point onward Paragraph related buttons apply styles to the whole paragraph s containing the currently selected text or the insertion point Click the popup menus to select the text font size and color Click the other buttons to apply their styles or remove the style The Link button requires that text or a graphic be selected The popup menus and buttons on this toolbar are described below Font SIZE y Color d N K Bas T _ T pw m Font Makes the selected text a specific font typeface Size Makes the selected text a specific size Color Sponsored and Paid modes only Makes the selected text a specific color Note that No Color is the default for text on your computer usually black Bold Makes the selected text bold Italics Makes the selected text italic Underline Makes the selected text underlined Unquote Sponsored and Paid modes only Removes one level of quoting excer
380. ows The first default tabbed window contains the following four tool windows to display this window choose one of the following member windows from the Window menu m Mailboxes m Signatures m Stationery m Personalities The second default tabbed window contains the following three tool windows to display this window choose one of the following member windows from the Window menu m Address Book m Filters m Directory Services You can reorganize these default tabbed windows any way you like Your new organization will be preserved when you quit and restart Eudora Reorganizing Tabbed Windows You are not restricted to the default tabbed window arrangements in Eudora You can mix and match tabbed windows any way you like At one extreme you can have each of the seven tool windows in its own normal window displaying one function At the other extreme you can have all seven tool windows combined into one tabbed window displaying seven functions In between you can have multiple tabbed windows open at once mixed and matched to suit your purposes To have a tab showing in a single normal tool window do the following m From the Window menu choose Tabs while that window is open To move a window from one tabbed group to another do the following m Drag the window tab from the first group and drop it onto the second group If you drop the window tab onto another tab in the second group the new window tab is inserted at t
381. ox to send commands to your POP server immediately instead of waiting for a previous command to be completed This is faster but your POP server may not be able to handle it POP3 is Post Office Protocol version 3 the latest version Sending Mail SMTP Server blank Enter the name of the outgoing mail sever for your principal email account for example smtp1 myfirm com All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server If the computer that runs your primary incoming mail account is the same as your outgoing mail server you can leave this field blank Use mail exchange records SMTP Servers Only off Check this box so when Eudora makes an SMTP connection it asks your domain name server to tell it which host would be best for accepting your mail Ask your system administrator about this before turning this setting on The setting works only with Open Transport Directory Services Ph LDAP Server blank Should you decide to use directory services enter the name of your directory services server that allows you to look up people on the Internet or your local intranet for example ph myfirm comor ldap myfirm com Your ISP or your email administrator can provide you with the server names to use for each type of direc tory service available to you that is either Ph or LDAP services Finger Server blank Should you decide to use Finger directory services enter the name of the server that runs t
382. p to display it by clicking on the tab m Serves as a drag handle that lets you drag the tool window from one tabbed window to another tabbed window so that you can reorganize your tabbed windows and create new ones You can also reorder your tabs within the same tabbed window by dragging the tab to where you want it A tool window in the normal state no tabs can be converted to the tabbed state by doing the following m From the Window menu choose Tabs while the window is open To convert the window back to the normal state do the following m From the Window menu choose Tabs again A check mark next to the Tabs command indicates that the tool window is in the tabbed state No check mark indicates that the tool window is in the normal or untabbed state The Tabs command is active only when the currently active window is a tool window or a tabbed window group The title displayed in the title bar of a tabbed window is the name of the active window in the tabbed group Eudora User Manual Default Tabbed Windows in Eudora Note If there is room enough in a tabbed window each window s tab contains both the icon and the text label associated with that tool window If there is not enough room in the tabbed window only the icon appears on each tab Default Tabbed Windows in Eudora Eudora comes with two default tabbed window groups one containing four tool windows and the other containing three for a total of seven tool wind
383. parate word to be a word match If the target contains the specified text as part of another word it is not considered a match For example the text info is a match if it appears by itself but not as part of the word information does not lf the target does not contain the specified text or attribute if it s a contain non attribute target it is considered a match is If the target exactly equals the specified text it is considered a match is not If the target does not exactly equal the specified text or attribute if it s a non attribute target it is considered a match 161 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual 162 Comparison Conditions to match starts with If the target begins with the specified text it is considered a match ends with If the target ends with the specified text it is considered a match matches This stands for matches regular expression regexp Note Regular expression is an advanced and complex method of searching for text You can enter any expression in the text field that would be recognized by regular expression commands Regular expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters For example if you are searching for messages sent to you by two people choose From in the target popup then choose matches regexp Type their usernames between brackets separated by a vertical pipe symbol such aS b
384. play all of the message but no longer than the Macintosh display screen and as wide as the Width setting in this dialog Composition windows zoom to the height specified by the Height setting 20 if blank Display graphics in messages on This setting controls the way Eudora displays graphics that are either inserted into the body of a message or attached to the message as an attachment file If this setting is on Eudora displays both inserted graphics and graphics attachments as pictures in the open incoming message window and in the message preview pane in mailbox windows and Search windows If this setting is off Eudora displays inserted graphics as icons and displays graphics attachments as name and icon pairs See the Automatically download HTML graphics setting description Show formatting toolbar off lf you turn this setting on the formatting toolbar appears by default in new message windows This toolbar lets you easily format text styles in new messages If this is off the formatting toolbar is hidden by default in new message windows You can turn this toolbar on and off in the current message by clicking the formatting toolbar icon on the icon bar Use Live Scrollbars off If you turn this setting on the contents of the window scrolls smoothly through the window as you drag the scroll slider in a Eudora window If this is off the contents of the window do not move as you drag the scroll slider When you release the slide
385. ppears 2 Choose the IMAP personalities for which you want to check mail Use the normal selection methods in this window that is click a single item to select it use the Shift key for a consecutive group of mailboxes or drag select a group and use the Command key to make non consecutive selections 3 Click the Check Mail button check maii 4 Enter your password s if prompted Eudora resynchronizes all mailboxes and folders in all of the selected IMAP accounts updating each mailbox and folder with new message headers from the corresponding IMAP server To check your mail in all of your IMAP accounts without having to select anything do the following 1 Without selecting anything in the Personalities window press the Option key and click the Check Mail button check mail 2 Enter your password s if prompted Mail is checked for all of your IMAP accounts Incoming Message Window To open an incoming message for either POP or IMAP do the following m Double click its message summary in a mailbox window or if the message summary is currently highlighted from the File menu choose Open Selection or press Return Incoming message window Sender alang server yourtirm com Mime version 1 0 Date Wed 10 Dec 1997 10 37 25 0700 To Carole lt caroleg mytirm com gt From Robert Montgomery lt montgomerda yourtirm com gt Subject new products Carole Lan you send information on your new products Tha
386. pt bars from the selected text or the insertion point Quote Sponsored and Paid modes only Adds one level of quoting excerpt bars to the selected text or the inser tion point Align Left Sponsored and Paid modes only Aligns the selected paragraph to the left margin Align Center Sponsored and Paid modes only Aligns the selected paragraph to the center of the page Eudora User Manual Using the Composition Window Align Right Sponsored and Paid modes only Aligns the selected paragraph to the right of the page Indent Out Sponsored and Paid modes only Removes one level of indent from the selected paragraph Indent In Sponsored and Paid modes only Indents the selected paragraph indented once to the left Completely Plain Turn on to remove all formatting from the selected text Note that this button does not remove inserted objects such as horizontal rules graphics and hyperlinks Bulleted List Sponsored and Paid modes only Makes the selected text a bulleted list Insert Horizontal Rule Sponsored and Paid modes only Turn on to insert a horizontal line at the position of the insertion point in the message body The rule may be placed above or below the current line if the cursor shares the line with text For more details see Inserting Objects in Message Text Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 42 Link to URL Sponsored and Paid modes only Turn on to convert the se ected text or graphic into a
387. ption 268 Small icons only option 268 SMTP Authentication 56 343 SMTP Server option 250 280 Sorting 145 in descending order 146 sticky 145 with the shift key 145 Sound like the word you typed option 255 sounds playing via filters 143 Sounds in Getting Attention settings Getting Attention settings sounds 270 Space amp Tab Converter plug in 307 Speak filter action 143 speech via filters 143 Spell Checking Settings 49 spelling checking 46 checking manually 47 dictionaries 255 insertion point vs double click for correcting misspelled words 48 quoted text ignored 48 254 red and underline highlighting not a style 48 spell checking outgoing messages as they are sent or queued 254 Spelling submenu 47 Splitter cursor 305 Sponsored mode 25 26 stationery 64 and multiple personalities caution 77 replying with 67 109 replying with via filters 68 replying with via filters 143 sending with 67 setting a default stationery file to use with all outgoing messages 67 68 stationery dependent settings 64 Stationery Folder 66 Stationery messages opening 66 67 stationery messages creating 65 Stationery option 66 147 253 283 Statistics 176 changing color 285 changing graph type 286 changing settings 285 displaying window 176 printing report 176 Statistics settings 285 status Unsent 114 e Sendable 55 e Sendable or Unread 37 113 344 Index lt blank gt Read or Unsendable 113 changing via filters 142 Forwarde
388. r the window is updated to show the contents at the new position Automatically download HTML graphics on When this setting is on and you open an incoming message containing HI ML graphic images you can see the pictures right in the open message or in the preview pane You must be connected to the Internet at the time you open or preview the message If this setting is off HTML graphic files cannot be retrieved when you open or preview the message The HTML graphic image appears as a broken graphic icon You can retrieve the graphics at any time and online by opening the message and clicking the Get HTML Graphics button on the icon bar of the open message Eudora User Manual Mailbox Display window Turning this setting off does not affect HTML graphic files already retrieved That is even if you turn this setting off HTML graphics that are already downloaded will still appear as pictures in the open message or preview pane rather than as broken graphic icons HTML graphic files that are downloaded to your computer via this setting are stored in your Cache Folder which is in the Eudora Folder contained in your Documents Folder This Cache Folder is managed the way cache folders are managed in web browser appli cations Files continue to be added to the folder and when the folder reaches a certain size the oldest least used image files are deleted to make room for new image files For more details see Eudora Folders on page 311
389. r which can be installed as a plug in when you install Eudora m This Eudora User Manual in PDF format m The Eudora Quick Start Guide in PDF format m Ihe New Feature s Manual PDF format 315 Sources 316 Eudora User Manual m The Using LDAP in Eudora PDF format m The supplementary document Character Sets and Eudora in PDF format m Additional documentation for plug ins you can optionally install with Eudora e g Adobe Acrobat Reader but only if these plug ins are installed m The release notes for this version of the Eudora software Sources Anonymous fip ftp eudora com QUALCOMM s Eudora Division has an anonymous ftp server ftp eudora con that has information and software related to Eudora Included are POP3 Ph and password changing servers the serialpop program current product information dialup files and more Eudora Web Site Eudora has its own web site that you can access for general information technical support services and Eudora product information Go to the following web site lt http www eudora com gt Eudora Information The information in this manual was correct at the time of release However some of this information may already be out of date For the latest information about Eudora send email to eudora info qualcomm com Obtaining an Internet Email Server Post Office Protocol POP and Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP servers are available for a variety of platfo
390. r Dominant personality is your principal email personality It is the personality Eudora uses whenever you do not specify otherwise Also it is the personality that is asso ciated with all mail stored before you began using multiple personalities One easy way to create a new outgoing message from any of your personalities but particularly your alternate non dominant ones is the following 73 Changing the Personality of a New Message Eudora User Manual 1 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities window appears 2 Double click the desired personality icon or click the personality icon and press Return A new composition window is opened that is addressed from that personality Changing the Personality of a New Message To change the personality of a new outgoing message once you have opened it use one of these methods m Select the new personality from the Personality popup in the From field of the message header Personality popup in the From field Jeannette Wyatt 4 10 PM meeting at 5 p m ont Size J Coors BIU EEE Feel To Jeannette Wyatt From Robert Montgomery lt montgomeryourfirm corr gt EIEEE Subject meeting at5 p m a DE l Fun Bcc Legal duties Attachments Office Sc ho m Select the new personality from the Personality submenu found under Change in the Message menu m Open the Personalities window from the Window menu and drag the icon for the desired pers
391. r details see Requesting a Return Receipt Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 38 i Plug ins Optional Of You may see additional icons that when clicked enable a Eudora plug in if that plug in is installed in your Eudora Stuff folder when you start Eudora For more details see Using Eudora Plug ins on page 306 The example shown is the icon for QUALCOMM s PureVoice Player Recorder plug in MoodWatch ijj ice cube There is no offensive language in the message 1 chili There may be a slight bit of offensive language in the message 2 chilies There may be offensive language in the message 3 chills There is offensive language in the message Send or Queue Click Send to send this message immediately Click Queue to put this message in a queue waiting line in your Out box to be sent later If the Immediate send option is on in the Sending Mail settings the button is labeled Send If this option is off the button is labeled Queue For details see Sending or Queuing a Message on page 53 Formatting Toolbar Text Styles The formatting toolbar when displayed appears just under the icon bar It consists of a series of popup menus and push button icons that let you apply styles to the text in the current message To show or hide the formatting toolbar in the current message only click the text styles toolbar icon on the icon bar see the previous section To show or hide the formatting toolbar in all
392. r hide the contents of an IMAP folder in the Mailboxes window click the triangle button next to the folder icon as you would with POP folders However double clicking on an IMAP folder opens the folder as a mailbox so that you can view the messages contained in the folder Double clicking on a POP folder by contrast shows or hides the folder contents in the window If the incoming mail server for at least one of your personalities is an IMAP server then an additional button appears at the bottom of the Mailboxes window the Refresh button This button is used to update the list of IMAP mailboxes and folders for one or more of your IMAP accounts See Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders on page 128 When moving mailboxes in the Mailboxes window via drag and drop you cannot drag a mailbox from one IMAP account to another You can drag a mailbox to a different folder within the same IMAP account Using the Mailbox and Transfer Menus with an IMAP Account Use of the Mailbox and Transfer menus is generally the same in this case Following are important IMAP related points to keep in mind The root folder for an IMAP account is listed at the bottom of the Mailbox and Transfer menus after POP items A separator separates the POP section from the IMAP section Remember that the name of a root IMAP folder is the personality name for that account If you have more than one IMAP personality each one is represented at the
393. r important dates specific to this person To save your changes to the Address Book do the following m From the File menu choose Save or press Command S Or if you close the Address Book click Save in the warning dialog Note If your Address Book has duplicate entries Eudora recognizes only the topmost entry of the duplicates Changing Moving Saving and Updating Entries Ilo modify an Address Book entry choose the entry from the list and edit the fields as appropriate Important If you change a nickname be sure to correct any entries that reference that nickname m To move an entry from one file to another choose the entry and simply drag it to the destination file m Io save your changes to the Address Book choose Save or press Command S Or if you close the Address Book click Save in the warning dialog 190 Eudora User Manual Deleting Entries To refresh and update your recipient list and address book hold down the option key and open the address book this rebuilds your address book s table of contents Deleting Entries To remove one or more Address Book entries choose the address books from the list and click IBF Remove To undo the deletion close the Address Book without saving and click Discard in the alert For multiple selections use the Shift key to select items in sequence and the Command key to select items out of sequence To remove one or more nickname files choose the nicknam
394. r off in the Getting Attention settings dialog For information see Getting Attention on page 268 Eudora User Manual Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server When you receive notice that new mail has arrived choose Eudora from the applications menu on your computer Mail usually arrives in the In mailbox unless you are using filters to transfer messages If the In mailbox is not already open open it using one of these methods m From the Mailbox menu choose In Press Command 1 m Click the In mailbox button jae on the main toolbar Messages are listed in the order they are received with the most recent message listed last Unread messages are designated by a blue bullet in the Status column of the message summary Unread messages in the In mailbox D E f Eaa_ S__S_a_ _a__aa _ ojo E menere e oeme SS ai Martin Maiman Sunday 2 Re Appearance date a a James R Kuzma Sunday 5 New Might before Christmas Jerry Schroeder 8 34 Att 1 Daycare o ai F5142K 195K__ 4 ill To open a message do any one of the following m Double click anywhere on the message summary m Highlight the message summary and press Return m Highlight the message summary and from the File menu choose Open Selection Also you can view the message in the message preview pane located at the bottom of the mailbox window if the message summary is highlighted Incoming messages are saved indefinitely in the In
395. r the cursor is in an open message window or in the message preview pane After finishing a messages This specifies whether to automatically open the next message after you delete or transfer the current message or page past the end of it Nothing means nothing is opened Next message means the next message in the mailbox is always opened Next unread message means the next unread message in the mailbox is always opened could be way down the list Next message if unread means the very next message in the mailbox is opened but only if it s unread More keystroke options Tab to switch fields option tab to insert tab off If you turn this setting on and your cursor is in the body of a message pressing the Tab key moves the cursor to the To field and pressing the Option and Tab keys together inserts a tab at the insertion point If this setting is off and your cursor is in the body of a message pressing the Tab key inserts a tab and pressing the Option and Tab keys together moves the cursor to the To field Return switches among header fields on When this setting is on pressing the Return key moves the cursor to the next header field in outgoing messages If this is off pressing the Return key inserts a carriage return into outgoing message headers Exchange Find and Search menu command keys off Turn this setting on if you want to switch the Find menu command key Command F to the Search menu command key Option Command F
396. rch string asterisk is a multiplier It will match zero or more of the previous character Eudora User Manual Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only Character representation plus is a multiplier It will match one or more of the previous character A caret is the start of the line backslash is an escape character which means that the next character will not have a special meaning question mark is a multiplier It will match zero or one of the previous character brackets containing caret and other characters means any characters except the character s after the caret symbol in the brackets dollar is the end of the line pipe is OR It requires that the joined expressions have parentheses around them Here are a few examples What they match E a matches Eudora Etcetera Ea ho p matches hop hoop hoooop but not hp e a matches eta eda e1a it only matches Eta if the matching is case insensitive etc matches etc but not etc eE a matches eta and Eta 169 Regular Expressions Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual You can find further information on regular expressions on the web for example the following web site www robelle com library smugbook regexpr html 170 Managing Windows in Eudora Windows in Eudora for the Macintosh exist in one of two states Normal Tabbed Normal Windows A normal window is a standalone win
397. re s a passage of text that you might type on your computer Tl est d montr disait il que les choses ne peuvent tre autrement car tout tant fait pour une fin tout est n cessairement pour la meilleure fin Without any encoding this might show up on your recipient s screen as ITl est dimontri disait il que les choses ne peuvent btre autrement car tout itant fait pour une fin tout est nicessairement pour la meilleure fin This corruption happens because SMTP cannot handle the special characters However if you and your recipient both have MIME quoted printable encoding would be used and your text would show up properly Tl est d monti disait il que les choses ne peuvent tre autrement car tout tant fait pour une fin tout est n cessairement pour la meilleure fin 321 MIME Labeling 322 Eudora User Manual While your mail was actually in transit however it would have looked like this ABI1 est d E9montr E9 disait il que les choses ne peuvent EAtre autrement car tout E9tant fait pour une fin tout est n K9cessairement pour la meilleure fin BB Base64 encoding is another way to protect binary data from the SMTP mail system However Base64 makes no attempt to be legible and is most appropriate for non text data MIME Labeling The other important part of MIME is that it lets mailers communicate what kind of data is in a message or part of a message The primary mechanism used for this
398. re in the message You can manage these attachments as if you had retrieved them from a POP server For more details on managing incoming attachments see Receiving Attachments on page 93 Note The number you enter in the text entry field for the Full message except attachments over K option is a size limit that applies to the attachments only and not to the message itself Thus if you specify an attachment size limit of 20K and the message itself is 100K then during a mail check the full 100K message will still be retrieved In this case too a 15K attachment would be retrieved during the mail check but a 40K attachment would not and would be displayed with a Fetch arrow so you could manually retrieve it later Full Message with Attachments If Full Message with Attachments is turned on in the Download Options field for your IMAP personality the following occurs when retrieving messages m Entire messages with headers are retrieved a All attachments regardless of size are retrieved Eudora User Manual Viewing IMAP Messages Actions That Retrieve IMAP Messages lf the Minimal Headers Only option is turned on in the Download Options field for your IMAP personality the following actions can fully retrieve a partial message from the IMAP server to your computer m Open the message m Preview the message in the message preview pane m Reply to the message m Forward the message m Redirect the message m Send the message a
399. real address es associated with that nickname Submenu Insert the quick recipient nickname selected from this submenu along with commas if necessary to separate it from other addresses or nicknames Note If there are no nicknames on your Quick Recipient List this submenu contains only the item No_Quick_Recipients_Defined See Using the Recipient List on page 198 for more details Submenu Inserts the quick recipient nickname selected from this submenu and expands the nickname into its associated real address es including commas where necessary Edit Menu 215 Edit Menu Eudora User Manual Shoose as This happens Message Submenu Selects one of the message plug in operations Plug ins from this submenu to modify the text in an incoming or outgoing message or to otherwise perform message related operations on the current message You can also use the About Message Plug ins command on the Apple menu to see what message plug ins you have installed For more details see Using Eudora Plug ins in the General Reference chapter in the online user manual Sponsored and Paid modes only Allows highlighted message s in a mailbox s message summary list or an open message to be read to you aloud Sponsored and Paid modes only Submenu Uses the commands on this submenu to instruct Eudora s built in spelling checker to check the spelling of a message text file signature file or stationery file or the selected text F
400. results Search peach _ Search results Search Hail boxes Results ce E Mailbox Rich Gardner Gide AM 7 6 98 A 3 Admin Beach Party Pete Resnick 18 03 AM 7 6 98 2 All Re Beach Party Randall Gellens 5 53 PM 7 6798 A 2 All Re Beach Party Wide Gouge 11 12 AM 16 9 97 Mow ies WideScreen Film Festival Oct 31 Nov 17 Jim Lacy Prd AM 8 12 96 books used book store in Long Beach Horm Thomas 9 55 AM 8713 96 Steve Jonoff 1833 5 51 PM 5rz20r96 Edie Levenson 12 56 AM 5721 96 books Re used book store in Long Beach writing Long Beach Book Festival info Hold Re Long Beach Book Festival info re 3 2 Tom Elliott 12 45 PM B 1l2 96 3 books Re used book store in Long Beach 3 2 3 Third Annual Widescreen Film Festival Schedule Oct 31 Nov 17 Long Beach CA WEEKEND 1 Friday October 31 2 88 om The Lost Boys 7mm special quest Joel Schumacher Saturday November 1 1 68 pm Sleeping Beauty Technirama Amm print Special quest Scott MacQueen 4 60 om Panel Discussion Editing presented by ACE and Motion Picture The Results pane can be thought of as a cloned mailbox window with a few new features that do not appear in regular mailbox windows with some variations on the actions you perform in regular mailbox windows The Results pane has all the columns of a regular mailbox window with the addition of a new column Mailbox that does not appear in mailbox windows The Mailbox column lists the
401. resynchronized For example you have just one mailbox in your IMAP account an In box where you receive all your mail You check for mail which results in new messages being transferred to the In box Then you go to another computer and delete some of the messages in your In box Then you go to a third computer and change the status of some of the messages in your In box By performing different functions to your IMAP In box from several computers you now need to resynchronize the In box Resynchronization updates all operations performed on the mailbox from all computers that have access to the mailbox In fact in some cases other users might be able to access your mailboxes or at least some of them which adds an additional variable of change to the equation Resynchronization is done on a mailbox by mailbox basis You can also resynchronize an IMAP folder as a mailbox if it contains messages To resynchronize an IMAP mailbox do one of the following 127 Working with IMAP Mailboxes Eudora User Manual 128 m Open the IMAP mailbox either by choosing it from the Mailbox menu or by double clicking its icon in the open Mailboxes window from the Window menu To open an IMAP folder as a mailbox choose This Mailbox from the folder s submenu on the Mailbox menu or double click the folder icon in the open Mailboxes window m Check mail for the IMAP personality that is open the Personalities window from the Window menu chick the IMA
402. rieve settings previously configured from an Application Configuration Access Protocol ACAP server ACAP was originally designed for use with IMAP accounts If you keep your Eudora settings stored on a remote ACAP server then whenever you log in to your email account from any computer or laptop you can retrieve your Eudora settings from the ACAP server Therefore you don t have to set Eudora up with your settings on each computer from which you check your mail To retrieve your Eudora settings from an ACAP server to any computer on which you are running Eudora make sure the computer is connected to the Internet Note See your email administrator or your ISP for the information to enter in the fields of this Settings dialog To display the Auto Configure settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Auto Configure icon The Auto Configure settings dialog appears Auto Configure settings Settings ACAP Server Configuration ACAP Port 674 is usual Fetch Configuration Fetch Settings Mow Statistics Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below ACAP Server Configuration ACAP Username blank Eniter the user name by which you log in to the ACAP server if the server requires a user name ACAP Server blank Enter the name of the ACAP server on which your Eudora settings are stored ACAP Port 674 Enter the communications port n
403. rmer location in the menu system or in windows or dialogs or will no longer operate behind the scenes if it is not normally visible in Eudora when installed Note Make sure you do not put the removed message or resource plug in into one of the other allowable installation folders such as the Eudora Application Folder This will just leave the plug in installed from a different location the next time you start Eudora Word Services Eudora lets you add word service applications to the Eudora editor for use with outgoing messages However only applications that support the Word Services Suite can be used To add a word service to Eudora do the following 1 From the Edit menu choose Add Word Service The Choose a Word Services appli cation dialog appears 2 Browse through the dialog and find the desired application on your system and double click the application icon The word service is added to the Edit menu To use this service for a current outgoing message choose it from the Edit menu To remove the word service from the Eudora editor and from the Edit menu hold down the Option key and choose the item from the Edit menu 309 Printing Eudora User Manual Printing You can print the following items in Eudora m Current open message m Selected message summaries the messages inside m Open text file window m Open signature file window m Open stationery file window m Selected text within an open message text file w
404. rmission for some of these mailboxes that is not only can you read the messages stored in them but you can also change or delete these messages But for other such mailboxes you may only have read Eudora User Manual Working with IMAP Mailboxes permission that is you can read the messages in them but you cannot change or delete them Find out from your email administrator or your ISP what particular permissions you have for such mailboxes that you share with others Using the Mailboxes Window with an IMAP Account Following are important IMAP related items to keep in mind when working with IMAP mail boxes and folders in this window Each IMAP personality has its own top level folder also called a root folder in the Mailboxes window The name of the folder is the personality name associated with the personality All POP personalities on the other hand are kept under one root folder called the Eudora Folder by default After your first mail check for your IMAP account you will see an In box under that account s root folder in this window The In box is the assigned In mailbox for all new messages coming into your IMAP account Each IMAP account has its own In box IMAP folders may be given a unique icon to distinguish them from POP folders because IMAP folders may contain not only mailboxes and other folders but also messages POP folders can contain mailboxes and other folders but not messages To show o
405. rms If you would like to run a POP or an IMAP server on your own system we suggest the following servers m Macintosh QUALCOMM s Eudora Internet Mail Server EIMS EIMS supports POP3 and IMAP4 as well as LDAP and Ph directory services EIMS requires a Macin tosh 68030 or higher Mac IIx Ilcx SE 30 or better or a PowerPC m Windows NT QUALCOMM s Eudora WorldMail Server WorldMail supports POP3 and IMAP4 as well as LDAP and Ph directory services A Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 server or workstation is required m UNIX QUALCOMM s QPopper Popper is available via anonymous ftp from ftp eudora com QPopper versions are available for a number of UNIX systems m VAX VMS VAX VMS systems may try either the Multinet package from TGV or IUPOPS3 available via anonymous ftp from ftp indiana edu Eudora User Manual Mail Transport For information on QUALCOMM s family of Internet email servers send email to lt eudora rep gqualcomm com gt or click to display the Eudora web site lt http www qualcomm com eudora gt Ph Server Source Code A server for the Ph protocol is available via anonymous ftp from ftp eudora com Password Change Server Three sample UNIX servers for Eudora s Change Password command from the Special menu are available via anonymous ftp from ftp eudora com Kerberos To learn more about the Kerberos authentication system that is supported in this version of Eudora anonymous ftp to athena dist
406. rom other users it incorporates the changes according to the settings you chose for the group for example with or without notification and with or without archiving ESP alerts the user to potential conflicts if two modified versions of a document arrive simultaneously Changing Group Information ESP allows you to change the configuration of a group to meet the changing needs of its members The same tabs User Eudora Settings Notifications and Advanced you used to create a group and configure its attributes can be used to change those of an existing group To make changes to an existing group do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The Groups window appears 2 Inthe left column choose the group you wish to change 3 Click any of the tabs and make your changes in their respective dialogs Eudora User Manual Configuring Global ESP Settings 4 When finished click OK Configuring Global ESP Settings You can control the type of messages received by the shared folder through the use of filters and automatic processing actions Note We recommend that you retain the default settings To configure your group settings do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups The ESP Groups window appears 2 Click Settings located a the bottom of the Groups window The Group Setting dialog appears Group settings dialog ESP Settings ESP Automatic Filters Precedence im Run automatic
407. rough the entries that have email addresses 4 Work with your query results if desired See the following sections 204 Eudora User Manual Results of a Ph query from a public server Directory Services milos forman Enter query Ph server is gutentag ce columbia edu milos forma S O FORMAN MILOS No known email address SCH OF ARTS INSTRCTN PROFESSOR Cretired Results of a Finger query finger helpmberkeley edu cap Address Book 2g Filters ko Directory Services Enter query finger server is profile berkeley edu help berkeley edd U C Berkeley finger Human Mame Service This finger service accesses a database with records for all current Faculty staff and students at UC Berkeley fou may search on lastname last and First names email account name or phone number Examples Last Name Finger nismith berkeley edu Exact Match on Last Nome Finger smith berkeley edu Last and First Name Finger smith oerkeley edu Email Account Finger e smith berkeley edu Exact Match on Email Account Finger e smith berkeley edy Phone Number Finger p 9el5 berkeley edu Finger p 29815 berkeley edu Finger p 6429815 bherkeley edu To access the help text Finger help berkeley edu To change your preferred email address use the UL Berkeley Directory Update on UC Berkeley s home page Please send questions to cpadmingprofile berkeley edu Looking Someone Up Keeping the Connec
408. roup Wizard Choose a folder to store your copies of the shared documents and a mailbox to receive messages associated with the group See Tips on Using ESP on page 288 for details ESP processes the invitation adds you as a member of the group and sends an RSVP message to the member who invited you to join When the inviter s copy of ESP receives your acceptance you ll be sent a membership update message which will add the other group members to your list Note Until you receive an introduction from another group member ESP doesn t asso ciate those members with you as part of the group When all introduction messages are received and answered you are a member of the group Leaving a Group When you want to leave a group ESP removes the group from your list of available groups and sends a message to the other group members asking them to remove you from the group To leave a group do the following 1 From the Special menu choose ESP Groups 2 Inthe left column choose the name of the group you want to leave 3 Click Leave located at the bottom of the Groups window The Leave dialog opens Leave dialog E Are you sure you want to leave the Business Plan share group 4 Inthe Leave Group dialog click Leave Working with the Shared Folder Eudora User Manuall 302 ESP creates a message to other group members announcing your departure from the group This message is attachment deletes you from ot
409. rs Link to URL dialog Link to URL Enter the URL http Aye eudora com Remove Link Create Link 3 Type the URL you wish to hyperlink the text or graphic to then click Create Link To unlink click Remove Link To cancel the linking function click Cancel The text or graphic is now linked and is highlighted and underlined in the message When your recipient receives the message opens it and clicks the hyperlink their default browser or other application opens and goes directly to the URL you specified Note Other protocols such as ftp mailto ph etc may be linked in this manner Other Formatting Options If you turn on the Word Wrap A in the composition window you do not need to use carriage returns in the body of your message When you send the message the text is automatically wrapped meaning that carriage returns are inserted at the end of each line of text with roughly 76 characters per line This makes the message legible on the recip ient s computer Also you can turn Word Wrap on for all messages by default by turning on the Word wrap option in the Composing Mail settings see Composing Mail on page 252 However if youre using stationery the word wrap setting saved with the stationery file will override the Composing Mail setting You can always turn on the Word Wrap icon in the composition window which will override all other settings To manually wrap text do the following 1 Se
410. rver s password for your current session or have Eudora save your password To create an auto reply do the following 1 Write your auto reply message using Eudora s Stationery functions Once the auto reply message is written name and save it as stationery See Using Stationery Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 64 2 From the Window menu choose Filters The Filters window appears 3 Inthe Match section choose a header from the Header popup Select a header that matches the header in the messages to whom you want to send your auto reply lt lt Any Recipient gt gt is the most common for an auto reply Important If you choose lt lt Any Recipient gt gt all recipients including mailing list you subscribe to will receive your auto reply For example to set an auto reply only to messages sent to your user name just select lt lt Any Recipient gt gt then choose contains In the text box enter your user name You can match others as well but it may cause a large number of messages to be auto replied to 4 Inthe Action section choose Reply with in the first popup Eudora User Manual Sorting Messages 5 Inthe text box to the right of the first popup enter the name of the stationery 6 Click OK The stationery message you created will be sent to the people you indicated in this filter Important Remember to delete this filter when you want your auto reply message to stop Also if you are gone for an extende
411. s off messages are not spell checked when sent or queued If the warning alert appears and you click Cancel every subsequent attempt to send or queue the message will cause the alert to be displayed until there are no misspellings in the message or until you click Send Anyway Ignore words with These settings control whether Eudora s spelling checker checks or ignores certain common classes of words during a spelling check The spelling checker always ignores quoted text Quoted text also called excerpted text is normally preceded by continuous excerpt bars one bar for each level of quote on the left side of the text Eudora assumes that this text was originally from another message and does not need to be checked Eudora User Manual Attachments Initial capitals Nostromo off lIf you turn this setting on the spelling checker ignores any word that begins with a capital letter such as a proper name If this is off the spelling checker checks all such words against the spelling dictionaries Mixed capitals noSTRomo off lf you turn this setting on the spelling checker ignores any word that contains a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters If this is off the spelling checker checks all such words against the spelling dictionaries Numbers n8str9m0 off lIf you turn this setting on the spelling checker ignores any word that contains numbers If this is off the spelling checker checks all such words against
412. s command do the following 1 From the Message menu choose New Message or click the New Message icon on the toolbar 2 Enter the text you want into the message body and fill in the headers as appropriate Subject copies etc 3 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 65 Moditying Stationery 66 7 Eudora User Manual Saving a stationery file using Save As dialog Cy Stationery Folder lt Macintosh a Test Stationery File Fject tA Vacation Ed Save as _cancel_ Thank You Letter save C Guess Paragraphs kJ Include Headers 4 Stationery GO To Stationery Folder In the Save as text field enter a name for the file Check the Stationery option box Click the Go To Stationery Folder button you must keep the file in the Stationery Folder in your Eudora Folder within your System or Documents Folder To create the stationery file click Save You can also create stationery files from messages in your Out mailbox no matter what their message status sent unsent queued etc Just do the following 1 2 Open the Out mailbox Open a message or select one or more message summaries From the File menu choose Save As and follow the previous procedure You may need to edit the resulting stationery file to remove any extraneous headers or other text if you saved multiple Out box messages See Saving a Message to a File on page 146 Modifying Stat
413. s done with that message and the next message is filtered Important Actions also function from top to bottom If a message s criteria does not match the first action the action is skipped and the next one is invoked Only a Transfer or a Skip Rest action completes the filter s function A Transfer to implies a Skip Rest You can change the width of the filters list to create more or less space for your list To do this put the mouse pointer over the separator line to the right of the list until the pointer changes to a splitter cursor then press and hold down the mouse button and drag the line to the left or right Eudora places a small icon to the left of the filter in the list for some action you have selected for that filter These icons may be of different shapes and they represent certain actions you selected for this filter lcons appearing to the right include the bullet indicating a Skip Rest don t filter this message any further the right arrow indicating a Transfer action and the right double arrow indicating a Copy action Icons appearing to the left include the dinosaur which indicates that the filter has not been active for 30 days and may not be needed anymore Also if the filter name is shown in color it means you have chosen a Make Label action in that filter and have selected that label color for the action Filter Criteria The Match Area Filters Window Note See the section t
414. s only Submenu Applies the specified margin or formatting to the paragraph s containing the selected text or the insertion point Normal applies the normal margin flush left with the left side of the message if alignment is also Left Indent indents one level Indent 2 Indent 3 and Indent 4 indent the specified number of levels With Bullets converts the selected paragraphs or the current paragraph to a bulleted list but this option is only available if the Send styled mail with option in the Styled Text settings is set to HTML Sponsored and Paid modes only Submenu Applies the specified color to the selected text or the insertion point The options are No Color black by default Red Green Blue Yellow and Brown Submenu Applies the specified font to the selected text or the insertion point The options are all fonts installed and available on your system Submenu Applies the specified size to the selected text or the insertion point Options are Smallest Smaller Small Normal Big Bigger and Biggest These settings do not correspond to specific point sizes and what your recipient sees may depend on the default font size set in their email software For example Normal may be 12 points on your system but 14 or 18 points on your recipient s Sponsored and Paid modes only Inserts a horizontal separator line at or above the current cursor position This command is only available if the Send styled mail with option in th
415. s option 82 248 281 and UUCP 320 Left right center option 266 Light mode 25 26 Link History 175 Link to URL button 43 Link to URL command 43 Link to URL option 41 Index Local timezone option 264 LOGIN or PLAIN SMTP authentication 56 Look like the word you typed option 255 Look or sound like the word option 255 Macintosh color picker 264 Macintosh server POP or IMAP how to obtain 316 MacPaint file format 42 94 MacSLIP and OT PPP settings 276 Mail drop 319 Mail Folder 312 Mail Folders creating during transfer 135 Make it a folder option 121 New command 121 Mail folders creating in the Mailboxes window 123 creating using Mailbox menu 121 moving in the Mailboxes window 123 removing in the Mailboxes window 124 renaming in the Mailboxes window 123 Mail Host option 247 279 Mail option 22 271 Mail Protocol option 247 281 Mail server 57 Mail Server in Settings 246 Mail Storage 311 Mail Transfer Options dialog 85 117 Delete all messages on server be sure 86 Delete all messages that have been retrieved 86 Delete messages marked for deletion 85 Fetch all message headers to In mailbox 86 Retrieve messages marked for retrieval 86 Retrieve messages marked for retrieval option 85 Retrieve new mail 85 Send queued messages 85 Transfer mail for the following personalities 86 Mailbox Display Settings 261 Mailboxes compacting all 118 compacting one 118 creating during transfer 135 creating in folders 121 creating i
416. s or her shared folder all members of the family can see tt It s like maintaining a family album that can be shared with members of a family no matter where they live When communicating between members of your group email messages from the group members are automatically routed to the mailbox of your choice However you can assign only one mailbox per group You do ESP functions from the ESP Groups window found on the Tools menu These are the basic tasks in creating and maintaining a share group m Create a share group m Assign the share group a mailbox in Eudora and shared folder on your hard drive m Invite members to join the share group m Configure how ESP will update the shared folders Configure how your group members are notified of changes to the shared folder a Maintain group membership by inviting or deleting members or by synchronizing all shared folders However you may be asked to join a share group If so answer the invitation and you can create a new shared folder and mailbox 287 Installing ESP 288 Eudora User Manuall Important You can only belong to a group on one computer For example you can use your home computer to set up a group for family photos and you can use your work computer to set up a group for a work related project However you cannot use both your home and work computer to view your family photos in your family group If you try one or both computers will miss some of the pho
417. s ready for sending the next time queued messages are sent A selected message must have the Sendable status This command appears only if the Immediate send option is turned off in the Sending Mail settings it replaces Send Immediately above Displays the Change Queueing dialog so that you can change the send or queue status of the currently open or selected outgoing message This command appears in place of Send Immediately or Queue For Delivery depending on whether Immediate send is turned on or off in the Sending Mail settings Submenu Changes any of the following properties of the currently open or selected message queueing status priority label personality or server options See the separate section below for more details Note that the Status Priority Label and Server Options submenus under this submenu correspond to the column popup menus for the corresponding columns in an open mailbox window or a Search window with the Results pane visible For an outgoing message the Personality submenu corresponds to the Personality popup in the From field of an outgoing message Transfers the currently open or selected message into the Trash mailbox Permanently removes the currently open or selected message from your Macintosh without first transferring it to the Trash mailbox If the message has attachments these are moved into the Finder Trash Caution Nuked messages cannot be recovered You can recover their attachments ho
418. s web sites and home pages To insert a horizontal rule in an outgoing message do the following 1 Inthe message body put the insertion point where you want the horizontal line to appear 2 From the Edit menu choose Text then Insert Horizontal Rule or click the Insert Hori zontal Rule on the composition window formatting toolbar A horizontal line is inserted at the insertion point or on the line immediately below if the insertion point is in a line of text To insert a picture in your message do the following 1 Inthe message body put the insertion point where you want the picture to appear 2 From the Edit menu choose Text then Insert Graphic 3 Choose a graphic file from the dialog The picture is inserted and your recipient will see it in the message body when the message is opened You can drag to move the picture and you can type text around it You can also insert a picture into your message by dragging the graphics file from your desktop into the message body With QuickTime version 4 0 or later installed on your Macintosh you can insert a variety of items into your outgoing messages using the Insert Graphic command or drag and drop You can insert graphics files in any formats QuickTime accepts for example JFIF JPEG GIF TIFF PNG BMP Windows Bitmap MacPaint Photoshop QuickDraw Picture PICT QuickDraw GX Picture QuickTime Image File Silicon Graphics Image File Targa Eudora User Manual Attaching a F
419. sage Sounds New mail sound From the popup menu choose the sound you d like to hear when new mail arrives Attention sound From the popup menu choose the sound youd like to hear when Eudora needs attention Hosts The Hosts settings tell Eudora what servers to use and how to use them To display the Getting Started settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Click the Hosts icon The Hosts settings dialog appears Hosts settings Settings Checking Mail Mail Server incaming mytTirm cam ef Overlap POPS commands for better performance LET Tool bar Et betting Attention Sending Mail SMTP Server outgoing myfi rm com You only need to fill this in if it s different from your Mail Server above C Use mail exchange records Directory Services PhfLOAP Server ph myfirm com Finger Server finger myfirm cond Ej Live directory service Queries Extra Warnings i Mood Watch All connections ef ONS load balancing D Maj Internet Dialup Eudora User Manual Hosts Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Checking Mail Mail Server blank This field should contain the name you entered in the Mail Host field of the Getting Started dialog If not enter the full name of the incoming mail server For example curly myfirm com Overlap POP3 commands for better performance off Check this b
420. ser Manual 204 Spell Checking settings Settings Check spelling Automatically as you type C Only when requested vit Fee when sending queveing message with misspellings Ignore words with _ Initial capitals Nostromo O Mixed capitals noST Romo LOI Numbers n8str9mo L_ All capitals i NOSTROMO Suggest words that Look like the word you typed Sound like the word you typed W Look or sound like the word a Never make suggestions cancer 0 Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Check Spelling Automatically as you type lf Automatically as you type is on Eudora checks your spelling as you are typing within a message a text file or a signature file As you type spelling errors are highlighted and underlined You can make corrections now or later Only when requested lf Only when requested is on Eudora checks your spelling only when you select Check Spelling from the Spelling submenu or its associated shortcut or toolbar button Warn when sending queueing message with misspellings off lIf you turn this setting on the message is first checked for spelling errors If no misspellings are found the message is sent or queued But if misspellings are found the errors are highlighted and an alert appears giving you the choice of either sending the message as is with the errors Send Anyway or correcting the errors before sending Cancel If this setting i
421. sonal dialog is described in the Adding a Person to the Address Book on page 183 To enter Home information for this entry do the following 1 Inthe left side of the window choose the entry for whom you want to enter information His or her nickname appears in the Nickname field 2 Click the Home tab The Home dialog appears 186 Eudora User Manual Adding Entry Information Address Book Home dialog Nickname Uncle Joe O O OO O A Recipient List Personal Street 1234 Main Street Address City San Diego State Province CA Country Zip Postal Code 92103 Phone 619 291 9876 Fax 619 654 3456 Mobile 619 659 9742 Webs www JoeCamp com Swap with Work Primary Information 3 Inthis dialog you can type postal information phone numbers and a web site address for this person All fields are optional 4 Ifyou d like to swap the Home and Work dialog information click Swap with Work 5 If the information listed here is this person s main information check the Primary Information box 187 Adding Entry Information Eudora User Manual To enter work information do the following 1 Click the Work tab The Work dialog appears Address Book Work dialog Nickname ff Recipient List Title Manager Company ABC Technical Street 574 Lake Blyd Address Suite 202 city Goeanside _ State Province CA_____ Country f USA 0 Zip Postal Code 92103 Phone
422. sonality turn on the Skip messages over K option in the Checking Mail settings dialog and specify a size in the text box See Checking Mail on page 246 m For other personalities choose a personality and turn on the Skip messages over K option in the in the Personality Extras settings dialog Specify a size in the text entry box for each personality See Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only on page 280 Only the first few lines of the messages that exceed that size are transferred with a note at the bottom stating that the whole message has not been transferred If you decide you want to transfer the whole message turn on the Fetch icon l in the open message window s icon bar or set the message summary s server action to Fetch from Server then check mail again You can also use the Trash icon or the Fetch amp Delete server action so that the message is deleted from the server after it is transferred to your computer If you decide you do not want the message and want to delete it from the server turn on the Trash icon in the open message window s icon bar or set the message summary s server action to Delete from Server then check mail again Eudora User Manual Managing Your Mail on the POP Server Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions To check your mail and give special transfer and storage instructions to the server do the following 1 While pressing the Option key choose Check Ma
423. ss Book within Eudora s Address Book Sponsored and Paid modes only To create an address book within the Eudora Address Book do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Address Book or press Command L Or if the Address Book is in an inactive window in an open tabbed window group click its tab The Address Book window appears Entering a new address book in the Address Book SSSSSSSSSE__SFY yspj ss R_S T JS tSSJTt stdtHtoHoolUTH Ad re Book cD Address Book at Filters Kes Directory Services Link History vw By D 1 Reviient ust lt E Eudora Nicknames 7 Family ba rll Nene Mom E Sis First Name Last Name S Uncle Joe p D History List This nickname will expand to the following address es p Work address book G New Nickname chy New Address Book Co e Bec 2 Inthe Address Book window click ley New Address Book A new address book entry appears in the list 182 Eudora User Manual 3 Adding a Person to the Address Book In the highlighted text field type the name of the new address book next to the address book icon p When finished click anywhere or press Enter and the address book file appears in the list and you can now add new entries to your newly created address book Adding a Person to the Address Book To create a new entry in an address book do the following 1 2 you want this person s information listed Click G New Nickname From the Window menu ch
424. ssage or try to quit Eudora with queued messages waiting to be sent To do this turn on those options in the Extra Warnings settings dialog See Extra Warnings on page 272 Queuing a Message to Send at a Certain Time You can specify that a message be sent at a certain time in the future To do this for the current outgoing message do the following 1 From the Message menu choose Change 2 From the Change submenu choose Queueing the Change Queueing dialog appears Change Queuing dialog Change Queueing Send message Right Now Next Time Queued Messages are Sent On or after Time FAIRS a Date 12 14 97 Don t Send 3 Choose one of the following options m If you choose Right Now the message is sent as soon as you click OK m f you choose Next Time Queued Messages are Sent the message is sent the next time queued messages are sent such as via the Send Queued Messages command from the File menu m If you choose On or after you can use the Time and Date fields to fill in the time and date you want the message to be sent The message is saved in the Out mailbox showing a clock icon in the Status column and is sent when the speci fied time arrives Note For the message to be sent at the specified time Eudora must be running at that time If not then the message Is sent the first time Eudora is started after the specified time has passed Eudora User Manual Sending or Queuing a Message
425. ssages from the Special menu Your open message or selected message summaries are immediately filtered according to the new filter You can choose one of three content matches From contains Any Recipient contains or Subject contains m From contains the default Select to match the message against the From field the sender of the messages you selected If you selected multiple messages and they do not have a common sender this field is left blank In either case you can edit the field The From field of a target message must contain the information in this box but does not have to exactly equal it m Any Recipient contains Select to match the message against any of the recipients in the messages you selected recipients are contained in the To and Cc fields and in an outgoing message the Bcc field Choose one recipient from the popup list accessed from the arrow button next to the field or edit the text in the field Note that the information you enter here must be contained in any of the recipient fields of the target message but does not have to exactly equal the recipient field m Subject contains Select to match the message against the Subject field of the messages you selected If you have selected multiple messages and they do not have a common Subject this field is left blank In either case you can edit the field The Subject line of a target message must contain the information in this box but does not have
426. st For example suppose your incoming mail account is John Davis worldmail myfirm com but your return address is John Davis myfirm com You would then enter John Davis myfirm com in this field Checking Mail The Checking Mail settings determine how Eudora checks for and receives your incoming mail messages Note The display of some of the fields in this settings dialog depends on what you choose in the Server Configuration field POP or IMAP Following the fields common to both server configurations are listed and then the fields particular to each server configuration POP and then IMAP Eudora User Manual Checking Mail To display the Checking Mail settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Click the Checking Mail icon The Checking Mail settings dialog appears Checking Mail settings POP server Account Server Information Mail Host outgoi ng myfi r m com Mail Frotocol w POP i MAP Authentication Passwords Kerberos g APOP a Getting Started f Save password ef Overlap commands Connection ef Check for mail every minutes _ Don t aute check when using battery ef Use background threading Composing Mail P ef Send on check Mail Management _ Leave on server for 0 days _ Pelete from server when emptied from trash _ Skip messages over K Spell Checking Attachments Select the settings you want to change Settings are des
427. structions For more details see Queuing a Message to Send at a Certain Time on page 54 Queuing a Message to Send Later If you want to put your messages in a queue in the Out mailbox to send all together at a later time be sure the Immediate send option is turned off in the Sending Mail settings dialog See Sending Mail on page 250 To put the current message in the queue do the following m From the Message menu choose Queue For Delivery or click Queue or press Command E The message window is closed if it was open and the message is saved in the Out mailbox marked Q Queued messages in the Out mailbox ee 10 25 AM 0700 Eudora URL Bruce Strayerimyf 16 28 AM OFO tomorrow s meeting TerryBoy lem ana 16 29 AM OFO Eudora To send all of your queued messages do the following m From the File menu choose Send Queued Messages or press Command dash The Task Progress window appears momentarily at the top of the screen indicating the progress of the transmission 53 Sending or Queuing a Message Eudora User Manual 54 If you have the Immediate send option turned off but want to send a message immedi ately hold down the Option key and click Queue The Change Queuing dialog appears and you can select the Send message Right Now option However if you select this option all messages that are queued in the Out box will be sent You can set up Eudora to warn you if you try to delete queued me
428. t To display the Getting Started settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Click the Getting Started icon The Getting Started settings dialog appears Getting Started settings settings Checking Mail Username dohn Dawis Mail Server serwer myfirm com sending Mail Real Mame John Davis Sending Mail i SMTP Server smtpserver mytirm com You only need to fill this in if it s different fram your Mail Server above Return Address John Davis mytirm com You only need to fill this in if it s different from Username MailServer Camposing Mail Spell Checking Attachments H 245 Checking Mail 246 Eudora User Manual Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Checking Mail Username blank required entry Enter your user name that is the name you use to log into your primary email account This name is provided by your Internet Service Provider ISP or your company s email administrator For example in the incoming mail account John Davis worldmail myfirm com the login name is John Davis Mail Server blank required entry Enter the name of your incoming mail server for your principal email account All incoming messages to your primary account are routed through this server Use the Hosts settings dialog to specify whether this server uses POP Post Office Protocol or IMAP Internet Messa
429. t but you can use the Include Macintosh Information icon to force the document to be encoded with the desired encoding Sending Attachments to Non Eudora Users If you send an attachment to someone who does not use Eudora the attached file may be included at the end of the message in the chosen attachment format AppleDouble AppleSingle BinHex or Uuencode Your recipient should save the message as a file then decode the file using an application appropriate for the encoding method you used when you sent the message Note The recipient of the attachment must have the supporting application software to open view and print the attachment file you send For example if you send a Word docu ment the recipient must have Word installed on their computer Inserting the Contents of a Text File into a Message The contents of a text file can be inserted directly into a message and then edited if desired To insert a text file into a message take these steps 1 Put the insertion point where you want the text inserted 2 From the Message menu choose Attach Document 3 Select the text file you want 4 Click Insert The text from the file is inserted into your message and you can edit it as normal Including a URL in a Message Sponsored and Paid modes only To include an automatically hotlinked URL in an outgoing message enclose the URL with less than and greater than signs angle brackets to ensure that your recipient s emai
430. t Eudora does when it delivers you new mail or when it is running in the background and wants your attention To display the Getting Attention settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Getting Attention icon The Getting Attention settings dialog appears Eudora User Manual Getting Attention Getting Attention settings Settings a Tool bar a Getting Attention When something exciting happens z Put up an alert ef Flash an icon in the menu bar qf Open mailbox new mail only wf Play a sound More attention getting behavior A Say OK to alerts after 2 minutes yf Show Task Progress during background activity _ Open incoming message with error Sounds New mail sound Eudora New Mail Extra Warnings Attention sound Eudora Attention i Hood Watch D a o Internet Dialup Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below When something exciting happens put up an alert onJ When this setting is on an alert dialog notifies you when new mail is received Flash an icon in the menu bar on When this setting is on an icon flashes in the menu bar when Eudora needs attention Eudora uses two different icons They are a mail flag when you have new mail and an envelope with an exclamation point in it for everything else New mail and attention icons PAIL ki Open mailbox new mail only on When this se
431. t are attached to this message 229 Transfer Menu 226 Eudora User Manual Choose this command Mark as Immediately mark this message on the IMAP server as deleted Deleted This happens Remove Immediately remove the message from your local cache in the Cached IMAP Folder but leave the original message on the IMAP Contents server Transfer Menu This menu lets you transfer the currently open message or the currently selected message summaries in a mailbox window to another mailbox Note If you hold down the Option key while transferring the message s a copy of the message is placed in the destination mailbox and the original message is left where it is Transfer menu Transfer gt In gt Out gt Trash De We Offer gt Books 3 CDs gt Games gt MOVIES gt Family gt Friends gt School gt Work Choose this command pin Transfers the current message s to the In mailbox Out Transfers the current message s to the Out mailbox Transfers the current message s to the Trash mailbox Displays the New Mailbox dialog to create a new mailbox then transfers the current message s into that mailbox Note If New is selected from a folder submenu the new mailbox is created in that folder This happens Eudora User Manual Choose this command Your Mailboxes Your Folders IMAP Mailboxes and Folders Special Menu This happens Tra
432. t by default setting is turned on in the Miscellaneous settings Eudora User Manual Modifiers Press this key and choose this command Displays this modified command Then this happens Shift Option Turbo Redirect Performs a Turbo Redirect as above but without Redirect To Without Delete To deleting the original message performs a simple Redirect if the Turbo redirect by default setting is turned on in the Miscellaneous settings Shift Reply With Reply Quoting Replies with the selected stationery quoting the Selection With selected text only Option Reply With Reply To All With Replies with the selected stationery to the sender and all recipients or just the sender if the Reply to all By default setting is turned on in the Replying settings Shift Option Reply Quoting Replies to the sender and all recipients using the Reply With Selection To All With selected stationery and quoting the selected text only or just the sender if the Reply to all By default setting is turned on in the Replying settings Option Send Change Queueing Displays the Change Queueing dialog to change Immediately or the queueing status of the current message Option Queue For Delivery Shift Option Nukes the message Removes it permanently from Delete your computer without first moving it to the Trash mailbox Caution Nuked messages cannot be recovered Special Menu Shift Make Address Make Address Book
433. t in this file As distributed Eudora uses returns for new lines in this file That can be changed by editing the last characters of STR resource id 8000 string 5 Eudora will use whatever nonprintable characters are at the end of the string The mail begins with a UUCP envelope The stands for the four digit sequence number mentioned above in the section SMTP Server It increments as each message is sent X macO Commands for the UUCP system are put in this file These commands are all editable via ResEdit they are distributed with returns at the ends U user mac identifies you STR id 8000 string 1 F D macO this file contains your message 8000 2 DimacO use your mail for input 8000 3 C rmail recipient all recipients of the mail are listed here 8000 4 Eudora User Manual Using MIME Using MIME MIME stands for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions MIME serves two major purposes m Allows mail applications to tell one another what sort of data is in mail m Provides standard ways for mail applications to encode data so that it can be sent through the Internet mail system MIME Encodings The Internet uses SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to move mail around SMTP is limited to the US ASCII character set This is a problem for people who speak languages other than American English and so need accented characters or non American letters or for people who want to use spe
434. t of message headers and the message body and any attachments smaller than the specified size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message Any attachments larger than the specified size are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later If you want Eudora to retrieve all of your IMAP attachments for this account enter a large number in this field If you don t want attachments retrieved when you check your mail enter 0 in this field Full message with attachments Turn this option on to retrieve the full message and all attachments regardless of size for each incoming IMAP message for this person ality Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server Turn this option on and Eudora will try to create a Trash mailbox on the IMAP server the first time you delete a message from any mailbox store for this IMAP personality The purpose of the Trash mailbox is let you have a storage place for deleted mail as you would with a POP account You can keep all of your deleted mail in the Trash mailbox either to empty the mailbox at some point or retrieve deleted messages from that mailbox before they are removed from the IMAP server Stationery Select a stationery from the popup for this IMAP personality or Signature Select a signature from the popup for this IMAP personality The statio nery setting will override the signature For more information see Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality o
435. t server Different commands are shown on this submenu depending on whether the server copy of the current message is stored on a POP or IMAP server Both variations of the submenu are shown below For more details on the POP versions of these commands see Server Status Column on page 116 and Managing Your Mail on the POP Server on page 81 IMAP users see Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server on page 87 for details on the IMAP versions of these commands Server Options submenu for POP left and IMAP servers Do Nothing Fetch Message Text Fetch from Server Fetch Attachments Delete from Server ark as Deleted Fetch amp Delete Remove Cached Contents Choose this command This happens Do Nothing The next time mail is checked don t do anything with the message on the POP server don t fetch it don t delete it Fetch from The next time mail is checked download the entire message Server from the POP server Delete from The next time mail is checked delete the message from the Server POP server Fetch amp Delete The next time mail is checked download the entire message from the POP server and delete the message from the POP server Choose this command This happens Fetch Immediately download from the IMAP server the entire text of Message Text the message including the message header and the message body Fetch Immediately download from the IMAP server all attachment files Attachments tha
436. t text For more information on these message plug ins see their README files in the Eudora Stuff folder Also when you install Eudora a number of resource plug ins are automatically placed in the Extra Plugins folder in the Eudora Application Folder These resource plug ins however are not yet installed or plugged in To use them you must install them see the installation instructions section For more information on these resource plug ins see Eudora Folders on page 311 and also see the README file in the Extra Plugins folder itself Installing and Using Eudora Plug ins The installation procedure is the same whether you re installing a message plug in or a resource plug in 1 Quit Eudora 2 Drag the message or resource plug in file into the Eudora Stuff folder contained in your Eudora Folder the folder that contains your Eudora application 3 Restart Eudora The message or resource plug in is now available Note You can also install both message and resource plug ins in the Eudora Folder itself the same folder containing your Eudora application or in whatever folder you keep the Eudora application See Eudora Folders on page 311 Message plug ins once installed become available in one of the following places in Eudora depending on the kind of function they perform m As commands on the Message Plug ins submenu under the Edit menu m As icons on the icon bar of outgoing message windows or in
437. t the end of a mail check when it was connected by Eudora but it does not disconnect at the end of a mail check when it was connected by another application If this setting is off your Internet dialup software will not automatically disconnect at the end of a mail check even if it was connected by Eudora Use this setting to minimize the time you are connected to your service provider Miscellaneous The Miscellaneous settings control other assorted Eudora functions that are not otherwise categorizable To display the Miscellaneous settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Miscellaneous icon The Miscellaneous settings dialog appears Miscellaneous settings Settings Miscellaneous Settings e Close messages with mailbox A ee ef Empty Trash on Quit ef Turbo redirect by default _ Re sort mailboxes less often Miscellaneous _ Use old style toc files C Include outdated Return Receipt To C Write to Internet Config _ Read from Internet Contig not recommended Personalities _ Correct but slow international sorting L Generate filter reports ff Prompt for receipts requested by self Personality Extras wf Use Palee on Services if they are available _ Exchange Find and Search menu command keys ef Use system keychain to store passwords Auto Configure ns TT PT i Statistics oj Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Close messages with m
438. t you want to find 5 To find text as a complete word instead of part of another word click Whole word For example if you re looking for the word guard guard would be accepted but the word guardian would be rejected 6 If you want an exact match of uppercase and lowercase letters click Match case For example if you re looking for the word PureVoice the Match case option would reject the word purevoice 7 Once you ve entered the text string and set your options click Find in the dialog Eudora User Manual Finding Text in the Current Window Eudora looks for the first or next instance of your specified text in the currently open window beginning at the current insertion point If a match is found the text is highlighted and the window is scrolled to that text if necessary If no match is found the not found alert appears Finding the Next Occurrence of Text Find Again You can use the Find Again command to find the next occurrence of a word either in an open message or in a message Summary in an open mailbox To find the next occurrence of a word within an open message or mailbox do the following 1 Open the window or mailbox in which you want to find the text or bring it to the front of all windows 2 From the Special menu choose Find The Find submenu appears 3 To enter text choose Find The Find dialog appears 4 To find the same text choose Find Again from the Find subme
439. tationery files 313 Eudora Application Folder Eudora User Manual 314 Eudora Application Folder During the installation the Eudora Application Folder also called the Eudora Folder is installed on your hard drive in the location you specify This folder contains the following Eudora the Eudora application Eudora Stuff the folder to use for installing message plug ins and resource plug ins that you want available in Eudora this folder also contains the Eudora Shared Libraries including the Eudora LDAP Library and the Eudora Internal Speller and your Spelling Dictionaries for use with the internal speller Extra Plugins a folder containing additional plug ins that are not yet installed and that you may want to install and use Documentation the folder that contains the electronic PDF file versions of your Eudora documentation including this User Manual these PDF files can be viewed with Adobe Acrobat Reader which is provided when you install Eudora README A text file with important information and instructions some of which may not have been available for inclusion in this manual at press time Eudora Stuff Install message plug ins and resource plug ins in the Eudora Stuff folder when you want to use them with Eudora For more information including installation instructions see Using Eudora Plug ins on page 306 The Eudora Stuff folder also contains these subfolders Eudora Shared Libraries
440. te that the comparison popup values change to is and is not You must select one Eudora compares the value in the message Date field the date the message was sent or composed for sent and queued messages Note that the comparison popup values change to is is not is after and Is before and you must choose the date value from the Date selection field that appears next to the comparison popup To change the value in the Date field click the month day or year two digit number and then click the up or down arrow or enter the date values in the text field Size K Eudora compares the value of the size of the message in kilobytes K Note that the comparison popup values change to is is not is greater than and is less than and you must enter a size value whole number representing the number of K in the text field 159 Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual If you choose This will happen Eudora compares the value of the age of the message measured from the date and time it was sent or composed to the current system date and time but subject to the qualifications described below Note that the comparison popup values change to is is not is greater than and is less than and you must enter a whole number value in the adjacent text field and then choose one of the values Minutes Hours Days Weeks Months or Years from the selection popup that appears next to the text field Following
441. ted on the Spelling submenu or the context popup menu Suggestions are also not listed if the Never make suggestions option is turned on in the Spell Checking settings dialog See Spell Checking Spon sored and Paid modes only on page 253 To add any new word or variant spelling to your custom user dictionary double click the word to highlight it and then choose Add to Dictionary from Spelling submenu or the context popup menu or press Shift Option Command To remove any word from your custom user dictionary double click the word and choose Remove from Dictionary from either the Spelling submenu or the context popup menu Note You can remove a word from Eudora s built in spelling dictionary but you must spell check a message or file containing the word first Check Spelling on Send or Queue To set up Eudora to check the spelling in a message when you send or queue it do the following 1 2 3 4 From the Special menu choose Settings Scroll the Settings category list and choose Spell Checking In the Spell Checking settings dialog turn on the Warn when sending queuing message with misspellings option To save your setting and close the Settings dialog click OK If the Warn when sending queuing message with misspellings option is on the message is checked for spelling errors when the message is sent or queued If spelling errors are found they are highlighted and an alert appears giving you a choice of
442. ter to act on incoming messages only matching the content you previously entered The Incoming filter functions only after your messages are downloaded from the server m Outgoing Select Outgoing for this filter to act on messages after you send them matching the content you previously entered The Outgoing filter functions only after your messages are sent Manual Select Manual when you want the filter to be executed when you choose the Filter Messages command from the Special menu Manual is checked by default Note If you check Incoming or Outgoing or both the filter is automatic that is Eudora performs the filter operation in the background automatically when you send or check mail If you also check Manual the filter becomes both automatic and manual that is you can now manually perform the filter operation as well by choosing Filter Messages from the Special menu while message summaries are selected in a mailbox window but Eudora still filters the messages during mail sends and checks automatically In short checking Manual does not turn off Eudora s automatic filtering for that filter It just provides you another option Note Making a filter manual also gives you a good way to test the filter to your needs as soon as you set it up rather than having to wait until the next time you send or check mail After creating a manual filter check to see that it works the way you intended by selecting Filter Me
443. ter your user name that is the name you use to log into your primary email account This name is provided by your Internet Service Provider or your company s email administrator For example in the incoming mail account John Davis worldmail myfirm com the user name is John Davis Mail Server Enter the name of your incoming mail server for your principal email account All incoming messages to your primary account are routed through this server Use the Hosts Settings dialog to specify whether this server uses POP Post Office Protocol or IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol See Hosts Settings on page 21 A sample server name might be worldmail myfirm com Check with your ISP or your company s email administrator if you re not sure what to enter here Real name Enter the name assigned to your principal account generally your first and last name The text you enter here is included in the From field in all of your outgoing messages from this account It identifies you to your recipients SMTP Server Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Enter the name of the outgoing mail sever for your principal email account if it s different from our incoming mail server name for example smtp1 myfirm com All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server If the computer that runs your primary incoming mail account is the same as your outgoing mail server you can leave this field blank Opening and Confi
444. ters with the Filters Window for more information on the Filters window Cancel to cancel the filter if you change your mind The filter is cancelled and your changes are not saved Eudora User Manual Filtering Messages Detailed Filters with the Filters Window In the Make Filter dialog discussed previously you can create quick simple filters that perform one operation a mail transfer based on one match condition a piece of header information The Filters window lets you create more complex powerful filters that use multiple match conditions and perform multiple filter actions Also you can use the Filters window to create simple filters such as those created by the Make Filter command Note Filters are executed in the order that they appear in the filters window You can drag and drop filters to reorder them To open the Filters window to create or modify a filter do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Filters or click the Filters window s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group The Filters window appears and any filters you have created are listed on the left For more information on how to manipulate the Filters window alone and as part of a tabbed window see Managing Windows in Eudora on page 171 Filters window with an example filter Filters From sdorner From jdboyd L Outgoing wt Manual From alison l Header X From cschmucker Any Header loeth jdboyd Subject Timecar
445. the Clipboard at the current cursor position insertion point but inserts it as plain text only removing any style information Inserts the contents of the Clipboard at the current cursor position insertion point but inserts it as quoted excerpted text with a continuous excerpt bar sidebar at the left Deletes the selected text or detaches from the outgoing message the attachment selected in the X Attachments field Submenu Applies text styles to the selected text or paragraph or to the text beginning at the insertion point or the paragraph containing the insertion point See the figure and table below for more details on the commands on this submenu Displays the Completely Plain command on the Text submenu This command removes all styles from the current or selected text See the following section for more details Selects everything in the current message window mailbox window or other window e g Mailboxes window Inserts carriage returns at the end of each line of the selected text as appropriate This results in approximately 76 characters per line Removes the carriage returns at the end of each line of the selected text Sponsored and Paid modes only After you have typed the first few letters of a nickname Eudora finishes the nickname for you Sponsored and Paid modes only After you have typed the first few letters of a nickname Eudora finishes the nickname for you and then replaces it with the
446. the Mail Folder Parts Folder Signature Folder Spool Folder Stationery Folder Eudora Application Folder Eudora Stuff Extra Plugins Documentation Sources Anonymous ftp ftp eudora com Eudora Web Site Eudora Information Obtaining an Internet Email Server Ph Server Source Code Password Change Server Kerberos Mail Transport Outgoing Mail Incoming Mail More Information Using UUCP Settings Dialog for UUCP Operation Internals Mail Drop Format Working Files D macO X macO Using MIME MIME Encodings MIME Labeling Practical Issues Turning Off Quoted Printable 311 311 312 312 312 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 313 313 314 314 315 315 316 316 316 316 316 317 317 317 317 318 318 318 319 319 320 320 320 320 320 320 321 321 322 322 322 XV XVI Mapping Between MIME Types and Macintosh Types sending Receiving Troubleshooting Glossary Index 323 323 324 325 329 333 Contents Introducing Eudora Email Introducing Eudora Email Welcome to Eudora Email 5 0 Eudora Email hereafter referred to as Eudora is a comprehensive electronic mail email software program that accesses your Internet Service Provider ISP or network to receive and send your email messages Eudora manages these messages within your computer In Eudora you can write messages and send them with custom stationery and signatures You can send files both text and graphic created in other programs and
447. the default Attach ments Folder located in your Eudora Folder located in your System or Documents Folder for attachments until you designate a new folder 95 Editing Incoming Messages Eudora User Manual 96 Also you can set up a filter to move incoming attachments automatically to a folder you specify on your desktop based on match criteria for the incoming messages carrying the attachments To do this use the Move Attachments filter action selecting the folder from the folder selection dialog that displays For details see this action under Filter Actions on page 142 This feature is useful for separating attachments by personality For example you can create folders for each personality and have Eudora automatically place each personality s attachments into its dedicated attachment folder Editing Incoming Messages You can edit the message body in an incoming message if you click the Pencil button on the icon bar Fa You can also edit the Subject in the icon bar at any time even with the Pencil button off this is the subject shown in the message summary To edit an incoming message do the following 1 Click the Pencil icon button to turn it on 2 Edit the message body 3 When finished from the File menu choose Save or press Command S to save it and close the message If you close or transfer the message without saving or if you click the Pencil again to turn off editing an alert asks if you wa
448. the servers you used for your Ph or LDAP and Finger services are carried over into your new Hosts settings Looking Someone Up Note If you are using Eudora in Light mode you cannot perform multiple or simultaneous searches To look someone up on the Internet or your local intranet do the following 1 From the Window menu choose Directory Services or press Command Y Or if the Directory Services window is in a group of tabbed windows click its tab The Directory Services window appears Directory Services window with sample entry Directory Services cp Address Book 2 Filters kp Directory Services okun Enter query server is ldap four 11 com rupert birki Cd 2 Inthe Enter query field type the name of the person you are looking for or associated information in the format allowed by the current server s protocol the current server is shown in parentheses after the Enter query label Using Ph you can enter the person s first name last name first and last name email address or any Ph command except login commands or commands that require login Administrators For information about the Ph server source code see Sources on page 316 203 Looking Someone Up Eudora User Manual Using LDAP you can enter last name only first and last names and other informa tion For advanced instructions on using LDAP in Eudora see the separate docu ment Using LDAP in Eudora installed as a PDF fi
449. the size information for that mailbox m First number 5 shows the number of messages in the mailbox m Second number 3k is the total amount of disk space those messages require m Third number 4K is the amount of unused disk space associated with that mailbox 117 Message Preview Pane Eudora User Manual 118 Mailbox showing mailbox size display Stella Ronda Justine Correa G Justine Correa Justine Correa Unused space is created when messages are deleted from a mailbox This unused space is automatically removed when it becomes too large To manually clean up the wasted space in all mailboxes do the following m Click the mailbox s size display for that mailbox only or to compact all your mailboxes recycle all the unused space hold down the Option key and click on any mailbox size display Important Try not to keep too many messages in your In Out or Trash mailboxes because it slows down your system s performance If you wish to keep these messages it s better to transfer them to other mailboxes Note If you highlight to select more than one message the number of selected messages appears to the left of the mailbox s message number for example before the 5 in the above example To show the count you must have the Show count of selected messages turned on in the Mailbox Display settings dialog See Mailbox Display on page 261 Message Preview Pane If the Show message previews by defau
450. this personality to your computer and leaves the message on the POP server for the specified number of days If you leave the box blank your mail is left on the server indefinitely If this setting is off mail for this personality is deleted from the POP server after it is transferred to your computer 281 Personality Extras Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manual 282 More Checking Mail IMAP Location Prefix blank This tells Eudora where to look for your mail on the incoming IMAP mail server for this personality Normally you enter a folder location representing the pathway to your mailboxes An example mailbox location prefix is usr mail If you are not sure what to enter in this field ask your email administrator or your ISP Download options When you check mail for your IMAP account for this personality these options you can only choose one tell Eudora how much of each incoming message to retrieve from the IMAP server to your computer You can retrieve just the essential headers or alternately the entire message and any attachments under a specified size Minimal headers only on If this setting is on only a limited set of message headers and nothing else is retrieved for each incoming IMAP message for this personality The remaining headers the message body and any attachments are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later The headers tell you whom the message
451. ting a Personality on page 73 m Check Mail Checks mail for the selected personalities Eudora User Manual Creating a New Personality m Edit Displays the Personalties settings dialog for you to add a new or modify an existing personality s information You can modify only one personality at a time You can drag one or more received messages to a personality item in the personalities window Eudora will Reply as that personality to the message Creating a New Personality To create a new personality do the following 1 2 From the Window menu choose Personalities The Personalities window appears Click the New button An untitled personality item appears with the personality icon In the name box for the new item type a name for the personality and press Return If the name box is not already highlighted for editing click it once After a short pause the box is highlighted With the personality item still highlighted click once on the icon if it is not click the Edit button The Personalities settings dialog appears Sample Personalities settings dialog SS Jetting Personality to Configure Personality Mame Checking Mail Lf Cheek mail every minutes e Check mail on manual checks Internet Dialup Miscellaneous Personalities Sending Mail SMTP Server SMTP myfirmcom a Personality Extras Auta Configure Return address John Davis mytirnmo c
452. ting by another mailbox column The original sort remains intact but it is now grouped with the new selec tion For example if the mailbox is sorted by Sender with each group of messages in order by Date and then you hold down the Shift key and sort by Size the messages are still grouped by Sender but the groups are now in order by Size 145 Saving a Message to a File Eudora User Manual The normal sort order is ascending which means from bottom to top Ascending Date order for example means that the newest messages are at the bottom and the oldest messages are at the top To sort in descending order top to bottom hold down the Option key and select a sort option from the Sort Descending submenu under the Special menu To keep messages with the same Subject together all the time do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Sort The Sort submenu appears 2 From the Sort submenu choose Group Subjects If this is checked messages with the same Subject for example conversational threads including replies are kept together in the mailbox regardless of whether you sort by Date Sender etc A bullet next to the Subject column heading tells you that the Group Subjects option is active Sorting by a column makes the column s heading button look pressed Incoming mail that arrives in a mailbox with a pressed in column heading button is automatically sorted by that column subject to the restrictions above For example if
453. tings 2 Click the Sending Mail icon The Sending Mail settings dialog appears Sending Mail settings Settings Server Return Address John Davis myfirm cam You only need to fill this in if it s different fram Username MailServer This will be added to addresses you type that don t have domains on them SMTP Server SMTP myfirm cam You only need to fill this in it it s different from checking mail server ef Allow authorization Connection Composing Mail ii ie ef mmediate send ef Send on check ef Use separate thread for sending Spell Checking Message vf Fix curly quotes v Keep copies _ Automatically Fee to original mailbox Attachments Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Server Return address if not username mailhost blank This is your return email address carried over from the Getting Started settings dialog Default Domain blank Enter the domain name that Eudora automatically adds to an unqualified name An unqualified name is a name that doesn t have an sign followed by a domain name For example suppose your domain name is myfirm com and you enter that in this field If you address a message to joe assuming joe is not a nickname in your Address Book Eudora sends the message to joe myfirm com SMTP Server blank This is the name of your outgoing SMTP mail server carried over from the SMTP field of your Hosts set
454. tings If the computer that runs your incoming mail server POP or IMAP also runs an SMTP server you can leave this field blank 250 Eudora User Manual Sending Mail Allow Authentication on If this setting is checked Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MD5 If CRAM MDb5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used Connection Immediate send on When this setting is on the button at the far right of the icon bar in an open new message composition window is labeled Send Clicking the Send button immediately sends the message to the SMTP server If this setting is off the same button is labeled Queue and clicking it places the message in the Out mailbox marked ready for delivery Q Use separate thread for sending on When this setting is on the sending function performs simultaneously with other Eudora functions For example if this setting and the Use background threading setting in the Checking Mail settings are both turned on you can send receive and compose messages all at the same time Send on check on When this setting is on any messages that are queued in the Out mailbox are sent when mail is checked whether the mail check is automatic or manual Message Fix curly quot
455. tion Open to Your Lookup Server for Live Queries If you turn on the Live directory service queries option in the Hosts settings dialog see Specifying Your Default Lookup Servers on page 202 the following occurs 205 Performing Turbo Lookups on Selected Text Eudora User Manual 206 m The connection with your current Ph or LDAP server shown in parentheses after the Enter query field label is kept open Your queries are automatically sent to the server when you pause after typing the query text in the Enter query field If you type some text pause and then get too many matches continue typing more characters in your query string to narrow the search Note The live query feature is not available for Finger queries Performing Turbo Lookups on Selected Text To perform a rapid automatic lookup on text selected anywhere in Eudora including the Directory Services window do the following 1 From anywhere in Eudora select the text that you want to use as your directory services query string Note If you don t select text in the current message the turbo lookup occurs on the message s sender 2 Hold down the Shift key and choose Directory Services from the Window menu or press Shift Command Y You can also hold down Shift and click the Directory Services toolbar button or hold down Shift and click the window s tab if it is an inactive window in an open tabbed window group The Directory Services w
456. tion as it occurs To open the Task Progress window do the following m From the Window menu choose Task Progress To show the Task Progress window s tab do the following m From the Window menu choose Tabs while the window is open To hide the tab select Tabs again Note To cause the Task Progress window to open and close automatically during and after network activity turn on Show Task Progress during background activity option in the Getting Attention settings dialog This option is on by default For more information see Getting Attention on page 268 Following is a sample Task Progress window showing email being retrieved from the incoming mail server Task Progress window showing mail being downloaded Task Progress Checking Checking mail for Dominant Messages remaining to transfer Receiving file cobra exe lat Check Checking now Next Check Not scheduled ee The Task Progress window also displays error messages as the errors are encountered In the following example the Task Progress window shows a password error indicating that the user entered an incorrect password during a mail check To clear the error in this case the correct password must be entered Task Progress window displaying an error Task Progress Error while checking mail for Business said PASS And then the POP server said ERR Password supplied for montgomery is incorrect at Last Check 4 41 PM Next C
457. tos However if you have two different email addresses you can belong to a share group on more than one computer If you check mail with one email address at work and a different address at home you just need to invite yourself to the share group twice once for each address Once you re in the group with one account you can send an invitation to your other account yourself ESP will treat your two accounts as two different share group members and each will receive all the updates Installing ESP ESP should install automatically into the Eudora Plug ins folder However if you need to install ESP yourself do the following m Toinstall ESP on the Mac copy the ESP plug in file to the Eudora Stuff folder which is found in the Eudora Application folder Tips on Using ESP Although ESP is a valuable tool for you and your group when working on the same docu ment or file there are some limitations Here are a few tips on using ESP that will make working on group files more efficient Do realize that the ESP folder is shared If you take a file out of the shared folder it will be removed from each member s shared folder Do invite people to be in your group Some of them might have to become familiar with ESP before becoming full members As they are gaining experience tell them how to become full members m Do use ESP to keep a shared list of current email addresses for group mailings ESP updates email addresses when you chan
458. tructions for the incoming server POP server only do the following 1 Hold down the Option key and from the File menu choose Send Messages Specially The Mail Transfer Options dialog appears Mail Transfer Options dialog Mail Transfer Options Transfer mail tor the following Mail checking amp sending options personalities lt lt Dominant Lyf Retrieve new mail Business Send queved messages Family Friends Fun C Delete messages marked for deletion Retrieve messages marked for retrieval Legal duties Office LJ Delete all messages that have been retrieved School J Delete all messages on server be sure T Fetch all message headers to In mailbox Cancer Cox 2 Set the options you want and click OK All the actions you have requested are completed Using SMTP Authentication SMTP authentication operates automatically in Eudora Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail just like it does for receiving mail Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM MDB5 If CRAM MD5 is not available LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used Once Eudora discovers that your SMTP server allows authentication when you send messages a dialog appears that prompts you to enter a password If for some reason you prefer that Eudora not attempt to login to your SMTP server you can tell it not
459. tt Account Information Return Address John Davis emyfir mm com You only need to fill this in if it s different from Username e MailServer This will be added to addresses you type that don t have domains on them Nickname Expansion Lf Auto complete nicknames yf Expand nicknames immediately Use these settings Signature SR Standard vf Word wrap ef May use Quoted Printable z Keep copies of outgoing mail ah Composing Mail Spell Checking Or take settings amp text from stationery eee Ce Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Account Information Return address if not username mailserver blank This field is carried over from the Getting Started and Sending Mail settings dialogs Default Domain blank This field is carried over from the Sending Mail settings dialog Nickname Expansion Auto complete nicknames on Sponsored and Paid modes only When this setting is on a name you enter in the To Cc or Bcc field of a new message composition window appears in boldface type if a nickname for this name exists in your Address Book Eudora completes the nickname and address for you Expand nicknames immediately off Sponsored and Paid modes only If you turn this setting on nicknames you type in the recipient header fields To Cc and Bcc are replaced with the real addresses when you switch fields 202 Eudora User Manual
460. tting Text Sponsored and Paid modes only Eudora User Manuall 40 Plain Bold Italic Underline Makes the text plain the default bold italic or under lined The keyboard shortcuts are in the same order as above Command T Command B Command l and Command uU Completely Plain Clears all formatting and go back to the default settings This command is available only if you hold down the Option key while displaying the Text submenu from the Edit menu The Completely Plain command appears where the Plain command normally would The keyboard shortcut is Option Command T Quote Unquote Sponsored and Paid modes only Adds Quote or removes Unquote one level of excerpt bars to from the selected or current text Eudora uses excerpt bars to indicate or quote the sender s original text when you reply to a message The keyboard shortcuts are Command for Quote and Option Command for Unquote Left Center Right Sponsored and Paid modes only Aligns the selected or current paragraph to the left the center or the right of the current indent Margins Normal Sponsored and Paid modes only Makes the selected or current paragraph s left and right margins normal or flush with the message window the default Margins Indent Indent 2 Indent 3 Indent 4 Sponsored and Paid modes only Makes the selected or current paragraph s left and right margins indented one two three or four levels Margins With B
461. tting is on mailboxes are automati cally opened when new mail arrives in them and the first unread message of the last unread batch of messages is selected Play a sound on When this setting is on a sound is played when Eudora needs atten tion There are two different sounds the New mail sound played when new mail arrives and the Attention sound played for everything else Popup menus next to these titles let you select the sound you want from the available sounds on your Macintosh More attention getting behavior Say OK to alerts after 2 minutes on When this setting is on any alerts that announce a problem with sending and receiving mail automatically go away after two minutes Many network problems are temporary so this allows Eudora to try communicating again This is useful if you have automatic mail checking turned on and you are not at your computer 269 Hosts 2 0 Eudora User Manual Show Task Progress during background activity on When this setting is on the Task Progress window appears when Eudora is checking and sending mail For more details on this window see Managing Windows in Eudora on page 171 Open incoming message with error off If you turn this setting on and any incoming message with a transport error is opened you will hear a short beep Inside the message you will see a red stop sign with an error message notifying you of the problem that occurred during the retrieval of this mes
462. tting on to have Eudora send commands to your POP server immediately instead of waiting for a previous command to be completed Using this setting is faster but not all servers will comply Connection POP and IMAP Check for mail every minutes off blank Enter the number of minutes for the time interval you want Eudora to automatically check your POP server for new mail This setting works only when Eudora is running Leaving the text box empty turns off automatic checking even if you check the checkbox Also unchecking the setting turns off automatic checking even if there is a number in the text box Fifteen minutes or more is recom mended for automatic mail checks Don t auto check when using battery off Turn this setting on if you don t want your mail automatically checked when your computer is running on battery power even if you have the Check for mail every minutes setting turned on Use background threading on Turn this setting on so Eudora can check your mail in the background when an automatic or manual mail check is initiated Also you can perform other functions at the same time such as composing messages If this is off when a mail check is initiated you must wait until Eudora finishes checking your mail before you can perform another function See also the Use separate thread for sending setting in the Sending Mail settings which lets you perform other functions while Eudora sends mail in the background
463. ty An unqualified name is a name that doesn t have an at sign sign followed by a domain name This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain Also different personalities can be used to send messages to different domains For example you can use one personality to send work related messages to the domain myfirm com and another personality to send personal messages to the domain in your home email address or to your school account for example myschool edu 7 Click OK This personality is now linked to the stationery and signature you chose from the popup menus Caution Be careful when using stationery with multiple personalities Although stationery settings override most other settings there is one important exception If you change the personality of the current message and that results in the default stationery file being applied then the personality stored in the stationery file is ignored To avoid conflicts be sure that the personality saved with the stationery file matches the personality in the Personality Extras settings The personality saved with the stationery file can be identified by the personality in the Personality popup in the From field of the stationery file window T 78 Creating an IMAP Personality Eudora User Manual Creating an IMAP Personality Important Before you create a personality for an IMAP account make sure you know how to set up a
464. u Saved messages are put in the Out mailbox and if at least one recipient is entered in either the To or the Bcc field the saved message is shown with a bullet in the Status column If both the To and the Bcc fields are empty the Status column is blank The bullet indicates that the message not only has been saved but is also ready to be sent or queued a and sendable messages in the Out mailbox ralph prizioimyti 10 14 4M Gb meeting postponed Terry Boy le myfir 10 14 AM b7O0 fee you tomorrow Caroletimy firm com 10 15 4M OFGG the weekend armanhdjr eudorama 10 16 4M 0700 mowie tonight DClLifford yourfir 10 17 M 0700 How are you P o eT Gi You can continue making changes to the message or close it If you try to close an outgoing message without saving that version of the message an alert appears asking if your changes should be saved or discarded If you choose Discard and the message has never been saved the message is deleted Setting the Message Priority You can assign a priority to incoming and outgoing messages The priority is only for you and your recipients it does not affect the way mail transport systems handle the messages There are five priority levels available Each is represented by a small symbol in the icon bar of a message window and the Priority column of a message summary Normal priority is used for messages that have no assigned priorities and is shown as a blank You can also choose
465. u but note that this list may be a mixture of message plug ins with settings and those without Changes the password of your email account on the incoming mail server Note that this requires a special password change server that is not available at all sites Check with your ISP or your email administrator to see if the password changing feature is available to you Changes your password on the associated incoming mail server for each of the personalities email accounts and their variations currently selected in the open Personalities window This command appears on the Special menu only if the Personalities window is open and one or more personality items are selected in the list Note that a password change server is required for each email account for which you want to change your password Check with your ISP or your email administrator to determine whether you can use this feature for a particular email account Makes Eudora forget your password so that your mail cannot be checked without re entry of your password That is the next time you or someone else attempts to check your mail you or they will be prompted for your account password This is useful if you should step away from your desk and are concerned about others checking and reading your mail without your knowledge or authorization Makes Eudora forget your password for each of the personalities currently selected in the open Personalities window so that mail cannot b
466. u ve selected from the original message and formats the reply using the selected stationery If Reply to all By default is turned on in the Replying settings just hold down the Shift key without the Option key Displays a file selection dialog to select a Macintosh document file or application file that will be attached to and sent with the message you are composing Also used to insert the contents of a text file into the message you are composing Eudora User Manual Choose this command Attach Send Immediately Queue For Delivery Change Queueing Option Delete Nuke Shift Option Message Menu This happens Submenu The items on this submenu correspond to your installed message plug ins that create attachments Select one of the items to use that plug in to create a special file that will be attached to and sent with the message you are composing For example the PureVoice plug in lets you create a voice recording that you can attach to and send with your message See Using Eudora Plug ins in the General Reference chapter in the online user manual Sends the currently open or selected composition message right now A selected message must have the Queued or Sendable status This command appears only if the Immediate send option is turned on in the Sending Mail settings Queues the currently open or selected composition message in your Out box marking it witha Q inthe Status column so that it i
467. u whom the message is from the date and time it was sent and the subject Once you have this information you can then decide whether you want to retrieve the full message and any attachments or just delete the message Full message except attachments over K off 40 lf this setting is on and a number is entered in the box the full message full set of message headers and the message body and any attachments smaller than the specified size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message Any attachments larger than the specified size are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later If you want Eudora to retrieve all of your IMAP attachments for this account enter a large number in this field If you dont want attachments retrieved when you check your mail enter 0 in this field Full message with attachments lIf this setting is on the full message and all attach ments regardless of size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message for your domi nant personality 249 Sending Mail Eudora User Manual Note Use of a Trash mailbox for a Dominant IMAP account is governed by the Use a trash mailbox on the IMAP server setting in the Personality Extras settings when Server Config uration is set to IMAP Sending Mail The Sending Mail settings determine how Eudora sends your outgoing mail messages To display the Getting Started settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Set
468. ulation plug in will let you change lowercase text to uppercase text Eudora User Manual Using Eudora Plug ins m Adata compression plug in will let you compact an attachment file so it s much smaller and therefore much easier for you to send and for your recipients to receive and down load m A virus checking plug in will let you automatically check any incoming attachments for viruses m QUALCOMM s own PureVoice plug in installed automatically with Eudora will let you record send receive and play voice attachments so you can talk to your recipients over email and listen to their responses Plug ins that are plugged in to Eudora communicate with Eudora across a common boundary or interface called the Extended Messaging Services Application Programming Interface EMSAPI There are two kinds of Eudora plug ins m Message plug ins are extension files whose icons often look like jigsaw puzzle pieces Resource plug ins are preference files whose icons often look like a postal envelope with a small jigsaw puzzle piece below it Sample message plug in left and resource plug in UPPER ower Text EudoraTables The Eudora software comes with both message and resource plug ins see next section These are described later in this section Several third party plug ins are included in Eudora Each third party software s documentation is included in Eudora s Documentation folder If you would like to write a Eudora m
469. ullets Sponsored and Paid modes only Converts the selected or current paragraph s into a bulleted list where each paragraph is indented and begins with a bullet Selecting this command again removes the bullets and returns the text to its prior margin A checkmark appearing next to this command indicates that the bulleted list formatting is on Color Sponsored and Paid modes only Makes the text black indicated by No Color the default or the indicated color Default color options are red green blue yellow and brown Font Sponsored and Paid modes only Makes the text one of the fonts available on your Macintosh by choosing the font from the submenu Remember that your recipient may not have the same fonts you do Size Makes the text very small Smallest to very big Biggest and sizes in between The increase or decrease is based on the next or previous standard point size The full list of sizes is smallest smaller small normal big bigger and biggest Remember that you are viewing the text based on your default settings but your recip lent s settings and fonts may be different For example if you have a default font size of 10 and you edit your message text to be a bigger size it would display as 18 points to you but would display as 24 points for a recipient with a default font size of 14 Insert Horizontal Rule Sponsored and Paid modes only Inserts a horizontal line in your message text A horizontal rule
470. umber to use for connecting to the ACAP server Port 674 is the usual port for ACAP servers and is entered for you as the default Eudora User Manual Statistics Fetch Configuration Fetch Settings Now Click this button to instruct Eudora to retrieve your email account settings from the ACAP server Once the settings have been retrieved Eudora reconfig ures itself to those settings Statistics In the Statistics settings dialog you can choose the color and graph type you prefer when displaying and printing the Statistics window found in the Window menu The Statistics window displays your email usage that is the statistics on received sent and general Eudora usage You can display this information for the current or previous day week month or year To display the Statistics settings dialog do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Scroll and click the Statistics icon The Statistics settings dialog appears Statistics settings Settings Statistics Series Internet Dialup Current in B Previous Miscellaneous Average J Count IMAP messages in t just InBox Diamond Personalities Square Reset Statistics Personality Extras Auto Configure Statistics cancer ox J Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Series This column lists the different timeframes displayed in the Statistics window Current refers to the current day week month or year as
471. umn 115 Sender s timezone option 264 Sending Mail Settings 250 Immediate send option 33 sending queued messages when checking mail 55 sending with stationery 67 Sent status checkmark 57 Server email internet how to obtain 316 Server Action column 116 Server action popup 84 Server Configuration option 82 248 Server option 262 Server Options filter action 143 Servers used recently list 209 Set a changed message back to read only option 273 Setting Up the Search Conditions 157 settings 245 Settings dialog 245 Sharing a Macintosh 310 Shift key option 267 shortcuts 242 Show Balloons command 27 Show columns option 262 Show formatting toolbar option 33 260 266 Show function key labels option 268 Show message previews by default option 262 Show Task Progress during background activity option 270 Show toolbar option 268 Shutting down Eudora 27 Signature option 253 Signature popup 32 in composition window 63 Signature when not using stationery option 283 Signatures creating an additional 62 creating or modifying the Alternate 61 including in a message 63 including in all messages 63 77 modify 62 remove 63 Signatures command 61 62 Silicon Graphics Image File 42 94 Simple Filters 136 Size column 116 Size option 262 266 Size options Fixed Width Font 259 Print Font 259 Screen Font 259 Size popup 34 Size text options 40 Skip messages over K option 82 84 248 281 Skip Rest filter action 144 Small icons amp names o
472. ups Aan existing folder must not be assigned ta any other share group or be inside of a folder assigned to any other share group 8 Doone of the following m f you want to create a new folder to store all group files choose Use New Folder and type the name of the folder in the text box If you want to create a new folder in a location other than the one shown under Use New Folder go to the Finder and create a new folder Click the long gray button and choose a folder from the list Click OK If you want to store all group files in an existing folder choose Use Existing Folder and click the long gray button A list of your existing folders appears Choose one of the folders and click OK Note If you want to create a new folder in a location other than the one shown under Use New Folder choose Use Existing Folder Click the long gray button to the right of Use Existing Folder and choose your new folder from the list To create your new folder either go to the Finder and create it or click New folder in the lower left hand corner of the Choose a Folder dialog You can t use the same folder already assigned to another share group 9 Click Next The Success dialog appears 10 Click Finish Your new group is created The share group name appears in the list view attachment of the groups window Creating an ESP Group Advanced Setup After you feel comfortable creating groups you can bypass it and enter the group informa tion
473. utgoing myfirm com All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server If the computer that runs your primary incoming mail account is the same as your outgoing mail server you can leave this field blank Directory Services Ph LDAP Server Should you decide to use directory services enter the name of your directory services server that allows you to look up people on the Internet or your local intranet for example ph myfirm comor ldap myfirm com Your ISP or your email administrator can provide you with the server names to use for each type of directory service available to you that is either Ph or LDAP services Finger Server Should you decide to use Finger directory services enter the name of the server that runs the Finger protocol for Internet and intranet searches You can obtain this server name from your ISP or from your email administrator If you leave this field blank Eudora uses your SMTP server as your Finger server Live directory service queries Check this box if you want your directory services to act on search information automatically This saves you time when you perform Internet or intranet searching Note For more information on the remaining fields see Hosts on page 270 22 Eudora User Manual Opening and Configuring Eudora Specifying POP or IMAP for the Incoming Mail Server Protocol As afinal step you need to specify whether your incoming mail server uses the
474. utton to hide preview panes in mailboxes in which you don t want to see them If the preview pane is set to be hidden in every mailbox window Show message previews by default is turned off you can use the triangle button to show the preview pane in just those mailboxes you want You can change the height of the preview pane relative to the message summary list by holding down the mouse button on the preview pane size button at the bottom right of the message summary list and dragging this button up or down This button also called the splitter button is just to the right of the horizontal scroll bar Preview pane size button middle right i Looking for good home for Windows Web Fage Submission j Daily Manna from the Het wid 4j Enit this happens andor The preview pane size button is displayed only when the preview pane appears in that mailbox window 119 Creating Mailboxes and Folders Eudora User Manual 120 The following settings apply to any mailbox window in which the message preview pane is currently visible These settings which appear in the Message preview section of the Mailbox Display settings are independent of whether the Show message previews by default setting in that Settings dialog is turned on or off m Mark read after seconds Default value is 5 seconds If this setting is on then an unread message currently being previewed in the preview pane is marked read blank in the Status column a
475. ving Around icon The Moving Around settings dialog appears Moving Around settings Settings Arrowtthese modifiers to switch messages ef Command _ Shift LI Caps Lock LI Option LI Control After finishing a message a Don t open anything automatically Open the next message ie Open next unread message d Open next message if unread La Bi uh T t Finishing a message means deleting it transferring it or paging past the end of it with the space bar A More keystroke options Eudora Labels _ Tab to switch fields option tab to insert tab ef Return switches among header fields C Exchange Find and Search menu command keys Styled Text amp Moving Around Select the settings you want to change Settings are described below Eudora User Manual Toolbar Arrow these modifiers to switch messages Command lIf any of these keyboard keys are on you can hold down the keys you have selected here and use the keyboard arrows to close the current message and open the next or previous message in an open message window or preview pane The up and left arrow keys open the previous message and the down and right arrow keys open the next message If any of these are on you can use the arrow keys by themselves to move the insertion point in messages and in the preview pane If all of these settings are off you can use the arrow keys by themselves to switch to the next or previous message whethe
476. wever before emptying the Finder Trash 223 Message Menu 224 Eudora User Manual Change Submenu The Change submenu under the Message menu lets you change certain properties of the currently open or selected message Change submenu QuUeUPING Status Priority Label Personality Server Options P The Status Priority Label and Server Options submenus under this submenu correspond to the column popup menus for those columns in a mailbox window or Search window Results pane The Personality submenu corresponds to the Personality popup in the From field of an outgoing message only seed This happens Queueing Displays the Change Queueing dialog in order to change the send or queue status of the currently open or selected outgoing message Similar to Change Queueing accessed directly under the Message menu when you hold down the Option key see the previous table Submenu Changes the status of the currently open or selected message incoming or outgoing Options are Unread Read Replied Forwarded Redirected Recovered Unsendable Sendable Queued Timed Queue Sent Unsent Transfer Error and Being Sent Some of these actions are not selectable For more details on the various status values a message can have see Status Column on page 113 Priority Submenu Changes the priority of the currently open or selected message Options are Highest High Normal Low Lowest Raise raises the priorit
477. x and marked with a Q in the Status column of the message summary are sent when you check for mail whether the mail check is automatic or manual Timed queue messages those marked with a clock icon in the Status column of the Out box are sent only if their time constraints are satisfied Download options When you check mail for your IMAP account these options you can only choose one tell Eudora how much of each incoming message to retrieve from the IMAP server to your computer You can retrieve just the essential headers or alter nately the entire message and any attachments under a specified size Minimal headers only If this option is on only a limited set of message headers and nothing else is retrieved for each incoming IMAP message The remaining headers the message body and any attachments are not retrieved with the message but are left on the server for you to retrieve later The headers tell you whom the message is from the date and time it was sent and the subject Once you have this information you can then decide whether you want to retrieve the full message and any attach ments or just delete the message Full message except attachments over K If this option is on and a number is entered in the box the full message full set of message headers and the message body and any attachments smaller than the specified size are retrieved for each incoming IMAP message Any attachments larger than the specified size
478. y The Fixed Width icon appears only if a proportional font is selected in the Screen Font popup of the Fonts amp Display settings Note that the change to the viewing font is for current message only No other message is affected and the button is turned off when you close the message Subject Hi how are you Hi how are you hie is the subject that was assigned by the sender and is shown in the message summary Fetch Click the Fetch icon button to transfer the entire message to your computer the next time you check mail This icon is displayed only if the message was originally transferred in part Eudora User Manual Incoming Message Window Trash Click the Trash icon button to delete the message from the server the next time you check mail This icon is displayed only if the original message is still on the server G Get HTML Graphics Click the Get HTML Graphics icon button to transfer an HTML graphic in an open message from the web to your computer You must be connected to the Internet when you click the icon for the graphic to be transferred This icon appears only if the message contains HTML graphics for example a web page is sent to you via a browser and the Automatically download HTML graphics option is turned off in your Fonts amp Display settings at the time you opened the message For more details see Viewing HTML Graphics on page 98 Di Tow Truck Click the Tow Truck to drag any current message i
479. y Ned Freed and Nathaniel Borenstein You can find the RFCs by anonymous ftp to ds internic net in the rfc directory Or go to lt http ds internic net ds dspglintdoc html gt in your Web browser Eudora User Manual Using UUCP Using UUCP Eudora works with UNIX to UNIX Copy Protocol UUCP in almost exactly the same way that it works with the POP or IMAP and SMTP servers Attachments are supported as Is regular mail checking and the other features It is possible to mix methods for example you can use UUCP for reading mail but SMTP for sending it Eudora does not come with UUCP Three available Macintosh UUCP systems are uupc 3 0 dplatt snulbug mtview ca us gnuucp jim fpr com and UUCP Connect formerly uAccess sales intercon com UUCP Connect is commercial the other two are freeware Eudora has been tested with all three packages it works well with uupc 3 0 and UUCP Connect but it does not work smoothly with gnuucp Settings Dialog for UUCP To set up UUCP as your protocol do the following 1 From the Special menu choose Settings 2 Inthe icon category list click the Getting Started icon The Getting Started dialog appears Getting Started Settings for UUCP Settings Checking Mail Username 1 Dac AT UPC Idro p Sending Mail Real Name Robert Montgomery SMTP Server You only need to fill this in if it s different from your Mail Server above You only need to fill this
480. y by one level and Lower lowers the priority by one level For more details on priority values see Priority Column on page 114 and also see Setting the Message Priority on page 37 You can also change the priority of an open message incoming or outgoing from the Priority popup on the icon bar of the open message window Submenu Changes the label of the currently open or selected message Select one of the 15 defined labels or select None for no label For more details on label values see Label Column on page 115 and also see Mailbox Display on page 261 Personality Sponsored and Paid modes only Submenu Changes the personality associated with the currently open or selected message Select Dominant or any of your alternate personalities Note This submenu appears only if you have more than one personality set up in Eudora Eudora User Manual Message Menu Choose this command This happens Server Submenu For the currently open or selected message Options changes the action that the POP or IMAP server will perform on the server s copy of the message the next time mail is checked from that server The commands on this submenu differ according to whether the message is stored on a POP or IMAP server See the separate sections below for more details Server Options Submenu The commands on this submenu control what is done to the copy of the currently open or selected message the next time mail is checked from tha
481. year 1998 is considered one year old A message from the current year 1999 is considered less than a year old If the search is conducted on January 1 a message from yesterday December 31 of the previous year is still considered one year old Personality Eudora compares the value of the personality name for the personality associated with the message Note that the comparison popup values change to s and s not and you must select the personality name value from the Personality popup that appears next to the comparison popup The Personality popup lists all of your existing personalities To Eudora looks through all text in the To field of the message header even if it extends beyond one line or includes hundreds of addresses 160 Eudora User Manual Finding Messages in Mailboxes and Folders If you choose This will happen Eudora looks through all text in the From field of the message header generally a real name and an email address Eudora looks through all text in the Subject field of the message header even if it extends to multiple lines Note that because Eudora lets you edit the Subject in the Summary of an incoming message here we mean the Subject that appears in the message summary not the internal Subject header which is normally not editable a search on Subject may yield a different result from a search on Summary for a particular message See the description of the Summary target above for m

User Manual for Macintosh Version 5.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents